JP6652458B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  As a pachinko gaming machine as an example of a gaming machine, there is a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a collision object made of a rubber material or the like with which a game medium launched into a gaming area collides. Such a collision object absorbs an impact when the game medium collides and rebounds.

  In this type of gaming machine, for example, a game machine having a holding body for holding a collision target in a displaceable state, and holding the collision target at a predetermined position of the game panel by attaching the holding member to the game panel with screws. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-147126 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the holding body is attached to the game board with screws, the impact of the game medium colliding with the colliding object propagates to the holding body and the holding body is If the screws attached to the game board are loosened and the position of the holder is shifted, the rebound angle of the game medium that has collided with the colliding object becomes unstable, which affects the game properties such as the winning rate of the game medium. There is a problem that there is a fear.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a loss of game performance due to a displacement of a collision target.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the gaming machine of the means 1 is:
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A main board (for example, main board 11, main board 9011, etc.) for controlling the game,
A predetermined payout area in which a prize ball is paid out when a game medium passes (for example, a normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B serving as a second starting winning port, a special variable winning ball apparatus 907 serving as a large winning port, a first starting winning port, Normal prize ball device 906A, general prize ports 9050A to 9050D serving as general prize areas),
A prize ball information display means (for example, a display monitor 9029, etc.) capable of displaying predetermined prize ball information (for example, a winning combination, a winning combination, etc.) relating to a prize ball paid out when a game medium passes through the predetermined payout area;
A collision object (for example, an elastic member 600) with which the game medium collides;
A first holder (e.g., a rail decorative frame 410 attached to the game board 2 with the elastic member 600 attached) attached to the game board and holding the collision object at a predetermined position on the game board;
A second holding body (for example, a rail holding piece 174 of a board holding metal member 162a for holding a rail decoration frame 410, a second outer rail 503, a glass door frame 50) holding the first holding body attached to the game board; ,
With
The prize ball information display means is provided on the main substrate so that visibility to the predetermined prize ball information is not hindered, and switches and displays a plurality of the predetermined prize ball information at predetermined intervals. Is possible,
A gap is provided between the hit body and the game board ,
The first holding body has a protruding portion that can be inserted from the front side of the gaming machine toward the hit body,
The impacted object is
A through hole into which the protruding portion of the first holding body is inserted, a collision surface against which a game medium collides,
A non-collision surface that is located on the opposite side to the collision surface with respect to the through hole and does not collide with the game medium,
The distance from the center of the through hole to the collision surface is longer than the distance from the center of the through hole to the non-collision surface .
According to this feature, the stability of the first holding body is improved by holding the first holding body holding the hit body by the second holding body in a state attached to the game board. It is possible to prevent the game performance from being impaired due to the displacement of the body. Also, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made.

  In the following description, the “predetermined payout area” may be simply referred to as “predetermined area”, the “predetermined prize ball information” may be simply referred to as “predetermined information”, and the “prize ball information display means” may be simply referred to as “information display”. Means ".

The gaming machine according to the second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The first holding member cannot be removed from the game board unless the holding state of the second holding member is released (for example, by opening the glass door frame 50, and holding the board holding member 162a, the second outer rail 503, and the screw). (The rail decorative frame 410 cannot be removed from the game board 2 unless the N1 is removed.)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the first holder from being easily removed from the game board.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2,
The first holding member is provided with a restricting portion (for example, a rail decoration that engages with the elastic member 600 and restricts the displacement of the collision member from the holding position). The frame 410 has a plate-like portion 425 and a protruding portion 422 of the first holding portion 421, and an engaged portion 427 of the second holding portion 423 / an engaging projection 428 of the second holding portion 423).
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the hit body is displaced with respect to the first holding body and the playability is impaired.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to the means 3,
The restricting portion is a contact surface with which the collision target abuts while holding the collision target, and includes a plurality of contact surfaces having different directions (for example, the first holding portion 421 of the rail decorative frame 410). (The inner surface of the plate-shaped portion 425 that contacts the elastic member 600 and the surface of the second holding portion 423 that contacts the elastic member 600).
According to this feature, the collision target can be pressed by the plurality of contact surfaces having different directions, so that the displacement of the collision target can be suitably suppressed.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4,
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium can pass is formed integrally with the first holder (for example, a decorative frame 800 in which a rail decorative frame, a center decorative frame, and a passage path are integrally formed). Modification 1 of FIG.
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a loss of game performance due to a shift in the positional relationship between the first holding member and the passage.

The gaming machine of the means 6 is the gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to 5,
The first holding body has a holding pin (for example, a protruding portion 422 of the first holding portion 421 of the rail decoration frame 410) inserted into an insertion hole formed in the collision object,
The holding pin has an outer diameter on the base side larger than an outer diameter on the distal end side (for example, the outer diameter of the protruding portion 422 in the protruding direction is larger than the outer diameter of the distal end portion).
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the durability of the holding pin against an impact generated on the object to be impacted can be increased.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 6,
The first holding body has a holding pin (for example, a protruding portion 422 of the first holding portion 421 of the rail decoration frame 410) inserted into an insertion hole formed in the collision object,
A hollow portion (for example, the concave portion 426 of the first holding portion 421) is formed inside the holding pin.
According to this feature, the strength of the holding pin is increased, so that the durability is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 8 is the gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to 7,
The colliding object is held by the first holding member such that at least a colliding portion with which the game medium collides is located outside the first holding member (for example, the colliding surface 601 of the elastic member 600 has a rail decoration). The frame 410 is held by the first holding portion 421 in a state protruding from the first holding portion 421.)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game medium from colliding with the first holding member and damaging the first holding member.

  In addition, embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to the following means A1 to A10 and means B1 to B9. Conventionally, as a gaming machine, as shown in JP-A-2014-117576, there are provided a windmill or a large number of gaming nails that change the flowing direction and speed of a gaming ball on the surface of a gaming board. is there. In this type of gaming machine, the passing ratio of the winning opening and the passing gate fluctuates due to adjustment of a gaming nail provided on the gaming board. In such a gaming machine, the payout rate of gaming balls may be designed by adjusting a gaming nail or the like. However, since it has not been possible to recognize from the outside of the gaming machine what kind of adjustment has been made to the gaming nail or the like, there is a problem that it is difficult to determine whether or not the payout rate is as designed. In view of this point, there is a demand for providing a gaming machine capable of recognizing what adjustment has been made.

The gaming machine of the means A1 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) has a predetermined area (for example, an ordinary variable prize ball device serving as a second starting winning port) in which a prize ball is paid out when a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes. 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907 serving as a large winning port, a normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first starting winning port, general winning ports 9050A to 9050D serving as a general winning area, and a main board for controlling the game (for example, Information display means (for example, a display monitor 9029) provided on the main board 9011) and capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, winning combination, winning ratio) relating to award balls paid out when the game medium passes through a predetermined area; And the information display means is provided on a main board for controlling a game so as not to hinder visibility.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made.

The gaming machine of the means A2 is
The gaming machine according to the means A1,
The information display means is disposed in front of the main board 9011 (for example, in front of the main board 9011).
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the information display means from being hindered.

The game machine of means A3 is
A game machine of means A1 or A2,
The information display means is arranged at a position that is not hidden by a seal (for example, a seal 9011S) for sealing the main substrate.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the information display means from being hindered.

The game machine of means A4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A3,
The information display means is provided at a position where a heat radiation hole (for example, a heat radiation hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main substrate) provided in a substrate case (for example, substrate case 90201) of the main substrate is not directly in front of the main substrate. Are located.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the information display means from being hindered.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A4,
The information display means is arranged at a position which does not overlap with peripheral boards other than the main board (for example, effect control board 9012, sound control board 9013, sound lamp control board 9014, power supply board, payout control board, emission control board). ing.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the information display means from being hindered.

The gaming machine of the means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A5,
The predetermined information includes a prize ball paid out through a movable area (for example, a normal variable prize ball apparatus 906B and a special variable prize ball apparatus 907) and a fixed area (a normal prize ball apparatus 906A, general prize ports 9050A to 9050D). ) Is information relating to the relationship with the prize balls paid out by the passage.
According to the above configuration, the winning combination and the winning ratio can be displayed.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A6,
The information display means can switch and display the plurality of pieces of the predetermined information every predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
According to the above configuration, an increase in the number of members can be suppressed.

The game machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A7,
The information display means displays information for each predetermined unit (for example, the number of prize balls is 60000) as the predetermined information.
According to the above configuration, the numerical value of the period corresponding to the predetermined unit can be easily recognized.

The game machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A8,
The information display means switches and displays, as the predetermined information, information for each predetermined unit (for example, short-term combination, short-term combination) and total information (for example, total combination, total combination ratio).
According to the above configuration, the information for each predetermined unit and the accumulated information can be compared.

The gaming machine of the means A10 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A9,
The information display means is contained in a caulked board case (for example, board case 90201) provided on the main board.
According to the above configuration, fraud can be prevented.

The gaming machine of the means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D). 901)
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative design) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905)
Providing means (game control microcomputer 90100) for providing a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
In a specific period (one minute, two minutes, or five minutes from the general prize) after the game medium enters the general prize area, a predetermined condition (effective start prize to the first start prize port or the second start prize port, reach) When the state is established), an effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect F (pre-read notice effect), specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect)). It is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in a 47th effect form to a 49th effect form).
According to this, it is possible to make the user interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied during the specific period after the game medium enters the general winning area, and the specific effect is performed after the game medium enters the general winning area. Enhancement of interest until it is executed can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means B2 is
The gaming machine of means B1,
A notification effect execution for executing a notification effect for identifiably informing that the game medium has entered the general winning area (one of the characters A to C appears immediately after winning in the general winning opening). A gaming machine further comprising means.
According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
In addition, as the notification effect that informs that the state after entering the game medium can be specified, the player determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general prize area. , And effects in which the player can easily grasp whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general prize area. For example, as the former effect, there is an effect in which a sound effect is output for a relatively short period (for example, about 0.5 to 2 seconds) immediately after the game medium enters the general prize area, and as the latter effect, the general prize area is output. There is an effect that the character is continuously displayed on the image display device until a predetermined period (for example, one minute) elapses immediately after the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of the means B3 is
A game machine of means B2,
The notification effect is an effect that informs whether or not the specific period can be specified (the specific period (character display period) differs depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed).
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, the interest of the game until the specific effect is executed can be enhanced.

The game machine of the means B4 is
A game machine of means B2 or means B3,
The specific period differs depending on the mode of the notification effect (the display period when character A appears is one minute, the display period when character B appears is two minutes, and the display when character C appears) The period will be 5 minutes)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to improve interest by paying attention to the mode of the notification effect.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to the means B4 may be, for example, as follows.
First, based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general prize area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) sets a predetermined number of predetermined periods (for example, one minute, two minutes, and three minutes). Is selected, an effect mode (e.g., the type of character displayed on the image display device 905) is determined based on the selected specific period, and a notification effect (character is set in the specific period) is determined based on the determined effect mode. Display effect).
For example, when the first specific period (for example, one minute) is selected, the first effect mode (for example, the display of the character A) is performed more than when the second specific period (for example, two minutes) is selected. It is preferable that the determined ratio be high. Further, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second effect mode (for example, the display of the character B) is displayed more than when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is preferable that the determined ratio be high.
In the case where the specific period and the effect of the notification effect correspond one-to-one (1 minute for character A, 2 minutes for character B, 3 minutes for character C) ), The effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 90120) determines one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area. A notification effect (effect for displaying a character for a specific period) may be executed according to the determined effect mode.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
The variable display means may determine a starting condition based on a game medium having entered the starting winning area (a game ball may be won in a first starting winning opening when the first number of retained memories does not reach the upper limit value (effective starting winning). ), The start condition (controlled to the big hit game state) after the game ball has been won (effective start winning) in the second start winning opening when the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. And the variable display of the special figure game is not executed), the variable display is executed based on the establishment of
The effect execution means notifies the user of a variable display game to be notified in advance of a display result of a variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in a 47th performance mode and a 49th performance mode) characterized by executing a specific change in a display mode for changing a display region from a normal mode to a special mode.
According to this, when the entry of the game medium into the general prize area is triggered, the display condition of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied is foreseen to be announced, so that the game medium enters the general prize area. Can be more interesting until the specific effect is executed.

The gaming machine of the means B6 is
A game machine of means B5,
Hold information corresponding to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (the display color is changed in response to the presence of a variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) Information display control means (production effect control CPU 90120) for displaying the displayed display portion on the display device (image display device 905).
The announcement effect is to announce the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold information according to the mode of the hold information (if the start winning prize determination result designation command is a command that specifies "big hit", The display portion corresponding to the command is changed from a normal mode (for example, blue or red) to a special mode (for example, gold) at a higher rate than a command for designating "out", and is a pending change effect. It is a gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B7 is
A game machine of means B6,
The effect executing means displays an object (characters A to C) on the display device so as to be able to specify the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area so that it can be specified (to the general winning opening). Immediately after winning, one of the characters A to C appears).
The notice effect is an effect that can be recognized by the player when the object changes the mode of the hold information (the display portion performs a certain action and the display portion corresponding to the held special figure game is held) Is an effect of changing from a normal mode to a special mode).
According to this, it is possible to indicate the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and the advance notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied by the common object, and the game to the general winning area Interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific effect can be further enhanced.
Specifically, by making an effect in which the mode of the hold information changes with a change in the display mode of the object (for example, a predetermined action), the player can recognize that the object changes the mode of the hold information. Become.

The game machine of means B8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B7,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period (the specific effect F or the specific effect G is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied in the character display period). is there.
According to this, the player can be interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period.

The game machine of the means B9,
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B8,
There are a plurality of the general prize areas (four first general prize ports 9050A to fourth general prize ports 50D),
The specific period differs depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (when the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B is won, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes from the general winning is specified. The period can be a period (characters A to C can appear), but if a third general winning opening 9050C or a fourth general winning opening 9050D is won, only 5 minutes from the general winning can be a specific period (only character C) Can appear))).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

  Further, embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to means B10 to B21 described below.

The gaming machine of the means B10 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D). 901)
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative design) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905)
Providing means (game control microcomputer 90100) for providing a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Operation detection means (operation buttons 9030 and effect control CPU 90120) capable of detecting the operation of the player;
After the game medium has entered the general winning area, when a motion of the player (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) is detected by the operation detecting means, a specific effect (cut-in notice effect, pseudo-serial effect) is performed. And an effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a notice effect, an opportunity effect notice effect). A gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in a fifty-fifth effect form to a fifty-third effect form). .
According to this, after the game medium enters the general prize area, the specific effect is executed in response to the operation of the player, so that the interest in the case where the game medium enters the general prize area can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means B11 is
A game machine of means B10,
Inform the user that the game medium has entered the general prize area after entering the general prize area. (In the 50th and 51st production modes, the button icon 904000 is increased every time a general prize port is won. In the effect form and the fifty-third effect form, a notice effect ("cut in", "pseudo ream", "chance eye") that can be executed each time a winning in the general winning opening is determined, and the character 904000a according to the determination result The game machine further includes a notification effect execution unit (effect control CPU 90120) for executing the notification effect.
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The gaming machine of the means B12 is
A game machine of means B11,
According to the type of operation (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for enabling the specific effect to be executed, the notification effect mode (“cut-in” characters 904000a, The gaming machine is characterized in that the characters 904000b and 904000c) are different.
According to this, the player can recognize which type of operation makes the specific effect executable.

The gaming machine of means B13 is
A game machine of means B11 or means B12,
There are a plurality of general prize areas (first to fourth general prize ports 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on which general prize area the game media has entered, the rate at which the notification effect is executed differs (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize port 9050A or the left general game opening 9050A in the left game area 9010A). When the player wins the second general winning opening 9050B, a higher percentage is notified than when the player wins the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D in the right game area 9010B). It is a gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to improve interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of the means B14 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B13,
There are a plurality of general prize areas (first to fourth general prize ports 9050A to 9050D),
The form of the notification effect differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B is won). In this case, either the character 904000a of “cut-in” or the character 904000b of “pseudo ream” can be displayed, and if the player wins the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, “ Any one of a character 904000a of "cut-in" and a character 904000c of "chance eyes" can be displayed).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of the means B15 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B14,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the rate at which the notification effect is executed differs (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the general winning opening is won in the normal state). In the case (when the first general prize port 9050A or the second general prize port 9050B of the left game area 9010A is won), when the general prize port is won in the probable change state or the time saving state (the first general prize port of the right game area 9010B). (In the case where the player wins the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D), the notification is given at a higher rate than that).
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interest depending on the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B16 is:
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B15,
The mode of the notification effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, the character 904000a of “cut-in” and the “pseudo” The character “904000b” can be displayed, and the character 904000a of “cut-in” and the character 904000c of “chance eyes” can be displayed in the probable change state or the time saving state.)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interest depending on the state of the game.

The gaming machine of the means B17 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B16,
The effect executing means is capable of executing the specific effect when the predetermined operation is performed after the game medium has entered the general winning area a plurality of times (in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect mode, (A pseudo consecutive announcement effect can be executed when the winning opening is won twice or more, and a chance notice announcement effect can be executed when the general winning opening is won three or more times.)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to interest the number of game media entering the general prize area.

The gaming machine of the means B18 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B17,
There are a plurality of general prize areas (first to fourth general prize ports 9050A to 9050D),
The execution ratio of the specific effect is different depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B). When a prize is won, a notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the prize is won in the third general prize port 9050C or the fourth general prize port 9050D.)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to improve interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of the means B19 is:
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B18,
There are a plurality of general prize areas (first to fourth general prize ports 9050A to 9050D),
The type of the specific effect that can be executed differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening). If the player wins the 9050B, either the cut-in announcement effect or the pseudo consecutive announcement effect can be executed. And one of the chance notice announcements can be performed)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to improve interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of the means B20 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B19,
The execution ratio of the specific effect is different depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, when the general winning opening is won in the normal state ( When the player wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B of the left gaming area 9010A), the player wins the general winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state (third general of the right gaming area 9010B). (In the case where a prize is won in the winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D), a notification for enabling the execution of the specific effect is issued at a higher ratio).
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interest depending on the state of the game.

The gaming machine of the means B21 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B20,
The type of the specific effect that can be executed is different depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st production mode and the 53rd production mode, the cut-in notice production and the pseudo continuous Any of the notice effects can be executed, and in the probable change state or the time saving state, either the cut-in notice effect or the chance eye notice effect can be executed)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interest depending on the state of the game.

  Further, embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to the means B22 to B28 described below.

The gaming machine of the means B22 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D). 901)
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative design) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905)
Providing means (game control microcomputer 90100) for providing a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing specific effects (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect),
When the variable display is being executed (within the period in which the special symbol variable display is being executed, or in the period in which the special symbol variable display is being executed or decided to be executed), the general winning area is set. And when the variable display is not executed (during the period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed, it is determined that the special symbol variable display is not executed and executed. A game machine (a pachinko machine of the 27th effect form to the 30th effect form) in which the specific effect is executed at a different rate from when the game medium enters the general prize area during a period in which the game medium does not enter. Gaming machine 901).
According to this, since the execution ratio of the specific effect is different between the case where the variable display is executed and the case where the variable display is not executed, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can be.

The gaming machine of the means B23 is
A game machine of means B22,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), there is further provided an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. ,
The specific effect is an effect that is not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point-giving effect). A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 27th effect form and the 29th effect form) is there.
According to this, even when the variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of the means B24,
A game machine of means B22,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), there is further provided an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. ,
The specific effect is an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect), and when the variable display is not executed, the general prize area is displayed. A game machine (a pachinko game machine 901 in a twenty-eighth production mode and a thirtieth production mode), which is not executed when a game medium enters the game machine.
According to this, when the variable display is being performed, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B25 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D). 901)
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative design) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905)
Providing means (game control microcomputer 90100) for providing a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing specific effects (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect),
When the variable display is being executed (within the period in which the special symbol variable display is being executed, or in the period in which the special symbol variable display is being executed or decided to be executed), the general winning area is set. And when the variable display is not executed (during the period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed, it is determined that the special symbol variable display is not executed and executed. A different special effect is performed when a game medium enters the general prize area during a period in which the game machine has not been played (a pachinko game machine 901 of a 31st effect form and a 32nd effect form). ).
According to this, the different specific effects are different between the case where the variable display is executed and the case where the variable display is not executed, so that the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area can be enhanced. .

The gaming machine of the means B26,
A game machine of means B25,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), there is further provided an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. ,
When the game medium enters the general prize area while the variable display is being executed, an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: look ahead notice effect). Is executed as the specific effect,
When a game medium enters the general prize area when the variable display is not executed, an effect (specific effect C: point giving effect) not related to the display result of the variable display is executed as the specific effect. It is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in a 31st effect form and a 32nd effect form).
According to this, when the variable display is executed, the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area can be further enhanced, and even when the variable display is not executed, the general prize area can be improved. Interest when the game media enters the game can be appropriately increased.

The gaming machine of the means B27 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B22 to the means B26 (the pachinko gaming machines 901 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form),
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is being executed, the rate at which the specific effect is executed differs (for example, when a special drawing game Is performed, whether or not the game is held, and the number of stored memories at the time of winning the general winning opening, and further, whether the gaming state at the time of winning the general winning opening is the normal state, or the probable change state or the time saving state The specific effect is executed at a different ratio depending on the classification of
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, and to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area.

The game machine of means B28 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B22 to the means B27 (the pachinko gaming machines 901 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form),
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is being executed, different specific effects are executed (for example, when a special drawing game is executed when a general winning opening is won). Category, the number of storages held when winning a general winning opening, and whether the gaming state when winning a general winning opening is a normal state, a probable change state or a time saving state. Depending on the category, etc., different types of specific effects are executed)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, and to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area.

  Further, embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to means B29 to B39 described below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIG. 33), a winning rate to a starting winning opening in a gaming machine is calculated, and a character wearing clothes of different colors according to the calculated winning rate is determined. A gaming machine that performs an effect display to be displayed has been proposed. However, it is necessary not only to display information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area such as the starting winning opening on the information display means, but also to make the information more easily visible. The invention according to means B29 to means B39 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to make it easy to visually recognize information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to the means B29,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Information capable of displaying entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of prizes to the general prize port, the number of prizes to the first start prize port, the number of prizes to the second start prize port, etc.). Display means (image display device 905),
The information display means displays effect information (for example, a decorative symbol and a fourth symbol) different from the entry information in an area where visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIG. 57, each winning port). The gaming machine is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to the means B30,
A game machine of means B29,
The information display means is capable of displaying the entry information irrespective of the mode of the effect information (regardless of whether or not a decorative symbol is variably displayed as illustrated in FIG. 57, and a fourth symbol. Irrespective of whether or not is displayed variably, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, and the like are displayed in the first area α. The number of winnings displayed can be updated in accordance with the winning of each winning opening.)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized irrespective of the mode of the effect information.

The invention according to the means B31,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Error detecting means (abnormality detecting sensor group 9026) for detecting an error (for example, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.);
Information capable of displaying entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of prizes to the general prize port, the number of prizes to the first start prize port, the number of prizes to the second start prize port, etc.). Display means (image display device 905).
The information display means displays error information (for example, an error message) for notifying the occurrence of the error in an area where visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. Is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α in which the winning number is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to the means B32,
A game machine of means B31,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (as shown in FIG. 58, regardless of whether or not an error message is displayed, a general winning opening The number of winnings, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, and the like are displayed in the first area α. You can update the number of winnings you have)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized even when the error information is displayed.

The invention according to the means B33,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Information capable of displaying entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of prizes to the general prize port, the number of prizes to the first start prize port, the number of prizes to the second start prize port, etc.). Display means (image display device 905),
The information display means displays a display result of a variable display (for example, a display result of a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) or a fourth symbol) executed based on the entry of the game medium into the starting area, by the entry information. Gaming machine is displayed in an area where visibility of the game is not hindered (a second area β different from the first area α in which the number of winnings in each winning opening is displayed as illustrated in FIG. 57). It is.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to the means B34,
A game machine of means B33,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the variable display is being executed (regardless of whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed as illustrated in FIG. Regardless of whether the fourth symbol is variably displayed or not, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, and the like are stored in the first area α. Displayed, and the number of winnings displayed can be updated according to winning in each winning opening.)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized even when the variable display is being performed.

The invention according to the means B35,
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B34,
Operable operation means (operation buttons 9030);
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display the entry information on the information display means in response to the operation of the operation means (as shown in FIG. 20, based on the setting by the operation button 9030, each winning opening And an effect control CPU 90120 for setting whether or not to display the winning information related to the winning number in the first area α).
According to this, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the entry information.

The invention according to the means B36,
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B35,
Operation means (operation buttons 9030) operable by the player;
A totaling period setting unit that sets a totalizing period of the entry information in accordance with an operation of the operation unit (an effect control CPU 90120 that sets a totalizing period based on a setting by an operation button 9030 as illustrated in FIG. 61); A gaming machine further comprising:
According to this, the totaling period can be set according to the player's judgment.

The invention according to the means B37,
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B36,
Game state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling game states (big hit game state, probable change state, and time saving state, or low base state and high base state, etc.);
The information display means can display the entry information according to the gaming state (as shown in FIG. 60, the number of winnings in the low base state and the number of winnings in the high base state can be displayed separately. Is)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information according to the gaming state.

The invention according to the means B38,
A game machine of means B37,
Variable display means for performing a variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure) based on the game medium entering the start area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening). (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B),
The gaming state control means includes a low frequency state (a low base state in which the high opening control for the second starting winning opening is not performed) and a high frequency state (the second state) in which the frequency of the game medium entering the starting area is different. (2) a high base state in which the high opening control for the winning opening is performed.
The information display means may include the entry information (such as the number of general winnings in the low base state illustrated in FIG. 60) regarding the period controlled in the low frequency state and the entry information related to the period controlled in the high frequency state. A gaming machine capable of displaying information (such as a general winning number in a high base state illustrated in FIG. 60).
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information corresponding to the low-frequency state and the entry information corresponding to the high-frequency state.

The invention according to the means B39,
Any of gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B38,
Notification is performed when the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition (as illustrated in FIG. 61, when the number of winnings per set tally period is less than a predetermined reference value, notification is given. This gaming machine further includes a notifying means (image display device 905) for displaying a message).
According to this, it is possible to easily grasp that the entry information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  Embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to the means B40 and B41 described below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIGS. 32 and 33), when a player accepts the start of a game by inputting a password, a winning rate to a start winning opening in the gaming machine is calculated. There has been proposed a gaming machine that performs an effect display for displaying a character dressed in a different color according to a calculated winning rate. However, information other than the player (for example, a clerk at a game arcade) has not been able to confirm information regarding that a game medium has entered an entry area such as a start winning port. The invention relating to the means B40 and means B41 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and is intended to allow only a person other than a player (for example, a clerk at a game arcade) to check information.

The invention according to the means B40,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) having an entry area (for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter. Gaming machine 901)
Providing means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90100) for providing a game value (for example, a prize ball) based on the game medium passing through the entry area;
A specific operation means (for example, a mode changeover switch 9031, a reset button) which is disabled by the player,
Notification means for notifying cumulative value information (for example, the number of payouts of each general winning opening, the number of payouts of each starting winning opening, and the total number of payouts shown in FIG. 32) relating to the cumulative value of the game value provided by the providing means. For example, an image display device 905) is provided.
The notifying unit notifies the accumulated value information based on the operation of the specific operation unit (for example, when the mode changeover switch 9031 is operated to enter the maintenance mode, the information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device). 905)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk at the game hall) can check the information.

  The “specific operation means disabled by the player” may be any means that can be operated by, for example, a store clerk of a game arcade or an inspector / inspector of a gaming machine.

The invention according to the means B41,
A game machine of means B40,
An effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120) for executing an effect related to a game is provided,
The notifying unit notifies the accumulated value information in a manner according to the mode of the effect executed by the effect executing unit. (Speaking display and audio output)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to make it easy to recognize which type of gaming machine information from the notification mode.

  Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to the means B42 to B51 described below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of entered balls is counted up and displayed on a display device for effect. When the counted number reaches the number of times of execution determined by lottery, a gaming machine that informs a player that an in-memory extended game is generated is proposed. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-73187, when a game ball enters a normal winning opening, the number of entered balls is uniformly counted up by one. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general prize area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general prize area. The invention according to means B42 to means B51 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and has an object to enhance the interest of gaming in a gaming machine having a general winning area.

The gaming machine of the means B42 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D). 901)
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative design) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second startup entrance opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905)
Providing means (game control microcomputer 90100) for providing a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect in which the effect mode is changed stepwise in accordance with the entry of the game medium into the general winning area (a specific effect D in which the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 is gradually increased from 0 to 10 steps). Executable effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120),
The identification is performed according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (eg, a period in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed and a period in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed). The rate at which the effect mode changes in the effect is different (the rate at which the effect of increasing the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 by one step is different).
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in a thirty-third effect form to a thirty-seventh effect form).
According to this, depending on the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, the rate of change of the effect mode in the specific effect is different, thereby increasing the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area. Can be.

The gaming machine of means B43 is
A game machine of means B42,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). To do
According to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general prize area (the remaining time until the final decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more, and the time is less than 10 seconds). A gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in a thirty-fourth production mode), characterized in that the ratio in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different.
According to this, depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general prize area, the rate of change of the production mode in the specific production is different, so that the interest of the specific production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B43,
Remaining period of variable display being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the remaining time until the final decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more, and the remaining time is less than 10 seconds. ) And the display result of the variable display (big hit symbol, loss symbol) executed when the game medium enters the general prize area, so that the rate of change of the effect mode in the specific effect is changed. You may. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is displayed. Accordingly, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect may be different (for example, it changes at a high rate when it is a big hit symbol, and changes at a lower rate when it is a lost symbol). .

The gaming machine of the means B44 is
A game machine of means B42 or means B43,
The variable display means (image display device 905) starts the start condition (variable display based on the previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). And the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed based on the fact that the game has been established and the big hit game state has not been controlled. ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player;
An advance notice effect (foreseeing advance notice effect) for announcing that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display serving as a target of the look ahead notice effect is executed). And a notice effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) executed before
A period from the time when the game medium enters the general winning area to the time when the variable display targeted for the announcement effect is executed (the target of the look-ahead announcement effect when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command). A game machine (a pachinko gaming machine in a 35th effect form) in which the rate of change in the effect mode in the specific effect varies according to the variable display frequency until the variable display is executed. 901).
According to this, depending on the period from the time when the game medium enters the general prize area to the time when the variable display targeted for the notice effect is executed, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. It is possible to further enhance the amusement of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B44,
A period from the time when the game medium enters the general winning area to the time when the variable display targeted for the announcement effect is executed (the target of the look-ahead announcement effect when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command). (Variable display count until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display (big hit symbol, unsuccessful symbol) which is the target of the preliminary announcement effect. The rate at which the mode changes may be different. Specifically, when the game medium enters the general prize area, the number of variable displays until the variable display targeted for the announcement effect (the variable display targeted for the prefetch advance notice) is executed is within a predetermined range. (For example, two times or less), the rate of change of the effect mode in the specific effect differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (high when the hit pattern is large). It may change at a rate, and when it becomes an out-of-design, it changes at a lower rate.)

The gaming machine of means B45 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B42 to the means B44,
Further comprising a reach effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a reach effect with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern);
When the game medium enters the general winning area before execution of the reach effect (when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation), and after the execution of the reach effect When the game medium enters the general winning area (when the game ball wins in the general winning opening is after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation), the rate of change of the effect mode in the specific effect is different. (A pachinko gaming machine 901 in a thirty-sixth production mode).
According to this, an effect mode changes in a specific effect depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect and when the game medium enters the general winning area after the execution of the reach effect. The different ratios can further enhance the interest of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B46 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B42 to the means B45,
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on the general prize area in which the game medium has entered (a game ball has won one of the second general prize port 9050B and the third general prize port 9050C, a first general prize port 9050A and a fourth general prize port 9050D). The gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 37th production mode) is characterized in that the rate of change of the production mode in the specific production is different.
According to this, depending on the general prize area in which the game medium has entered, the rate of change of the production mode in the specific production is different, so that the interest of the specific production can be further enhanced.

The game machine of means B47 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D). 901)
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative design) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second startup entrance opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905)
Providing means (game control microcomputer 90100) for providing a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect in which the effect mode is changed stepwise according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area (a specific effect D in which the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is gradually increased from 0 to 10 steps). Executable effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120),
The identification is performed according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (eg, a period in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed and a period in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed). The stage at which the effect mode changes in the effect is different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) for increasing the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is different).
It is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 of a thirty-eighth production form to a forty-second production form).
According to this, depending on the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different, thereby increasing the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area. Can be.

The game machine of means B48 is
A game machine of means B47,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). To do
According to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general prize area (the remaining time until the final decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more, and the time is less than 10 seconds). The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 39th rendering mode) is characterized in that the stage in which the rendering mode changes in the specific rendering is different.
According to this, depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general prize area, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different, so that the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B48,
Remaining period of variable display being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the remaining time until the final decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more, and the remaining time is less than 10 seconds. ) And a display result of a variable display (a big hit symbol, a lost symbol) being executed when a game medium enters the general winning area, so that the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is changed. You may. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is displayed. Accordingly, the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different (for example, a large number of stages change when a big hit symbol is formed, and a smaller number of stages change when a lossy symbol is formed). Good.

The gaming machine of means B49 is
A game machine of means B47 or means B48,
The variable display means (image display device 905) starts the start condition (variable display based on the previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). And the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed based on the fact that the game has been established and the big hit game state has not been controlled. ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player;
An advance notice effect (foreseeing advance notice effect) for announcing that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display serving as a target of the look ahead notice effect is executed). And a notice effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) executed before
A period from the time when the game medium enters the general winning area to the time when the variable display targeted for the announcement effect is executed (the target of the look-ahead announcement effect when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command). The stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different according to the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed. 901).
According to this, depending on the period from when the game medium enters the general prize area to when the variable display targeted for the announcement effect is executed, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. It is possible to further enhance the amusement of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B49,
A period from the time when the game medium enters the general winning area to the time when the variable display targeted for the announcement effect is executed (the target of the look-ahead announcement effect when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command). (Variable display count until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display (big hit symbol, unsuccessful symbol) which is the target of the preliminary announcement effect. The stage at which the mode changes may be different. Specifically, when the game medium enters the general prize area, the number of variable displays until the variable display targeted for the announcement effect (the variable display targeted for the prefetch advance notice) is executed is within a predetermined range. (For example, two times or less), the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs according to the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (for example, in the case of a big hit symbol, The number of steps may be changed many times, and when the pattern becomes a lost pattern, the number of steps may be changed smaller than that.

The game machine of means B50 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B47 to the means B49,
Further comprising a reach effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a reach effect with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern);
When the game medium enters the general winning area before execution of the reach effect (when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation), and after the execution of the reach effect When the game medium enters the general prize area (when the game ball wins in the general prize port is after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation), the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. (A pachinko gaming machine 901 in a forty-first effect form).
According to this, an effect mode changes in a specific effect depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect and when the game medium enters the general winning area after the execution of the reach effect. The different stages can further enhance the interest of the specific effect.

The game machine of means B51 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B47 to the means B50,
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on the general prize area in which the game medium has entered (a game ball has won one of the second general prize port 9050B and the third general prize port 9050C, a first general prize port 9050A and a fourth general prize port 9050D). The gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the forty-second production mode) is characterized in that the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production is different.
According to this, depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different, so that the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

  In addition, embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to means B52 to B56 described below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of entered balls is counted up and displayed on a display device for effect. When the counted number reaches the number of times of execution determined by lottery, a gaming machine that informs a player that an in-memory extended game is generated is proposed. In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Literature 1, an effect (count-up display) is executed each time a game ball enters the normal winning opening. In a gaming machine having such a general prize area, if the game medium does not enter the general prize area, it is necessary to know this, but this is not considered in the prior art. The invention according to means B52 to means B56 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and is to make it possible to grasp that a game medium does not enter a general winning area.

The gaming machine of the means B52 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D). 901)
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative design) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905)
Providing means (game control microcomputer 90100) for providing a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When the number of game media entering the general winning area in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (for example, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening for 10 minutes during which it is detected that the game is being played is 0, In a case where the number of winnings in the general winning opening for 30 minutes during which it is detected that the game is in progress is less than 3, etc., a specific effect (an image imitating the general winning opening form and "No general winning". A game machine comprising: a special effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect E) for displaying an annunciation image 902200 including characters on the image display device 905.
According to this, it is possible for a player or a game hall to know that the number of game media entering the general winning area is smaller than a predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means B53 is
A game machine of means B52,
Setting means for setting whether or not to permit execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means (an effect for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect E based on a game arcade setting and a player setting in a display setting table) A control CPU 90120);
Clerk operation receiving means (display changeover switch 9032) for receiving a setting operation by the clerk,
The setting unit performs a setting for permitting execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the clerk operation receiving unit. , Notification that the number of general prizes is small)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B54 is
A game machine of means B52 or means B53,
Storage means (a prize number counter area formed in the RAM 90122) for storing the number of game media entering the general prize area (the number of prizes in 30 minutes);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of entries stored in the storage means is not retained at the time of power failure (the value of the winning number counter area is deleted by power failure).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control load for maintaining the memory of the number of ingresses at the time of power failure.

The gaming machine of means B55 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B52 to the means B54,
Depending on the state of the gaming machine, the ratio at which the specific effect is executed is different (for example, the specific effect E is executed at a different ratio between the normal state and the probable change state or the time saving state).
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B56 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B52 to the means B55,
Different specific effects are executed in accordance with the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effect E is executed in different modes in the normal state and in the probable change state or the time saving state).
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

  Further, embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to means B57 to B64 described below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80531 (FIG. 83), during the execution of a big hit game, the number of prize balls (grant value) obtained by a game medium entering a special winning opening, There has been proposed a gaming machine that performs an effect of displaying a number image that distinguishes the number of prize balls (value added) obtained by a game medium entering a normal winning opening (general winning area) with a numerical image. In a gaming machine having such a general prize area, the intention of a game arcade or a player is not reflected on whether or not to perform an effect when a game medium enters the general prize area. The invention according to the means B57 to means B64 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and reflects the intention of a game arcade or a player as to whether or not to execute an effect when a game medium enters a general prize area. The purpose is to make it possible.

The game machine of means B57 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D). 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning area, second start winning area). (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
Providing means (game control microcomputer 90100) for providing a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When a game medium enters the general prize area, a specific effect (based on the setting of the mode switch 9031, the information of the winning number management table is displayed in the maintenance mode in the maintenance mode, the setting of the display switch 9032 and the operation button 9030) Based on the setting, the number of objects is increased each time a game ball enters the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed, a specific effect A: a change result announcement effect, a specific effect B: a look-ahead Notification means (image display device 905) capable of executing a notice effect);
A setting device (mode changeover switch 9031, display changeover switch 9032, and operation button 9030) for setting whether or not execution of the specific effect is permitted by the specific effect execution device. .
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall or the player as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B58 is
The game machine of means B57,
A clerk operation receiving unit (mode switch 9031, display switch 9032) for receiving a setting operation by the clerk is further provided,
The setting unit performs a setting to permit execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the clerk operation receiving unit (based on the setting of the mode switch 9031, the winning number management table is set in the maintenance mode). , The number of objects is increased each time a game ball enters the general winning opening based on the setting of the display changeover switch 9032, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state, the specific effect A ： Change result announcement effect can be executed. Specific effect B: Pre-read notice effect can be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The game machine of the means B59,
A game machine of means B57 or means B58,
Further comprising a player operation receiving means for receiving a setting operation by the player,
The setting means performs a setting for permitting execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the player operation receiving means (a general winning opening based on the setting of the operation button 9030 in the demonstration screen display). The number of wins to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state is displayed based on the setting of the operation button 9030 during the demonstration screen display, in which the number of objects is increased each time a game ball enters the game. Can be executed, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect can be executed)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, the intention of the player can be reflected as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The game machine of the means B60,
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B59,
The specific effect notifies the number of game media entering the general winning area in a predetermined period (a period in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state) so as to be identifiable. And the number of winning balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls according to the number of winning balls are separately displayed.)
According to this, it is possible to improve the playability in the predetermined period.

The gaming machine of the means B61 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B60,
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect when the number of game media entered the general prize area reaches a predetermined number (executes an effect in a 25th effect form or a 26th effect form). It is a game machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to interest the number of game media entering the general prize area.

The gaming machine of means B62 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B61,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific effect execution means executes different specific effects according to the number of game media entering the general prize area (executes effects in a 25th effect form and a 26th effect form). It is.
According to this, it is possible to interest the number of game media entering the general prize area.

The gaming machine of means B63 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B62,
The specific effect is an effect that informs the number of game media entering the general winning area so as to be identifiable (the number of objects is increased each time a game ball enters the general winning opening),
If the gaming machine is not playing a game (variable display of decorative symbols is not executed, and a start winning port designation command, a general winning port designation command, and a special winning port winning command are received for a predetermined period of time. Effect control CPU 90120 that performs a game end determination based on the absence of the game), and informably informs that the number of game media entering the general winning area is 0 in the specific effect (game end determination is performed). In this case, all objects corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905 are deleted.)
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to prevent another player from grasping the number of game media entering the general prize area.

The game machine of means B64 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B63,
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized by displaying display information (an object equivalent to the number of winnings to a general winning opening) corresponding to the number of game media entering the general winning area.
According to this, it is possible to easily grasp the number of game media entering the general prize area.

  Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to the means B65 to B77 described below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 59), when a game ball wins a general winning opening during a big hit, one mode of the start memory display changes and the start memory is changed. A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies whether the special figure change display game corresponding to the display is "hit" or "losing". In a gaming machine having such a general winning opening, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game ball wins in the general winning opening. The invention relating to means B65 to means B77 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and has an object to enhance the interest of gaming in a gaming machine having a general winning opening.

The gaming machine of means B65 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D). 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning area, second start winning area). (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
Providing means (game control microcomputer 90100) for providing a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state), and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probable change or time saving state). , The ratio of executing the specific effect is different (in the normal state, the specific effect is executed at a higher rate than in the probability change or time saving state)
It is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in a first effect form to a fourth effect form) characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area.

The gaming machine of means B66 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D). 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning area, second start winning area). (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
Providing means (game control microcomputer 90100) for providing a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing specific effects (specific effect A: fluctuation result advancement effect, specific effect B: prefetch advance effect).
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state), and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probable change or time saving state). , Execute a different special effect (in the normal state, execute the specific effect A, and in the probable or shortened state, execute the specific effect B)
It is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 of the fifth effect form to the twelfth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area.

The gaming machine of means B67 is
The means B65 or the game machine of the means B66 (the pachinko game machines 901 of the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the tenth effect form to the twelfth effect form),
In the first game state (normal state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes the first number of entry,
In the second gaming state (probable change or time saving state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes a second entering number different from the first entering number. A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this, it is possible to interest the number of game media entering the general prize area.

The gaming machine of means B68 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D). 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning area, second start winning area). (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
Providing means (game control microcomputer 90100) for providing a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect),
The game medium enters the general prize area during the first period (after the reach state of reach fluctuation), and the second period (period other than the reach state or before the reach state of reach fluctuation). The ratio of executing the specific effect is different from the case where the game medium enters the general prize area (after the reach change state is established, the specific effect is specified at a higher rate than during the period other than the reach change or before the reach state of the reach change is established). Direction is executed)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in a thirteenth production form to a sixteenth production form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area.

The gaming machine of means B69 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) into which game media (game balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D). 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning area, second start winning area). (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
Providing means (game control microcomputer 90100) for providing a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing specific effects (specific effect A: fluctuation result advancement effect, specific effect B: prefetch advance effect).
The game medium enters the general prize area during the first period (after the reach state of reach fluctuation), and the second period (period other than the reach state or before the reach state of reach fluctuation). When the game medium enters the general winning area, a different specific effect is executed (specific effect A is executed after the reach state is established, and specific effect B is executed before the reach state is established. The specific effect A is executed, and the specific effect B is executed during a period other than the reach change or before the reach state of the reach change is established.)
It is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in a seventeenth effect form to a twenty-fourth effect form) characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area.

The gaming machine of the means B70 is
The game machine of the means B68 or the means B69 (the pachinko game machine 901 of the fourteenth production form to the sixteenth production form, the twenty-second production form to the twenty-fourth production form),
In the first period (after the reach state of reach fluctuation), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general prize area reaches the first entry number,
During the second period (a period other than the reach variation or before the reach state of the reach variation is established), the number of game media entering the general prize area is a second approach number different from the first approach number. A gaming machine that executes the specific effect in such a case.
According to this, it is possible to interest the number of game media entering the general prize area.

The gaming machine of the means B71 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B70 (the second effect form, the sixth effect form, the tenth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the fourteenth effect form, the eighteenth effect form, and the twenty-second effect form) Pachinko machine 901)
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a game medium enters each of the plurality of general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of the means B72 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B71 (the pachinko gaming machines 901 in the fifth to twelfth effect forms, the seventeenth to twenty-fourth effect modes),
The variable display means is configured to start condition (variable display based on the previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening) and the big hit game state. Is also variably displayed based on the establishment of the identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design)
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling the player to an advantageous state (big hit game state). )When,
Before the start condition is satisfied, a pre-start judging means for performing a pre-start judgment for judging whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (control to the big hit gaming state based on the big hit random number extracted at the time of starting winning). Game control microcomputer 90100) for determining whether or not to play the game.
The specific effect execution means,
Based on the pre-start determination, an effect (foreseeing advance effect) for informing that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state is performed by the specific effect (specific effect B) before the start condition of the target variable display is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being executed as:
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by notifying that the control is performed to the advantageous state before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

The gaming machine of the means B73 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B72 (the pachinko gaming machines 901 in the first to twenty-fourth production modes),
The variable display means is configured to start condition (variable display based on the previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening) and the big hit game state. Is also variably displayed based on the establishment of the identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design)
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling the player to an advantageous state (big hit game state). )When,
When the start condition is satisfied, a start time determination means for performing a start time determination for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (when a special symbol variably displayed is started, a stored big hit determination A game control microcomputer 90100) for determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state based on a random number.
The specific effect execution means,
An amusement machine characterized by executing an effect (variation result notice effect) for giving a notice of control to the advantageous state based on the determination at the time of the start, as the specific effect.
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by being notified that the control is performed in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B74 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B73 (the pachinko gaming machines 901 in the third effect form and the fifteenth effect form),
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution ratio of the specific effect varies depending on the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning in the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the frequency of entry of the game media into the general winning area.

The game machine of means B75 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B74 (the pachinko gaming machines 901 in the eleventh effect form and the twenty-third effect form),
A gaming machine characterized by executing different specific effects in accordance with the frequency of entry of gaming media into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning in the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the frequency of entry of the game media into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B76 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B75 (pachinko gaming machines 901 in the fourth, eighth, twelfth, sixteenth, twentieth and twenty-fourth production modes) And
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The specific effect execution means,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific effect is executed based on a predetermined order in which game media enter a plurality of the general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the order in which the game media enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B77 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B76 (pachinko gaming machines 901 in the fourth, eighth, twelfth, sixteenth, twentieth and twenty-fourth production modes) And
It has other prize areas different from the general prize area (first start prize port, second start prize port),
The specific effect execution means,
A gaming machine that executes the specific effect based on a specific order in which game media enter the general prize area and game media enter the other prize areas. .
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the order in which the game media enter the general winning area and the other winning areas.

  It should be noted that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. May be included.

It is the front view which looked at an example of the pachinko gaming machine from the front. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration on a main board. It is a perspective view showing the composition of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the glass door frame was opened. It is a front view which shows the game machine frame to which the game board was attached. (A) is a perspective view showing an upper board holding metal, and (B) is a perspective view showing a lower board holding metal. It is a front view showing the composition of a game board. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the spacer member which forms a game area, a board surface board, a guide rail (1st outer rail, 2nd outer rail, inner rail), and a rail decoration frame. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the right part of a rail decoration frame. (A) is a rear view of the right side of the rail decorative frame, (B) is an AA cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is a BB cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a 6-side view showing the configuration of the elastic member, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a perspective view showing the configuration of the right end of the first outer rail, and (B) is a perspective view showing another configuration of the right end of the first outer rail. (A) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine, and (B) is a plan sectional view of the pachinko gaming machine shown in (A). (A) is a front view of the right side portion of the rail decorative frame as a first modified example, and (B) is a DD sectional view of (A). (A) is a perspective view showing a modification of the elastic member as modification 2, and (B) is a sectional view of the modification of (A). (A) is a rear view of the right side of the rail decorative frame as a third modification, and (B) is an EE cross-sectional view of (A). It is a front view showing an example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating winning number information managed by a winning number management table, and FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating winning number information managed by a display control table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a game hall setting and a player setting. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram in a case where display setting is performed using operation buttons that can be operated by a player. It is an explanatory view in the case of displaying an object corresponding to winning in a general winning opening. It is an explanatory view in the case of displaying the winning number to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state. It is explanatory drawing which shows each effect performed according to a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a fluctuation result notice effect and a look ahead notice effect. It is an explanatory view showing the example of the 1st production form-the 4th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of 5th effect form-8th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 9th effect form-the 12th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 13th effect form-the 16th effect form. It is an explanatory view showing the example of the 17th production form-the 20th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 21st production form-the 24th production form. It is an explanatory view showing the example of the 25th production form and the 26th production form. It is a figure showing winning number information managed by a winning number management table. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a point giving effect. It is an explanatory view showing the example of the 27th production form-the 30th production form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a 31st effect form and a 32nd effect form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a gauge update effect. It is an explanatory view showing the example of the 33rd production form-the 36th production form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the 37th effect form. It is an explanatory view showing the example of the 38th production form-the 41st production form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the forty-second effect form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a non-prize notification effect. It is an explanatory view showing the example of the 43rd production form-the 46th production form. It is a figure showing the appearance ratio of characters AC in the 47th production form-the 49th production form. It is a figure showing the display period of characters AC in the 47th production form-the 49th production form. It is an explanatory view showing the example of the 47th production form-the 49th production form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a hold change effect in a 47th effect mode. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a fluctuation result notice effect in the 48th effect mode. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing and execution period of each effect in the 47th effect form and the 48th effect form. It is an explanatory view showing the example of the 50th production form and the 51st production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of continuous hitting operation notification and cut-in notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and a pseudo consecutive announcement effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and a pseudo consecutive announcement effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all the symbol stop operation | movement notification and a chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all the symbol stop operation | movement notification and a chance eye notice effect. It is an explanatory view showing the example of the 52nd production form and the 53rd production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of each notice effect for every general winning opening in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production information in the setting which displays winning number information. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode of an error message. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production information in the setting which does not display winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an item of the winning number information which can be displayed in a 1st area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting method of a totaling period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which displays winning number information and the setting which does not display winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which displays winning number information and the setting which does not display winning number information. It is a block diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine in more detail. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a partial configuration of a storage area in a RAM on a main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a memory map of a CPU on a main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing a display time of an item displayed on the accessory ratio display device, and (B-1) to (B-5) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in display contents of a display monitor. . FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a combination of a role and a role ratio. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a combination of a hand and a winning combination display control process. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a counter of the total number of acquired balls, the number of acquired balls, and the number of consecutive acquired balls. (A)-(D) is the front view which simplified the modification of the main board | substrate.

  An example of a mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on a first embodiment.

(First embodiment)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration on the main board. In the description below, the near side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. It will be described as a reference. In addition, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is a facing surface facing a player who plays a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, showing an arrangement layout of main members. Pachinko gaming machines (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "gaming machines") 1 are roughly divided into a gaming board 2 (also referred to as a "gauge board") having a gaming board surface 200A on the front side, and a game board 2 supported and fixed. Gaming machine frame (base frame) 3. The game board 2 has a game area 10 having a substantially circular shape in a front view and surrounded by a guide rail 2b. In this game area 10, a game ball P as a game medium is fired from a hitting ball firing device (not shown). Further, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the gaming area 10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area 10 can be seen through the glass window 50a. The glass door frame 50 is formed to have a size capable of covering the entire front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, and a hitting operation handle 51 is provided below the glass window 50 a. In the following description, the game ball P may be referred to as a “game ball”.

  The game board 2 is formed of a translucent synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and a methacryl resin in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and an obstruction nail (not shown) and a guide rail are provided on the game board surface 200A as a front surface. It mainly comprises a board 200 provided with 2b and the like, and a spacer member 250 integrally attached to the back side of the board. Although the game board 2 of this embodiment is made of a synthetic resin material having a light-transmitting property, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured.

  A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower right position of the game area 10). Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is a special symbol (special identification information) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each of them in a special figure game as an example of a variable display game. The “special map” is displayed so as to be variable (also referred to as “variable display” or “variable display”). Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. .

  The effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area 10 on the game board 2. The effect display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, the first special figure display 4A in the special figure game corresponds to the change display of the first special figure and the second special figure display 4B corresponds to the change display of the second special figure. In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R serving as a plurality of variable display units, for example, three, the effect symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) each of which can be identified, are variably displayed. The variation display of the effect symbol is also included in the variation display game.

  Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 5, a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A or a special figure using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of effect symbols, each of which is identifiable, are changed and displayed, and a fixed effect symbol (final stop symbol) as a result of the change display is derived and displayed.

  The effect display device 5 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized through an opening 2 c formed in the game board 2. In addition, a frame-shaped center decoration frame 52 is provided in the opening 2 c of the game board 2.

  A first hold storage display area 5D and a second hold storage display area 5U are set at two lower left and right portions of the display area of the effect display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, a hold storage display is performed in which the number of change storages corresponding to the special figure game (number of special figure hold storages) can be specified.

  Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. This occurs based on a start winning prize due to (entering). That is, a start condition (also referred to as an “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of effect symbols is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. Due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, when the start condition allowing the start of the variable display game is not established, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is performed. Done.

  At the right side of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, there are a first reservation display 25A and a second reservation display 25B for displaying the number of reserved special figures to be specified. Is provided. The first reservation display 25A displays the first special figure reserved storage number in a specifiable manner, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second special figure reserved storage number in a specifiable manner.

  Below the effect display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A is provided, and below the effect display device 5, a normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided. The normal winning prize ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normally variable winning prize ball device 6B is brought into a closed state in which the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 2 projects to the game area 10 and an open state in which it retreats from the game area 10. A normal electric accessory having a movable plate is provided, and a second starting winning opening is formed as a starting area (second starting area).

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls that have passed (entered) the first start winning port by the first start port switch 22A, and the first special figure. If the number of retained storages is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on detection of the game balls passing (entering) by the second start winning port by the second start port switch 22B. If the number of special figure reservation storages is equal to or smaller than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second start condition is satisfied.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at the right side of the normal winning ball device 6A. The special variable winning ball device 7 forms a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 shown in FIG. As described above, the special winning opening as the specific area has an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball (or does not easily pass (enter)). To a disadvantaged closed state.

  A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on detection of the game balls that have passed (entered) the large winning opening by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) a game ball into the special winning opening. The second state is disadvantageous.

  Further, at the lower left and right sides of the effect display device 5, there are provided general winning openings 401A, 401B, 401C formed by the winning opening forming member. The game balls that have passed (entered) the general winning openings 401A, 401B, and 401C are guided to a winning switch 30 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back side of the game board 2 by a guide path (not shown). It is detected that the game ball has passed (entered). Then, based on the detection (pass) of the game balls by the winning switch 30, only a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at the right side position of the second hold display 25B. At a position on the right side of the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol holding display 25C is provided. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose reserved storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 41.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area 10, game balls paid out as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball rental machine are supplied to a hit ball launching device (not shown). An unillustrated upper plate (hitting ball supply plate) which is held (stored) as much as possible is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a discharge port (not shown) for discharging surplus balls, foul balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, and various types of data transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, as shown in FIG. Various boards such as a relay board 15 for relaying control signals, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a function of setting a random number used in the special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B to perform the first special figure and the second special figure. The display of the variation of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variation display of the symbol, and controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by performing lighting / off / coloring control of the ordinary symbol display 20 and the like. It also has a control function. Further, on the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the main substrate 11, a gate switch 21 for detecting a game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a first starting port switch 22 </ b> A, a second starting port switch 22 </ b> B, a count switch 23, and a winning switch 30 are provided. Are connected. In addition, display control of the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the ordinary symbol display 20, the first reservation display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general picture reservation display 25C, and the like is performed. For transmitting a command signal for connection.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a change pattern designation command indicating a change pattern indicating a change mode such as a change time of the effect symbol, a type of the reach effect, and the presence or absence of the pseudo-run.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 (Read Only Memory 101) that stores a game control program and fixed data, and a game control work. RAM 102 (Random Access Memory 102) that provides an area, CPU 103 (Central Processing Unit 103) that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of CPU 103 It comprises a random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O 105 (Input / Output port 105). As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing the program read from the ROM 101.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and displays an effect display. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric components such as the device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R and the production LED 9 are mounted.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 for performing a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing an effect control program and fixed data, a RAM 122 for providing a work area of the effect control CPU 120, and an effect display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation, a random number circuit 124 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and an I / O 125. And are installed.

  In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the effect display device 5, the variation display of the effect symbols is started in response to the start of the special figure game.

  Next, an operation (operation) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control timer interrupt process is started in the game control main process, a switch process, a main side error process, an information output process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, and a command control process are executed. Moreover, when power is turned on, effect control CPU 120 starts execution of the main processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main processing, command analysis processing, effect control process processing, and effect random number update processing are executed.

  Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state where the gaming machine frame is opened. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the gaming machine frame to which the gaming board is attached. FIG. 5A is a perspective view showing an upper board presser, and FIG. 5B is a perspective view showing a lower board presser.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the outer frame 60 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by an upper plate 61, a lower plate 62, a left side plate 63, and a right side plate 64. The upper plate 61 and the lower plate 62 are formed in a plate shape from wood, and can be installed and fixed to a game island (not shown) installed in a game arcade or the like via a nail or the like. The left side plate 63 and the right side plate 64 are formed in a plate shape by extrusion molding of an aluminum material.

  A curtain plate 214 is provided at the lower part of the opening of the outer frame 60, and the lower part of the opening is closed. In the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the outer frame 60, bearings for rotatably supporting a vertically oriented pivot shaft (not shown) provided in the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the gaming machine frame 3. A portion (not shown) is provided, and the gaming machine frame 3 is positioned between a closed position for closing the opening of the outer frame 60 and an open position for opening the opening centering around the left side of the outer frame 60. It is rotatably supported.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the gaming machine frame 3 is formed with an opening 160 having a size that allows a gaming component unit (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming board 2 to be inserted. Locking recesses 161a and 161b are provided at upper and lower positions on the left side of the opening 160, and board holding hardware 162a and 162b are provided at upper and lower positions on the right side. In the state inserted into the locking recesses 161a and 161b, the right end is locked by the board holding hardware 162a and 162b to be mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (A), the board holding member 162a is centered on a base portion 170 fixed to the gaming machine frame 3 and a vertically rotating shaft 171 provided on the right side of the base portion 170. A rotating portion 172 rotatably provided as a lock, a locking portion 173 provided slidably with respect to the rotating portion 172, and a rail suspended downward from the rotating shaft 171 side of the rotating portion 172. And a holding piece 174.

  The rotating portion 172 is constantly urged in the opening direction by a coil spring (not shown) mounted around the rotating shaft 171, and a lower portion thereof presses the right side of the upper front surface of the game board 2 from the front side. A piece 172a extends in the left-right direction. The locking portion 173 has a locking claw (not shown) that can be locked to a locked portion (not shown) formed on the base portion 170, and an operation piece 173b for performing a locking release operation. Then, it is constantly urged in the locking direction by a compression spring (not shown).

  In the unlocking state indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 5A, the board holding member 162a configured as described above holds the rotating portion 172 at the locking position (not shown) against the urging force of the coil spring (not shown). By moving the locking claw (not shown) to a locked portion (not shown) by moving to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 5 (A). Further, in the locked state shown by the solid line in FIG. 5A, when the operation piece 173b is operated against the urging force of the compression spring (not shown) to move the locking portion 173 to the rotation shaft 171 side. As shown in FIG. 5A, the locking of the locking portion (not shown) by the locking claw (not shown) is released, and the rotating portion 172 is opened by the urging force of the coil spring (not shown). To rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (B), the board holding member 162b is centered on a base portion 180 fixed to the gaming machine frame 3 and a turning shaft 181 provided on the right side of the base portion 180 and pointing in the vertical direction. It mainly comprises a rotating part 182 provided rotatably as a lock, and a locking part 183 provided slidably with respect to the rotating part 182.

  The rotating portion 182 is constantly urged toward the opening direction by a coil spring 184 mounted on a rotating shaft 181. A board holding piece 182a that presses the right side of the lower front surface of the game board 2 from the front side is provided at a lower portion. It extends in the left-right direction. The locking portion 183 has a locking claw (not shown) that can be locked to a locked portion (not shown) formed on the base portion 180, and an operation piece 183b for performing a locking release operation. Then, it is constantly urged in the locking direction by a compression spring (not shown).

  In the unlocking state indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 5B, the board holding member 162b configured as described above locks the rotating portion 182 against the urging force of the coil spring (not shown) at the locking position ( By moving the locking claw (not shown) to the locked portion (not shown) by moving to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 5 (B). Further, in the locked state shown by the solid line in FIG. 5B, when the operating piece 183b is operated against the urging force of the compression spring (not shown) to move the locking portion 183 to the rotation shaft 181 side. As shown in FIG. 5B, the locking of the locking portion (not shown) by the locking claw (not shown) is released, and the rotating portion 182 is opened by the urging force of the coil spring (not shown). To rotate.

  Here, a method of attaching the gaming board 2 to the gaming machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. When attaching the game board 2 to the game machine frame 3, first, the rotating parts 172, 182 and the locking parts 173, 183 of the upper and lower board holding hardware 162a, 162b are moved to the open position. Next, with the back surface of the game board 2 facing the opening 160, the left side of the game board 2 is inserted into the locking recesses 161a and 161b from the front of the gaming machine frame 3, and the locking recesses 161a and 161b are inserted. Push the right side of the game board 2 toward the center as the center. When the peripheral edge of the rear surface of the game board 2 contacts the peripheral edge of the opening 160 of the frame 3 for the gaming machine, the game board 2 is positioned on the frame 3 for the gaming machine. Facing the rear side through.

  In addition, the left side of the game board 2 is inserted into the locking recesses 161a and 161b from the front of the gaming machine frame 3, and the right side of the game board 2 is pushed rearward around the locking recesses 161a and 161b. By moving the rotating parts 172, 182 and the locking parts 173, 183 of the upper and lower board holders 162a, 162b from the open position to the locking position in a state where the game board 2 is disposed in the opening 160, the game is performed. The right sides of the upper and lower sides of the front surface of the board 2 are pressed from the front by board holding pieces 172a and 182a. When the locking claw (not shown) is locked to the locked portion (not shown), the game board 2 is formed by the locking recesses 161a and 161b and the upper and lower board holding members 162a and 162b. It is held in a state attached to the frame 3. The board holding pieces 172a and 182a have flat surfaces extending along the upper and lower sides of the game board 2, and the flat surfaces press the upper and lower sides of the front face of the game board 2, so that the game board 2 Can be stably held in the gaming machine frame 3.

  Further, the rail holding piece 174 has a flat surface facing the upper right part of the front surface of the rail decorative frame 410 described later, and the flat surface presses the upper right part of the front surface of the rail decorative frame 410. The frame 410 can be stably held (see FIGS. 4 and 6).

  Next, the game board 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a front view showing the game board. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the game board and the like.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the gaming board 2 mainly includes a board 200 and a spacer member 250 integrally attached to the back side of the board 200. The board 200 has a thickness of about 10 mm, and is entirely transparent. In addition, the game board 10 forms a game area 10 on the front side between the game board 200 and a glass window 50a arranged substantially parallel to the game board.

  In this embodiment, the entire board 200 is formed to be transparent, but a translucent material capable of seeing through a decorative body (not shown) disposed from the front side to the back side of the board 200 is provided. If it is formed of a member, it may be translucent or colored. Even if the whole does not have a light transmitting property, a light transmitting part may be formed at least in a part of the game area 10.

  The spacer member 250 is formed of a non-translucent member into a substantially rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, and has a mounting portion 250A on which the rear peripheral portion of the board face plate 200 is arranged. A plurality of positioning bosses for determining the position of the face plate 200 are protruded, and a plurality of mounting bosses having screw holes into which mounting screws are screwed are provided. Since the thickness of the mounting portion 250A of the spacer member 250 is about 10 mm, the gaming board 2 having a thickness of about 20 mm is formed by the spacer member 250 and the board 200.

  On the board 200, the display screen of the effect display device 5 arranged on the back side faces the front side, the first hole 201 to which the center decoration frame 52 is attached, and the special variable winning ball device 7, The second hole 202 to which the variable winning ball device 6B and the first guiding member unit 300 having the guiding passage are attached, the third hole 203 to which the normal winning ball device 6A is attached, and the fourth hole forming the out opening 16. A portion 204, a fifth hole 205 to which the passage gate 41 is attached, and sixth holes 206A to 206C to which the general winning opening forming member is attached are formed penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 7). .

  A second guiding member unit 301 for guiding a game ball is attached to a diagonally upper right position of the first guiding member unit 300 on the game board surface 200A which is a front surface of the board plate 200, and a leftward position of a general winning opening forming member. , A third guiding member unit 302 for guiding a game ball is attached.

  A guide rail 500 provided around the game area 10 is attached to the game board surface 200A. The guide rail 500 includes an outer rail that forms an outer edge of the game area 10, and an inner rail 501 (rail member) attached inside the outer rail. More specifically, the outer rail extends from the lower left to the upper right of the game area 10 while being curved, and a predetermined length from the right end of the first outer rail 502 (the end opposite to the firing port) downward. And a second outer rail 503 extending therefrom toward the out port 16 for a predetermined length. The first outer rail 502 is made of a strip-shaped metal material, and is fitted to the arc-shaped inner surface of the rail decoration frame 410 provided outside the first outer rail 502 with respect to the game board surface 200A. The rail decoration frame 410 is attached by fixing with a plurality of screws N1. 4 and 6, for convenience of description, the number of screws N1 is smaller than the actual number.

  The second outer rail 503 is made of a synthetic resin material, and is attached to the game board surface 200A with a plurality of screws N2. Below the second outer rail 503, the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the first reservation display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the ordinary symbol display 20, A diagram hold display 25C is provided. On the right side of the second outer rail 503, there is formed a label sticking section 520 to which a label (certificate stamp) (not shown) issued by a third party indicating the date of manufacture and the like is stuck. Since a gaming machine without a label cannot be placed in the hall, the second outer rail 503 having the label attaching portion 520 is fixed so as not to be easily removed from the board 200.

  The inner rail 501 is made of a synthetic resin material, and extends upward from the left end of the second outer rail 503 in the shape of an arc while bending rightward from the left end. The inner rail 501 includes a locking claw 501a that can be locked to a locking groove 503a provided at a left end of the second outer rail 503 (a lower left end of the second outer rail 503). Is connected to the second outer rail 503 by the locking of the locking claws 501a. That is, since the inner rail 501 is unitized with the second outer rail 503 which is firmly fixed to the panel board 200, the inner rail 501 can be stably attached to the panel board 200. The inner rail 501 is attached to the game board surface 200A by a plurality of screws N3 at fixed portions 504T and 504U described later.

  Although the first outer rail 502 (rail decoration frame 410), the second outer rail 503, and the inner rail 501 have been described as being fixed to the panel board 200 with the screws N1, N2, and N3, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be attached (fixed) to the panel board 200 by welding or press fitting.

  A launch ball path 402 is formed between the inner rail 501 and the first outer rail 502, and a game ball P hit from the hitting ball launching device is guided into the launch ball path 402 and flows into the game area 10. . Specifically, a game ball P launched from a ball launching device (not shown) provided at the lower right of the game board 2 moves the launching ball path 402 upward along the first outer rail 502 to play the game area. You are guided to the upper left of 10. When the player performs the first operation of the hit ball operation handle 51, the game ball P having entered the game area 10 flows down the first path K1 on the left side of the center decoration frame 52, and the player moves the hit ball operation handle 51 to the first position. In the case of the second operation in which the firing intensity is higher than the one operation, the game ball P that has entered the game area 10 flows down the second path K2 on the right side of the center decorative frame 52.

  Note that a ball return preventing device 700 is provided at a free end (upper end) of the inner rail 501. The ball return preventing device 700 has a plate-shaped opening / closing portion 701 pivotally supported on the free end of the inner rail 501, and the opening / closing portion 701 closes the firing ball passage 402 with a weight (not shown). You are being biased to. When the opening / closing unit 701 closes the firing ball passage 402, the weight is locked to the inner rail 501 so that it does not further rotate counterclockwise (see FIG. 6). ). According to this, the game ball P hit from the hitting ball launching device jumps up and down the opening / closing portion 701 against the urging by the weight portion, flows into the game area 10, and fires from the game area 10. The game ball P that is going to return to the passage 402 is prevented from returning to the launching ball passage 402 by the opening / closing unit 701.

  Next, the rail decorative frame 410 provided outside the first outer rail 502 will be described with reference to FIG. The rail decorative frame 410 is a resin member formed in an arc shape extending from the lower left to the upper right through the upper left of the game area 10. A first outer rail 502 is mounted on the arc-shaped inner surface of the rail decorative frame 410. An elastic member 600 made of an elastic material such as rubber is attached as a collision object to a location on the inner side surface of the rail decoration frame 410 where the distal end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 6) of the first outer rail 502 is attached. The game ball, which is fired from a hitting ball firing device (not shown) with a predetermined force or more and moves along the inner side surface of the first outer rail 502, hits the elastic member 600 and attenuates the force, and the center of the game area 10 is attenuated. It is bounced back.

  The first outer rail 502 has a holding portion for holding the elastic member 600. The holding portion includes a plate-shaped first holding portion 421 having an inner surface formed with a protrusion 422 (see FIG. 9B) pressed into a through hole 602 formed in the elastic member 600. And at least a second holding portion 423 facing a back side surface 604 which is a surface opposite to the collision surface 601 against which the game ball collides.

  The first holding portion 421 supports the elastic member 600 by press-fitting the protrusion 422 of the first holding portion 421 into the through hole 602 of the elastic member 600, and even when a game ball collides with the elastic member 600. The position of the elastic member 600 is not shifted. Further, since the elastic member 600 can be removed by pulling it out from the protruding portion 422 of the first holding portion 421, the maintainability is improved.

  The projecting portion 422 of the first holding portion 421 has a step portion 424 formed between the root portion and the tip portion in the projecting direction, and engages with the step portion 603 formed in the through hole 602 of the elastic member 600. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the position of the elastic member 600 from shifting even if the game ball collides.

  Further, in the protruding portion 422, the diameter of the root portion is larger than the diameter of the tip portion with the step portion 424 as a boundary. For this reason, the durability of the protruding portion 422 can be enhanced and the durability can be increased, and breakage of the protruding portion 422 can be prevented.

  Further, the first holding portion 421 has a plate-shaped portion 425 having a protruding portion 422 formed on an inner surface (rear surface), and an outer surface (front surface) of the plate-shaped portion 425 corresponds to the protruding portion 422. A concave portion 426 recessed from the portion toward the inside of the protruding portion 422 is formed. By providing the concave portion 426 and forming the inside of the protrusion 422 with lightening, the durability of the protrusion 422 can be improved. In addition, a seal member is attached to the front surface of the first holding portion 421 so that the front opening of the concave portion 426 formed on the front surface of the first holding portion 421 is closed.

  The second holding portion 423 has an engaged portion 427 that engages with a step portion 605 provided on the back side surface 604 of the elastic member 600. Therefore, even if an impact is given to the elastic member 600 due to a collision of a game ball or the like, the position of the elastic member 600 is shifted or the elastic member 600 is centered on the protrusion 422 into which the elastic member 600 is pressed into the through hole 602. Rotation can be prevented.

  FIG. 9B shows a state in which the elastic member 600 is attached to the holding portions (the first holding portion 421 and the second holding portion 423) and the rail decorative frame 410 having the holding portions is attached to the game board 2. As shown in ()), a gap 26 is formed between the elastic member 600 and the game board 2. The provision of the gap 26 prevents the impact of the game ball colliding with the elastic member 600 from being propagated to the game board 2.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the elastic member 600 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the distance L1 between the center of the cylindrical shape that is the shape of the through hole 602 and the collision surface 601 is the shape of the through hole 602. It is longer than the distance L2 between the center of the cylindrical shape and the back side surface 604. Thus, the impact of the game ball colliding with the collision surface 601 can be sufficiently absorbed by the elastic member of the elastic member 600 within the range of the distance L1.

  When the elastic member 600 is held by the holding portions (the first holding portion 421 and the second holding portion 423), at least the collision surface 601 protrudes from the end of the first holding portion 421 (FIG. 6). reference). For this reason, when a game ball fired from a hit ball firing device (not shown) flies along the first outer rail 502 with a predetermined momentum or more, the ball always hits the hit surface 601 of the elastic member 600. Since the first holding portion 421 does not collide with the first holding portion 421, damage to the first holding portion 421 can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, in the state where the collision surface 601 is held by the holding units (the first holding unit 421 and the second holding unit 423) as shown in FIG. The colliding surface 601 is inclined by a predetermined angle θ1 with respect to a normal line T1 perpendicular to a tangent line at a predetermined point of the first outer rail 502 toward the center of the game area 10, and is perpendicular to the game board surface 200A. It is formed as an inclined surface inclined at a predetermined angle θ2 toward the game board surface 200A with respect to the vertical line T2.

  Therefore, when the game ball P that has moved along the first outer rail 502 collides with the collision surface 601 held by the holding units (the first holding unit 421 and the second holding unit 423), the game ball P is moved. It bounces back toward the game board surface 200A in a direction away from the first outer rail 502. Therefore, in the game area 10 extending below the elastic member 600, the game ball P can be guided to the pass gate 41 and the general winning opening 401C provided at a position distant from the first outer rail 502, and the bouncing game ball P can be guided to the first ball. It is possible to avoid colliding with the subsequent game ball P moving along the outer rail 502 and affecting the flow of the subsequent ball. Further, it is possible to prevent the rebounded game ball P from hitting the glass window 50a and damaging the glass window 50a.

  As described above, the elastic member 600 is configured such that the rebound angle and the speed of the game ball P in accordance with the inclination and the repulsive force of the collision surface 601 in the state of being held by the holding units (the first holding unit 421 and the second holding unit 423). This is a member that also affects the flow-down path of the rebounded game sphere P if the inclination may change while being held because the game ball P is held down.

  The periphery of the opening of the through hole 602 in the elastic member 600 is chamfered. Thus, the orientation (front and back) of the elastic member 600 is not mistaken, and the protrusion 422 of the first holding portion 421 of the rail decoration frame 410 is easily inserted into the through hole 602.

  Further, in the elastic member 600, as described above, the distance L 1 between the center of the cylindrical shape, which is the shape of the through hole 602, and the collision surface 601 is equal to the distance between the center of the cylindrical shape, which is the shape of the through hole 602, and the back side surface 604. Is longer than the distance L2. For this reason, the direction when attaching the elastic member 600 to the rail decorative frame 410 is not mistaken.

  Further, in the elastic member 600, the through hole 602 is formed as a hole penetrating one of the six surfaces of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and one surface opposed thereto. The protruding portion 422 of the first holding portion 421 to be inserted has its end reaching at least the middle point of the through-hole 602 or the back side thereof. Thereby, the absorbency of the impact when the game ball collides can be enhanced. The hole formed in the elastic member 600 is not limited to a through hole, and may be a hole that does not penetrate.

  As shown in FIG. 11, a ground 511 for releasing generated static electricity is formed at the right end of the first outer rail 502. In the vicinity of the ground 511 in the first outer rail 502, a curved portion 512 that is curved toward the outside of the arc-shaped first outer rail 502 is formed. The provision of the curved portion 512 facilitates the work of fitting the ground 511 of the first outer rail 502 to the back side of the rail decorative frame 410. For example, the lower left portion of the first outer rail 502 is fitted to the lower left portion of the rail decorative frame 410, the first outer rail 502 is moved along the inner surface of the rail decorative frame 410, and the ground 511 is connected to the rail decorative frame 410. When fitted to the back side in the upper right part, the bent part 512 can be bent and the like can be fitted to a predetermined position on the back side in the upper right part of the rail decorative frame 410 while finely adjusting the direction of the ground 511. (See FIG. 9A).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, the first outer rail 502 and the elastic member 600 are arranged with a predetermined gap therebetween while being attached to the rail decoration frame 410. Therefore, for example, the vibration generated by the movement of the game ball P along the first outer rail 502 is not transmitted to the elastic member 600 and does not affect the rebound angle, speed, and the like of the game ball P. . Further, it is possible to prevent the vibration generated by the collision of the game ball P with the elastic member 600 from being transmitted to the first outer rail 502 and affecting the flow path of the game ball P moving along the first outer rail 502. You.

  The elastic member 600 is provided in a state in which the elastic member 600 is close to a position near the curved portion 512 formed at the end of the first outer rail 502 when attached to the rail decoration frame 410. That is, as shown in FIG. 9A, the first outer rail 502 is arranged along the elastic member 600, but a part thereof is separated from the elastic member 600 by the provision of the curved portion 512. As a result, the surface of the elastic member 600 on the first outer rail 502 side can be held by a part of the second holding portion 423 so as to be covered from the first outer rail 502 side, so that the elastic member 600 can be stably held. I can support it.

  As shown in FIG. 8, when the ground 511 is attached to the rear side of the first outer rail 502, a part of the ground 511 is directed to the front side through a hole 507 formed in the first outer rail 502. The protruding portion comes into contact with a ground member (not shown) provided on the back surface of the glass door frame 50 when the glass door frame 50 is closed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, a slit 513 can be formed in the curved portion 512 of the first outer rail 502 along a curved direction. By forming the slit 513, when the ground 511 is fitted on the rear side at the upper right portion of the rail decorative frame 410, it is easy to finely adjust the direction of the ground 511.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, the right end of the rail decorative frame 410 and the upper end of the second outer rail 503 are joined at the right end of the rail decorative frame 410 from the front side to the rear side. The engaging portion 530 protruding from the front side to the rear side at the upper end of the second outer rail 503 is fitted to the engaged portion 420 recessed toward the side. . Accordingly, the rail decorative frame 410 is pressed from the front to the rear by the second outer rail 503, so that the stability of the rail decorative frame 410 is improved.

  In the gaming board 2 configured as above, the elastic member 600 against which the game ball collides is held by the holding portions (the first holding portion 421 and the second holding portion 423) of the rail decoration frame 410. The rail decorative frame 410 is screwed and fixed to the board 200 using a plurality of screws N1, so that the elastic member 600 is arranged at a predetermined position on the board 200. That is, the elastic member 600 is provided at a predetermined position on the board 200 via the rail decorative frame 410.

  After the second outer rail 503 is attached to the panel board 200 with the plurality of screws N2, the engaging portions 530 of the second outer rail 503 are attached to the rail ornament frame 410. And the lower right end of the rail decorative frame 410 is pressed from the front side by the second outer rail 503, whereby the rail decorative frame 410 is held by the panel board 200.

  Furthermore, the game board 2 in which the rail decoration frame 410, the second outer rail 503, and the inner rail 501 are mounted on the board face plate 200 is assembled to the game machine frame 3, and the upper right end of the rail decoration frame 410 is a board holding bracket 162a. The rail decoration frame 410 is held on the panel board 200 by being pressed from the front side by the rail pressing piece 174.

  By attaching the rail decoration frame 410 holding the elastic member 600 to the board 200 in this manner, the elastic member 600 is held at a predetermined position in the game area 10 and the gaming board 2 is assembled to the gaming machine frame 3. Since a plurality of portions of the rail decorative frame 410 are pressed from the front side by the second outer rail 503 and the rail pressing piece 174, the stability of the rail decorative frame 410 is improved, and thus the rail decorative frame 410 is held by the rail decorative frame 410. The displacement of the elastic member 600 from the holding position is suppressed.

  In addition, the positional deviation is a positional deviation from the holding position of the elastic member 600 to the front side, that is, a positional deviation in a direction away from the game board surface 200 </ b> A of the board board 200 or a direction in which the board member 200 rotates about the protrusion 422. It also includes positional deviation, positional deviation in a direction along the game board surface 200A, and the like.

  Further, the second outer rail 503 and the rail holding piece 174 of the board holding metal member 162a function as a second holding body that holds the rail decorative frame 410 on the board face plate 200 with the glass door frame 50 opened. Although not particularly shown, the glass window 50a of the glass door frame 50 comes close to or abuts the front surface of the first holding portion 421 of the rail decorative frame 410 when in the closed position. It functions as a body, but does not function as a second holder when in the open position.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 6, the pass gate 41, the general winning opening 401C, and a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are provided on the second path K2 on the right side of the center decorative frame 52 in the gaming area 10. When the game ball colliding with the elastic member 600 held by the first holding portion 421 of the rail decorative frame 410 flows down the second path K2 while changing the trajectory due to the collision, the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, or There is a case where the player enters the winning opening 401C. As described above, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and when the gaming ball wins the second starting winning opening, the second special symbol is displayed. There is a possibility that the fluctuation display is started and the state is controlled to the big hit gaming state. In addition, if a game ball wins the general winning opening 401C, a predetermined number of winning balls are obtained.

  That is, there is a possibility that a value that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state or a prize ball) may be given when the game ball that has collided with the elastic member 600 flows down the second path K2. Here, the path along which the game ball flows down the second path K2 may change depending on the amount of rebound and the angle when the ball hits the elastic member 600. For this reason, the elastic member 600 is replaced by an illegal elastic member formed so that the game ball rebounds in a direction advantageous to the player, or the direction of the elastic member 600 is improperly changed, so that the rebound amount is increased. And the like are changed, the number of game balls passing through the passage gate 41 or entering the general winning opening 401C increases, and there is a possibility that the possibility that a value advantageous to the player is provided is increased. .

  In order to remove the elastic member 600 from the board 200, a plurality of screws N1 are removed by fixing the plurality of portions of the rail decorative frame 410, which is the first holding body for holding the elastic member 600, with the screws N1. It needs to be removed. In addition, by providing the rail holding piece 174 of the board holding member 162a, which is the second holding body for holding the rail decoration frame 410, and the engaging portion 530 of the second outer rail 503, the rail decoration frame 410 can be moved from the board face plate 200. In order to remove it, it is necessary to release the locked state by the board holding bracket 162a and to remove the second outer rail 503 from the board face plate 200. Therefore, by making it difficult to remove the rail decorative frame 410 and make the replacement of the elastic member 600 difficult, it is possible to suppress improper acts on the elastic member 600.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, the left end portion LT of the first outer rail 502 is positioned on the inner side surface of the opened glass door frame 50. It is located on the left side of the included virtual extension surface GT. Thereby, in a state where the gaming board 2 is mounted on the gaming machine frame 3 and the rail decoration frame 410 to which the first outer rail 502 is attached is to be removed, the glass door frame 50 is largely opened. In addition, even when the first outer rail 502 is detached to the front side even if it is largely opened, there is a possibility that the left portion of the first outer rail 502 may contact the glass door frame 50. Removal of the rail decoration frame 410 becomes difficult. Accordingly, it is possible to make the replacement of the elastic member 600 difficult, and thus it is possible to more appropriately suppress the illegal act on the elastic member 600.

  Further, the rail decorative frame 410 is screwed and fixed to the game board 2 using a plurality of screws N1, and screw holes through which the screws N1 are inserted are formed at a plurality of locations throughout the rail decorative frame 410. ing. For example, as shown in FIG. 12, the rail decorative frame 410 is located from the lower left side of the gaming area 10 to the upper left side and further to the upper right side. A screw hole is also formed on the upper side and the left side of the area 10, and is screwed and fixed to the game board 2 using a plurality of screws N1. For this reason, in the case where the rail decoration frame 410 is removed and the elastic member 600 is replaced to change the amount of rebound of the game ball or the angle to change the angle, it becomes troublesome to remove all the plurality of screws N1. Since the willingness to perform is attenuated, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the wrongdoing.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the elastic member 600, which is a collision object with which the game medium collides, is attached to the game board 2, and holds the elastic member 600 at a predetermined position on the game board 2. The rail decorative frame 410 serving as the rail decorative frame 410, and the rail holding piece 174 of the board holding metal member 162a serving as the second holder for holding the rail decorative frame 410 attached to the game board 2, the second outer rail 503, and the screw N1. , A glass door frame 50. By doing so, the rail decoration frame 410 holding the elastic member 600 is held by each second holder in a state where the rail decoration frame 410 is attached to the game board, so that the stability of the rail decoration frame 410 is improved. It is possible to prevent the game performance from being impaired due to the displacement of the elastic member 600.

  In the above-described embodiment, the rail decoration frame 410 releases the holding state of each second holding body, for example, opens the glass door frame 50, and removes the board holding fixture 162a, the second outer rail 503, and the screw N1. Unless it is removed, the game board 2 cannot be removed. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the rail decoration frame 410 from being easily removed from the game board 2.

  In the above-described embodiment, the rail decorative frame 410 includes the plate-shaped portion 425 and the protruding portion 422 of the first holding portion 421 of the rail decorative frame 410 that is a restricting portion that restricts the displacement of the elastic member 600 from the holding position. The second holding portion 423 has an engagement protrusion 428. In this way, it is possible to prevent the elastic member 600 from being displaced with respect to the rail decorative frame 410 and the gaming performance from being impaired. In addition, since the engaging projection 428 is engaged with the back surface 606 of the elastic member 600, making it difficult to remove the elastic member 600, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally replacing the elastic member 600.

  In the above-described embodiment, the regulating portion is a contact surface with which the elastic member 600 contacts while holding the elastic member 600, and is a plurality of contact surfaces having different directions from each other. The first holding portion 421 includes an inner surface (rear surface) of the plate-shaped portion 425 and a surface of the second holding portion 423 that comes into contact with the elastic member 600. With this configuration, the collision target can be pressed by the plurality of contact surfaces having different directions, so that the displacement of the collision target can be suitably suppressed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 9A, when the game ball P moving along the first outer rail 502 collides with the collision surface 601, the ball moves slightly away from the first outer rail 502. The position at which the game ball P collides with the colliding surface 601 differs from the position at which the game ball P collides with the colliding surface 601, and the displacement of the collision position causes the elastic member 600 to rotate about the protrusion 422. The resulting displacement is prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the rail decorative frame 410 is formed by the protrusion 422 of the first holding portion 421 of the rail decorative frame 410 which is a holding pin inserted into the through hole 602 which is an insertion hole formed in the elastic member 600. In the protrusion 422, the outer diameter of the root in the protruding direction on the base side is larger than the outer diameter of the distal end on the distal end side. By doing so, the durability of the holding pin against an impact generated on the elastic member 600 can be increased.

  In the above-described embodiment, the rail decorative frame 410 is formed by the protrusion 422 of the first holding portion 421 of the rail decorative frame 410 which is a holding pin inserted into the through hole 602 which is an insertion hole formed in the elastic member 600. And a concave portion 426 which is a hollow portion is formed inside the protruding portion 422. By doing so, the strength of the protruding portion 422 is increased, so that the durability is improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, the elastic member 600 is held by the rail decoration frame 410 such that at least the collision surface 601 which is a collision portion where the game ball collides is located outside the rail decoration frame 410. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the rail decorative frame 410 and damaging the rail decorative frame 410.

  As described above, the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the elastic member 600 made of a rubber material is applied as an example of the collision object, but the embodiment is not limited thereto, and the collision object is limited to the elastic body. Instead, for example, it may be made of a synthetic resin material.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the rail decorative frame 410 is applied as the first holding body that holds the elastic member 600 at a predetermined position on the game board 2 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Other rail members such as the outer rail 503 and the inner rail 501 may be used. Further, in addition to the rail member, for example, a member provided only for holding the elastic member 600 may be used. Furthermore, any member can be used as long as the game ball can frequently collide, such as the center decorative frame 52, the first guide member unit 300, the second guide member unit 301, and the third guide member unit 302. In the case of the center decorative frame 52, for example, it is conceivable to provide the elastic member 600 at the upper left (so-called squat position) so that the game balls entering the game area 10 can collide.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the second holding body that holds the rail decorative frame 410 attached to the game board 2, the form in which the board holding metal 162a and the second outer rail 503 are applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, another rail member may be applied, or a guide member of a game ball such as the center decorative frame 52, the first guide member unit 300, the second guide member unit 301, or the third guide member unit 302. Etc. may be applied.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the board holding member 162a and the second outer rail 503 as the second holding body for holding the rail decoration frame 410 attached to the game board 2 move the rail decoration frame 410 from the front to the game board surface 200A side. Although the member is held so as to be pressed down, the member is not limited to this, and may be a member that holds a plurality of locations on the side surface of the rail decorative frame 410 from the side.

  In the above-described embodiment, the board holding member 162a and the second outer rail 503 as the second holding body for holding the rail decorative frame 410 attached to the game board 2 are members that abut against and hold the rail decorative frame 410. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a member that is disposed close to the rail decorative frame 410 and that holds the rail decorative frame 410 so as not to be displaced by a predetermined amount or more.

  In the above embodiment, the screw N1 for attaching the rail decoration frame 410 to the game board 2 can be removed without releasing the holding state by the board holding metal 162a and the second outer rail 503. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be provided so that it cannot be removed unless the holding state by the board holding bracket 162a and the second outer rail 503 is released.

  In the above-described embodiment, the rail decorative frame 410 cannot be removed from the game board 2 unless the holding state by the board holding metal 162a or the second outer rail 503 is released, but the embodiment is limited to this. Instead, the rail decoration frame 410 may be detached from the game board 2 without releasing the holding state by the board holding bracket 162a or the second outer rail 503 as long as the screw N1 is removed.

  Further, in the embodiment, the plurality of screws N1 for screwing and fixing the rail decorative frame 410 to the board 200 are of the same type. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a plus screw and a minus screw may be used together. Accordingly, a plurality of tools are required to remove the plurality of screws N1 and it takes time and effort, so that an illegal act of replacing the elastic member 600 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rail decorative frame 410 and the center decorative frame 52 are formed by separate members. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in Modification 1 of FIG. The frame 800 may be integrally formed. That is, the center decoration frame 52 and the rail decoration frame 410 may be connected via a plate-like side surface portion 811 provided along the game board 2 in the path 810 where the game ball moves. By providing the decorative frame 800 having such a shape, it is possible to prevent the position of the elastic member 600 from being shifted by increasing the size of the component, and to provide the decorative frame 800 with a portion 410 ′ corresponding to the rail decorative frame 410 and the center decorative frame. The shape of the passage 810 through which the game ball passes can be stabilized between the portion 52 ′ corresponding to the 52 and the positional relationship between the portion 410 ′ corresponding to the rail decorative frame 410 and the passage 810 is shifted. It can suppress that the property is impaired.

  Further, in the decorative frame 800, a protrusion 812 is formed on a surface facing the elastic member 600 at a portion connecting the side surface portion 811 of the passage 810 to a portion 410 ′ corresponding to the rail decorative frame 410, and the protrusion 812 is elastically formed. The elastic member 600 may be attached by press-fitting into a concave portion 608 formed in the member 600. By press-fitting the protrusion 812 into the concave portion 608 of the elastic member 600 in this manner, the displacement of the elastic member 600 can be prevented.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the shape of the elastic member 600 is substantially rectangular parallelepiped. However, the shape is not limited to substantially rectangular parallelepiped. For example, the elastic member 600 may be formed in a line-symmetric or point-symmetric shape such as a cube. For example, as shown in a modified example 2 of FIG. 14, the elastic member 600 formed in a cubic shape has four surfaces on which the through holes 602 are not formed as the collision surfaces 601, and one collision surface 601. When the ball is worn, the direction of the elastic member 600 may be changed to make another collision surface 601 a surface against which a game ball collides. Thus, even if a wrongdoing is performed on a part of the elastic member 600, by changing the direction of the elastic member 600, it is possible to prevent the effect of the wrongdoing from occurring. Further, one elastic member 600 can be used for a long time.

  In addition, on the surface (for example, the upper surface) orthogonal to the through hole 602 of the elastic member 600, a predetermined mark portion 610 is provided at a position corresponding to any one of the plurality of collision surfaces 601 parallel to the through hole 602. Is preferred. By doing so, if the collision surface 601 corresponding to the mark portion 610 is used as a reference, it becomes easy to know which collision surface 601 was used. In addition, if the arrangement position of the mark portion 610 with respect to the rail decoration frame 410 is determined, it is specified that there is a possibility that cheating has been performed when the arrangement position of the mark portion 610 with respect to the rail decoration frame 410 has changed. It will be easier.

  In addition, the mark part 610 may be provided by being colored or recessed, or when the elastic member 600 is manufactured by die molding, when the die is cut out by extruding with an ejector pin. It may be used by using the formed ejector pin mark or the like.

  As shown in Modification 3 of FIG. 15, the second holding portion 423 of the rail decorative frame 410 has a back surface 606 of the elastic member 600 (the side opposite to the surface of the elastic member 600 facing the first holding portion 421). Surface 428) may be formed. Thereby, the displacement of the elastic member 600 can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 15, a contact portion 607 that projects from the back surface 606 and contacts the game board 2 may be formed on the back surface 606 of the elastic member 600. Thereby, the displacement of the elastic member 600 can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls can be circulated inside the gaming machine. The number of the balls used for the game is subtracted from the number of the balls used for the game, and the number of the balls used for the game is subtracted from the number of the balls used for the game. The present invention is also applicable to so-called enclosed game machines. It should be noted that, in these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game balls, and thus these points and points correspond to the game value.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is applied as an example of the game medium. However, the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium. For example, a non-spherical game medium such as a medal is used. It may be.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine. However, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value. At the same time, the variation display result is derived on a variation display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each of which is identifiable, thereby completing one game, and winning according to the variation display result derived on the variation display device. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which is made possible.

  The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other exemplary embodiments described below.

  Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications, and the configurations shown in the below-described embodiments and each of the modifications, all or some of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiments disclosed this time are merely examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above and the following description, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), and a main board (for example, a main board 11, a main board 9011, etc.) for controlling the game. A predetermined payout area in which a prize ball is paid out when the medium passes (for example, a normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B serving as a second starting winning port, a special variable winning ball apparatus 907 serving as a large winning port, and a first starting winning port). Ordinary prize ball device 906A, general prize ports 9050A to 9050D serving as general prize areas), and predetermined prize ball information (for example, a combination of winning combinations, duty ratios, etc.) on prize balls paid out when game media pass through the predetermined payout area ), A hit object (for example, an elastic member 600) with which a game medium collides, and an awarded ball information display means (for example, a display monitor 9029), A first holder (for example, a rail decorative frame 410 attached to the game board 2 with the elastic member 600 attached) for holding the collision body at a predetermined position on the game board, and the first holder attached to the game board. A second holding member (for example, a rail holding piece 174 of a board holding member 162a for holding the rail decoration frame 410, a second outer rail 503, and a glass door frame 50) holding the one holding member, and the award ball information display is provided. The gaming machine is characterized in that the means is provided on the main board so that visibility to the predetermined prize ball information is not hindered.

  According to the above gaming machine, the stability of the first holding body is improved by holding the first holding body holding the colliding body with the second holding body while being attached to the game board. It is possible to prevent the game performance from being impaired due to the displacement of the collision body. Further, it is possible to easily recognize what kind of adjustment has been made to the game nail or the like. Further, in the gaming machine, the number of jackpots, the game history, and the like may be displayed on the information display means provided on the main board.

  Further, as an example of a form of a game machine that can easily recognize what kind of adjustment has been made to a game nail or the like, a predetermined area (for example, where a prize ball is paid out by passing a game medium (for example, a game ball)). For example, a normal variable winning ball device 906B serving as a second winning port, a special variable winning ball device 907 serving as a large winning port, a normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first winning port, and a general winning port 9050A serving as a general winning area. To 9050D) and predetermined information (for example, winning combination, winning ratio) provided on a main board (for example, main board 9011) for controlling a game and paid out by passing the game medium to a predetermined area. A possible information display means (for example, a display monitor 9029), wherein the information display means is provided on a main board for controlling the game so that visibility is not hindered. The gaming machine it is, and the like. Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other examples)
As described above, the entry of the game medium into the general prize area has an effect on the game as compared with the entry of the game medium into the start prize area in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the entry of the game medium. Is low. In addition, when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a specific display result, the game is controlled to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player. Compared with entry, the interest of the player is low, and it is difficult to enhance interest. Under such circumstances, the gaming nail may be maintained at the gaming site so that it is substantially difficult for the gaming medium to enter the general winning area.

  However, on the gaming machine maker side, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (so as to pass the test). For this reason, it is originally desirable that the game nail be maintained in such a manner that the game medium enters the general prize area at a predetermined frequency (such as passing a test) at a predetermined frequency. In order to achieve this, it is necessary to raise the player's interest in the entry of the game medium into the general winning area, and to make the player aware of the frequency of the game medium entering the general winning area.

  Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general prize area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general prize area. In the gaming machine according to the embodiment described later, it is possible to enhance the interest of the gaming in the gaming machine having the general winning area.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 16 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 903 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 903a formed in a frame shape and provided on the gaming machine frame 903 so as to be openable and closable.

  The game board 902 has a substantially circular game area 9010 surrounded by guide rails. In this game area 9010, a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven. The game area 9010 includes a left game area 9010A and a right game area 9010B. The game area 9010 is an area where game balls can pass on the game board 902, and the left game area 9010A is on the left side and the right game area 9010B is on the right side with respect to the center of the game area 9010.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902 (to the right of the game area 9010 in the example shown in FIG. 16). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, an LED (light emitting diode) of a 7-segment or dot matrix, and each of them is identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variably displayed). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols including numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. I do. Note that the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are composed of numerals indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. Not limited. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. . In addition, the number of special symbol display devices may be one.

  An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game board 902. The image display device 905 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. The display area of the image display device 905 corresponds to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special figure game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area which is a variable display unit divided into a plurality of variable displays, for example, three, a decorative symbol which is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) each of which can be identified is variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. Then, in the special figure game, in response to the start of either the change of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A or the change of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B, "left In the "," "medium" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the variation of the decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "medium", and "right" on the image display device 905. Then, the fixed decoration symbol (final stop symbol) which is the variable display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 905, a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display apparatus 904A or a special figure using the second special figure by the second special symbol display apparatus 904B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols, each of which is identifiable, is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern as a variable display result is derived and displayed. Deriving and displaying the display result means stopping the display of the identification information such as the decorative design (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and terminating the variable display.

  In the image display device 905, three regions may be provided as display regions serving as the decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, by bonding or separating, or by bonding and separating. . The display operation of the image display device 905 is controlled by the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. When the variable display of the first special figure is executed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the image display device 905 to execute the effect display with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is being performed on the display device 904B, the effect display is performed on the image display device 905 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). There are numbers "1" to "8", English characters "A" to "H", eight character images related to a predetermined motif, combinations of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. Character images Is a decorative image indicating, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other graphic.) In addition to these eight kinds of decorative designs, decorative designs (designs composed of the characters "sharpness") corresponding to the "sharp big hit" (also referred to as "2R probable big hit") and blank designs ( (A symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. Each of the decorative symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, but may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a lossy combination can be configured.

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, the symbol numbers are sequentially changed from a small one to a large one from top to bottom. When the scrolling display is performed in a flowing manner and the decorative symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the minimum symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L, etc.), scroll display is performed from a symbol with a large symbol number to a symbol with a small symbol number. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be subsequently displayed.

  In the lower right part of the display screen of the image display device 905, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B for displaying a fourth symbol next to a decorative symbol, a special symbol, and an ordinary symbol described later. In this embodiment, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special figure is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the derived display of the display result of the variable display is performed. The variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special figure is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special figure, and the derived display of the display result of the variable display is performed. A fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special figure is provided.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. (Accurately, however, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by designating the variation pattern on the effect control CPU 90120 side. This is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the command.) When the effect using the image display device 905 is performed, for example, the effect that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears momentarily from the screen. And the effect that the movable object blocks all or a part of the screen is performed. For this reason, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 905, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 905, the state of the fourth symbol is checked to determine whether the current state is the variable display. Whether or not it is possible to recognize it. Note that the fourth symbol is variably displayed by a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, so that the fourth symbol can always be visually recognized.

  In addition, the fourth symbol for the first special figure and the fourth symbol for the second special figure may be collectively referred to as a “fourth symbol”, and the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special figure and the fourth symbol The second symbol display area 905B may be collectively referred to as a “fourth symbol display area”.

  In the variable display (variable display) of the fourth symbol, the fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B are displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special figure is white and the fourth symbol display area 905A is the second special figure). The four symbol display area 905B is realized by continuing a blinking state in which light (display) and light-off (non-display) are repeated at predetermined time intervals in black). The variable display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special figure in the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special figure are synchronized. The variable display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special figure in the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special figure. Synchronous means that the variable display starts and ends at the same time and the variable display period is the same.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. Will remain. Note that the display color may be changed according to the type of big hit. In addition, when the out-of-position symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first to-be-specified symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the out-of-position. Will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special map is stopped (derived) in the fourth symbol display area 905A.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B, the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. Will remain. Note that the display color may be changed according to the type of big hit. Also, when the out-of-position symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B, the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second to-be-specified symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the out-of-position. Will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special map is stopped (derived) in the fourth symbol display area 905B.

  In the display area of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a hold storage display for variably displaying the hold number (special figure hold storage number) is displayed. Here, the suspension of the variable display occurs when the game ball enters (starts winning) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A or the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B. I do. That is, a start condition (also referred to as an “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. Due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit game state, when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 905H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the starting condition is first satisfied based on the occurrence of the start winning. I have. Then, when the starting condition (first starting condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A is established based on the game ball entering the first starting winning opening, non-display is performed. One of the display parts in the mode (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part of the display part in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. Also, when the starting condition (second starting condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B is established based on the game ball entering the second starting winning opening, the non-display is performed. One of the display portions in the mode is changed to red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure (first start condition) and the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure (second start condition) is satisfied, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed, and the display at each display part is moved one by one to the left. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the rightmost display part of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

  That is, when a start winning is generated, the holding information (an object indicated by a circle in FIGS. 16 and 46 and the like) corresponding to the special figure game executed based on the starting winning is stored in the start winning storage display area 905H. Newly displayed display control is performed. For example, the hold information is displayed in order from the left in accordance with the order in which the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the hold information is satisfied (in the above example, the start condition is also satisfied). When a new start winning is generated when n pieces of the hold information are displayed (when n special figure games are held), the (n + 1) th hold information from the left corresponding to the new start win Is newly displayed. Then, when the start condition of the reserved special figure game is satisfied, the leftmost reservation information corresponding to the special figure game is deleted, and the n-th (n ≧ 2) reservation information from the left is left one by one. To be displayed on the (n-1) th display.

  Note that the order in which the start conditions of the special figure game are satisfied is not limited to the order in which the start conditions are generated. The priority may be established (so-called special figure 2 priority change). On the contrary, the start condition of the special figure game relating to the first special figure is established in preference to the start condition of the special figure game relating to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority change). It may be.

  Note that, in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a number indicating the special figure reserved storage number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved storage number. In addition to or instead of the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved storages may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the first holding for displaying the number of special figure reserved storages in the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the start winning storage display area 905H. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold display 9025A identifiably displays the first hold storage number as the number of effective start winning balls that has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. The second reserve display 9025B identifiably displays the second reserve storage number as the number of valid start prize balls that have entered the second start prize hole formed by the normal variable prize ball device 906B. Each of the first hold display 9025A and the second hold display 9025B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit (for example, “4”) in each of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number. It is comprised including. On the right side of the image display device 905, a movable accessory 1000 is provided.

  The movable accessory 901000 has a built-in motor and lamp for operating a star-shaped member. The movable accessory 901000 operates (rotational operation and lighting) when an effect for notifying a big hit, for example, a fluctuation result notice effect or a prefetch notice effect described later is executed.

  Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning prize ball device 906A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. An ordinary variable winning prize ball device 906B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a normal open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 9027 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-type accessory (normally an electric accessory) is provided to form a second starting winning opening. As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the game sphere does not enter or enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball enters the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9027 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state. It becomes easy to expand and open.

  A game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first starting port switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first starting port switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved storage number becomes a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). If not, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved storage number becomes a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). If not, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of a game ball by the first starting port switch 9022A, and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of a game ball by the second starting port switch 9022B May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable prize ball device 907 includes a special prize opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 9028 serving as a special prize opening door shown in FIG. 17, and the large prize opening door changes between an open state and a closed state by the large prize opening door. Form a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the special winning opening door is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening. A game ball that has entered the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 907 is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied in this manner, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit game state. When the start condition for starting the figure game is not satisfied, the variable display is suspended. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first hold storage is performed. The number is incremented by one, and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second hold storage is performed. The number is incremented by one, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure starts, the first reserved storage number is decremented by one (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure starts. In this case, the second reserved storage number is decremented by one (decrement). Note that the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number may be referred to as “total reserved storage number” or “special figure reserved storage number”.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 16), a normal symbol display 9020 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display device 9020 is configured by a 7-segment or dot matrix LED or the like like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is variably displayed (variably displayed). Such a variable display of ordinary symbols is called an ordinary game (also referred to as a “normal game”). The normal symbol display 9020 variably displays a plurality of types of normal symbols including, for example, numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. Note that the normal symbol display 9020 is not limited to those that variably display numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like as ordinary symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting decorative lamps (or LEDs) shown, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as "left", "middle", and "right" in a predetermined order. It may be something. Above the normal symbol display 9020, there is provided a general symbol hold display 9025C. The general-purpose reserve indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose reserve storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gates 9041A and 9041B.

  On the surface of the game board 902, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. Further, as the winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening, for example, there are four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D which are always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. A winning area is provided.

  The general winning openings 9050A to 9050D are configured by ball receiving members protruding forward (toward the player) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above from the opening, and the horizontal length (width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter of one game ball, but the game ball 2 It is smaller than the diameter of an individual. Therefore, two or more game balls are prevented from continuing in the horizontal direction and passing through the opening of the ball receiving member. The interval between the ball receiving members provided with the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D is an interval at which at least one or more game balls can pass. In addition, a prize ball device for switching the opening and closing of the openings of the general prize ports 9050A to 9050D (for example, an accessory corresponding to an ordinary variable prize ball device 906B for switching the opening and closing of the second starting prize port) is provided. And is always open. Further, even if a game ball wins in the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, neither the start condition of the variable display of the special figure game nor the start condition of the variable display of the ordinary figure game are established based on the winning.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are given as a specific value to the player based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a game ball is won in the winning opening, a variable winning ball device, for example, an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B for controlling opening and closing of the second starting winning opening, and a special variable for controlling opening and closing of a large winning opening. Activating the prize ball device 907 to make it easier for game balls to be won in the second start winning port or the large winning port may be a specific value given by the game ball winning in the general winning port.

  In addition, the specific value given to the player may be made different depending on the general winning opening. For example, when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C, 5 When a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, ten award balls are awarded (that is, a specific value having a different size is obtained). (Given). The specific value given when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is a predetermined number of winning balls, but the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening. When a game ball wins at 9050D, the normal variable winning ball device 906B and the special variable winning ball device 907 may be activated (that is, different types of specific values are given).

  Further, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, for example, the prize ball in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening Is provided, and when the variable winning prize ball device operates according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (that is, when the type of the specific value is different), different effects are executed. Is also good. In addition, there are a case where ten prize balls are awarded in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a general winning opening and a case where five prize balls are awarded in accordance with a prize of a game ball in a general winning opening. A different effect may be executed (that is, when the magnitude of the specific value is different).

  As shown in FIG. 17, the first general prize port 9050A, the second general prize port 9050B, the third general prize port 9050C, and the fourth general prize port 9050D, as shown in FIG. The mouth switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D are detected. When a game ball is detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is detected. Is paid out as a prize ball.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the winning opening switches corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D are provided, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the game balls enter the general winning opening. Not only that the game ball has won, but also which general winning opening the game ball has won can be detected.

  In addition, not limited to the configuration in which a different general winning opening switch is provided for each general winning opening, a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that a general winning opening provided in the left game area 9010A has been won) is provided for the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B. A common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that a general winning opening provided in the right game area 9010B has been won) is provided for the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It may be. Further, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that one of the general winning openings has been won) is provided for all the general winning openings of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It may be made to be possible.

  At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports. The game balls taken into the out mouth are collected by the game island via a ball collection passage (not shown) communicating with the out mouth. The game balls that have won each of the winning openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings) are collected through a winning ball collecting gutter (not shown), and the balls are collected. It is to be collected on the game island via the collection passage. An out ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball collection passage. As a result, in the out ball detector, the game ball hit into the game area 9010 (the game ball guided to the out port without winning any of the winning ports, and the winning ball set by winning in one of the winning ports) Game balls collected in gutter) Detects all game balls. Each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 9012, so that the effect control CPU 90120 counts the number of game balls hit into the game area 9010, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. In the case where the out-ball detector is provided with a counter whose value increases by one each time a game ball is detected, the effect control is performed every time the counter value increases by a certain number (for example, 10). The number-of-outs signal may be output to the substrate 9012 so that the CPU 90120 for effect control can count the number of outs in a fixed number unit (for example, 10 units).

  Loudspeakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a gaming effect lamp 909 is provided around the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal prize ball device 906A, the normal variable prize ball device 906B, the special variable prize ball device 907, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 903a, an upper plate 9060 for holding (reserving) game balls paid out as prize balls or game balls rented by a predetermined ball lending machine so that the balls can be supplied to the hit ball launching device. Is provided. For example, at a predetermined position on the upper side of the upper plate 9060 on the near side, an operation button 9030 that can be operated by a player by a pressing operation or the like is installed.

  A keyhole 9061 is provided on the right side of the upper plate 9060. The store clerk inserts the key into the keyhole 9061 to open the locking device (not shown), and uses the hinge mechanism to attach the glass door frame 903a to the game machine frame 903. It can be opened and closed. With the glass door frame 903a opened forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, maintenance of the game board (gauge board including a game nail and a winning opening) 902 (for example, measures to eliminate clogging), The user can operate a mode changeover switch 9031 and a display changeover switch 9032 described later.

  Immediately below the upper plate 9060, a lower plate 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper plate 9060 is provided, and at the lower right of the upper plate 9060, a game ball as a game medium is directed to the game area. A hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 9063 operated by a player or the like for shooting is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle 9063 adjusts the resilience of a game ball in accordance with the operation amount (rotation amount) of a player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping driving of a firing motor provided in the hit ball firing device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  The operation button 9030 is a jog dial that can be pressed and turned. Note that the operation button 9030 is not limited to a button that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a button that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or a tilting switch, such as a lever switch. It may be one that can be operated, or one that can be pressed and tilted, such as a joystick. Instead of the operation button 9030, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 9030 may be configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation performed on the operation button 9030 includes a press detection switch (not shown) for detecting the press of the operation button 9030 and a rotary encoder (not shown) for detecting the rotation direction and the rotation amount of the operation button (jog dial) 9030. (Not shown).

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a game ball passing through a first pass gate 9041A provided in a left game area 9010A and a second pass gate 9041B provided in a right game area 9010B is moved to a first pass gate 9041A shown in FIG. The general symbol starting condition for executing the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 9020, such as detection by the corresponding first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B corresponding to the second passage gate 9041B, is as follows. After the establishment, the ordinary symbol display device 9020 starts the ordinary symbol game based on the establishment of the ordinary symbol starting condition for starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol, for example, the end of the previous ordinary symbol game. You.

  In the ordinary symbol game, after a variation of the ordinary symbol is started, when a predetermined time that is the ordinary symbol variation time elapses, the fixed ordinary symbol that is a variable display result of the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a fixed symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the numeral indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed symbol, the variable display result of the symbol is “Loss”. Become. In response to the result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol being “per-figure”, an enlarged opening control (tilt control) in which the movable wing of the electric tulip constituting the ordinary variable prize ball device 906B is at the inclined position is performed. After a lapse of a predetermined time, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  The special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A is performed when the game ball which has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning prize ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the processing is started based on the first start condition being satisfied, for example, by ending the previous special map game or big hitting game state. In the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B, the game ball which has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting port switch 9022B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is established, the process is started based on the second start condition being established due to, for example, the end of the last special figure game or big hit game state.

  In a special figure game using the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, after a special symbol variable display is started, a special symbol variable display result is displayed when a predetermined time that is a special symbol variation time elapses. The derived special symbol (special figure display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, the result is a "big hit" as a specific display result. If a special symbol (outlier symbol) other than the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, "losing" is displayed. ". The specific special symbol (big hit symbol) as the fixed special symbol is different depending on the type of the big hit, and for example, the fixed special symbol differs between the probable big hit and the non-probable variable big hit. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to a big hit gaming state as a specific state in which a round game (simply, "round") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the big hit game state controlled after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable prize ball device 907 has a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) as the first period or a predetermined number. By opening the special winning opening in a period until nine (for example, nine) winning balls are generated, a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player is executed. You. The open / close plate having the special winning opening opened during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 902, and thereafter closes the special winning opening, thereby providing a special variable winning ball device. 907 is changed to the second state disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is ended. In the big hit state, the number of executions of the round game which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening is, for example, 15 times. Note that a plurality of types of big hit types having different numbers of round game executions may be provided.

  After the end of the big hit state, as one of the advantageous states advantageous to the player, a time reduction control for reducing the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game as compared with the normal state is executed. This is controlled to a time-saving state in which the probability variation control (probable variation control) is performed together with the time reduction control.

  Here, the normal state is a specific state such as a big hit game state, a time saving state, or a normal state as a game state different from the probability change state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, when a system reset is performed). (The state in which the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on). On the other hand, the time saving state is when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and when the variable display result is “big hit”, one of the conditions is satisfied first. Then, the process may be terminated. In the probable change state, in the variable display of each special figure game or decoration symbol, the variable display result becomes “big hit” and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than the normal state or the time saving state. improves. Such a probable change state continues until the variable display result next becomes “big hit” or a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) of the special figure game is executed.

  The big hit (type) controlled to the certainty changing state after the big hitting game state ends is also referred to as “the certainty big hit”. A big hit (type) that is controlled to the time saving state without being controlled to the probable change state after the big hit game state ends is also referred to as “non-probable change big hit”.

  In the probable change state or the time saving state, control is performed by the normal symbol display 9020 to shorten the fluctuation time (normal fluctuation time) of the normal symbol in the ordinary symbol game, or the variable of the ordinary symbol in each ordinary game is performed. Control to increase the probability that the display result is "per-figure" as compared to the normal state, and tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable prize ball device 906B based on the fact that the variable display result is "per-figure". And the control to increase the number of times of tilting than in the normal state, such as a control to increase the number of times of tilting compared to the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player by increasing the possibility of establishment is performed. In the probable change state or the time saving state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that is advantageous to the player by making it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the enlarged opening state is increased as compared to when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the special figure game can be frequently executed. The time required for the variable display result to become a "big hit" is reduced. Therefore, in the probable change state or the time saving state, it is easy to be in the big hit game state as compared with the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the positive change state or the time saving state. The state in which the high opening control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the high opening control is not executed is also called a low base state.

  In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided on the image display device 905, a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display apparatus 904A is provided. In response to the start of any special figure game among the special figure games using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol in the “left”, “medium”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. In such a case, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state is a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the big hit combination (“reach variation symbol”). ) Is a display state in which the fluctuation is continuing, or a display state in which all or a part of the decorative symbols fluctuate synchronously while forming all or a part of the big hit combination. Specifically, some of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” (for example, the decorative pattern display areas 905L and 905R of “left” and “right”) are previously set. When a decorative symbol (for example, a decorative symbol indicating an alphanumeric character of "7") constituting a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, "medium" decoration) which has not been stopped and displayed yet. In the symbol display area 905C or the like), the decorative pattern is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. This is a display state in which all or a part of the combination is changed and synchronized.

  In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuating speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (a performance image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the decorative symbol, or changing the variation mode of the decorative symbol, a rendering operation different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as the change of the display mode of the character image or the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, or the change of the change mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as “reach effect display” (or simply, reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R and the lighting operation (flashing operation) of the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 909 are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. In each reach mode, the possibility of "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability") is different. That is, the possibility that the variable display result is a "big hit" can be varied depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. Then, when the reach mode of the super reach appears, the possibility (variable hit reliability) of the variable display result to be "big hit" is higher than when the reach mode of the normal reach appears.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state and the variable display result may be "big hit". In some cases, a variable display effect for notifying a player is performed in a variable display mode of a symbol or the like. In this embodiment, a variable display effect such as “pseudo-run” or “slip” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a variation pattern being determined on the main substrate 9011 side. Is determined.

  During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the variable display effect such as “pseudo ream” or “slip”, for example, a decorative image such as displaying an effect image such as a predetermined character image or a message image is used. Inform the player that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state and the variable display result may be a "big hit" due to an effect operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect for performing the operation may be executed.

  When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed from the reach state to the predetermined state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. May be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “reach-free loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in a special figure game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or without the reach effect, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach-loss combination”) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the variable display result is “losing”. In addition, the fixed decorative pattern which is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative pattern which is a reach loss combination are also collectively referred to as a fixed decorative pattern of a loss combination (non-specific combination).

  When a special symbol that is a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. At a later time, for example, the fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the determined decorative symbol to be the big hit combination is, for example, the symbol number variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905. Any one of the decorative symbols "" to "8" is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "medium", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Anything can be used.

  In addition, after the decoration pattern which is a big hit combination is derived and displayed, during the execution of the round in the big hit game state, a look-ahead for notifying / notifying that the reserved data whose special figure display result is "big hit" is stored. A notice effect may be executed.

  As described above, the game area 9010 is composed of the left game area 9010A and the right game area 9010B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the hit ball operation handle (operation knob), thereby obtaining the left game area 9010A. , And a right-handed game ball to be shot toward the right game area 9010B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when a game ball is fired in the left game area 9010A (when a game ball enters the left game area 9010A), the right game area is arranged by disposing a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). A game ball wins in the first winning opening at a higher rate than when the game ball is fired on 9010B. Also, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation time of the ordinary symbol (the ordinary symbol variation time) is longer than when the gaming state is the probable variation state and the time saving state, and the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". The probability that the game ball fired in the left gaming area 9010A in the normal state wins in the second starting winning opening is extremely lower than the ratio of winning in the first starting winning opening in the normal state. I have.

  On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 901, when a game ball is fired in the right game area 9010B (when a game ball enters the right game area 9010B), the game nail or the game ball guiding member (not shown) is placed on the left. Compared with the case where a game ball is fired in the game area 9010A, the rate at which the game ball wins in the first start winning opening is extremely low, or the game ball does not win in the first start winning opening. I have. Therefore, even if the player hits right in the normal state, the ratio of the game balls winning in the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is determined to be left in the normal state. Sometimes, the ratio is extremely low as compared with the rate at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, the player performs left-handing in the normal state.

  In addition, the ratio of game balls fired to the right game area 9010B passing through the second passage gate 9041B depends on the arrangement of game nails or game ball guide members (not shown). It is higher than the ratio of passing through one pass gate 9041A. The rate at which the game balls fired in the right game area 9010B win the second start winning opening in the open state depends on the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), and the game fired in the left game area 9010A. It is higher than the ratio of the ball winning the second start winning opening in the open state.

  Then, in the probable change state and the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol fluctuation time) is shorter than in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary map" is higher than in the ordinary state. Therefore, when a right-handed shot is made in the probable state and the time saving state, the rate at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is equal to the left in the probable state and the time saving state. When the ball is hit, the game ball is higher than the winning ratio in the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, the player makes a right strike in the probable change state and the time saving state.

  In addition, the ratio of the game balls fired in the right game area 9010B to the large winning opening in the open state depends on the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown) in the game balls fired in the left game area 9010A. It is higher than the rate of winning the open big winning opening. Therefore, the player makes a right strike in the big hit game state. In this manner, the player makes a left-handed hit in the normal state, switches to a right-handed hit with the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, continues a right-handed hit in the probable change state or the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and returns to the normal state. With the transition (for example, the end of the probable change state or the time saving state without the jackpot game state), the player returns to left-handed.

  In addition, the rate at which game balls fired in the left gaming area 9010A win the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left gaming area 9010A is determined by the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050A. Depending on the position where the general winning opening 9050B is provided, and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), a game ball fired in the right game area 9010B may have the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening. It is higher than the ratio of winning the 9050B. On the other hand, the ratio of game balls fired in the right game area 9010B to the third general prize port 9050C or the fourth general prize port 9050D provided in the right game area 9010B is the third general prize port 9050C and the fourth general prize port 9050C. Depending on the position where the general winning opening 9050D is provided, and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), a game ball fired in the left game area 9010A may have the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening. It is higher than the ratio of winning the 9050D.

  In addition, with respect to a part or all of a plurality of general winning ports (first general winning port 9050A and second general winning port 9050B) provided in the left gaming area 9010A, only gaming balls fired in the left gaming area 9010A are provided. It is possible to have a configuration in which a prize can be won and the game ball fired in the right game area 9010B does not win, and a plurality of general prize ports (third general prize port 9050C and fourth general prize port) provided in the right game area 9010B. For some or all of 9050D), only the game balls fired in the right game area 9010B can win, and the game balls fired in the left game area 9010C may not win.

  In this manner, in the normal state, a left hit is performed. Therefore, the probability that the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B among the four general winning openings is high, and the big hit gaming state and In the probable change state and the time saving state, a right-handed shot is performed, so that there is a high probability that the game ball will win the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D among the four general winning openings. As the game area in which the game ball is fired changes according to the game state and the like, the general winning opening in which the game ball easily wins also changes. In the left game area 9010A where the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball can easily win, and the right game where the game ball enters in the big hit game state, the probable change state and the time saving state. In the area 9010B, the frequency of winning in the general winning opening may be changed according to the gaming state, such as providing a general winning opening in a position where a game ball is unlikely to win (or vice versa).

  Various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a sound control board 9013, and a sound lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 17 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901. The pachinko gaming machine 901 also has a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on a back surface of the game board 902 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The payout control board is a board for controlling the payout of award balls, and has a payout control microcomputer mounted thereon. The payout control board includes a ball payout device (not shown) or the like in response to receiving a winning ball number command in which data indicating the number of winning balls is set (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 9011). Then, a payout mechanism (a mechanism for paying out prize balls) is driven to execute payout of prize balls.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a function of setting random numbers used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 9012 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. The main board 9011 controls the lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the ordinary symbol display 9020, etc. It also has a control function. The main board 9011 includes, for example, a microcomputer 90100 for game control, a switch circuit 90110 for receiving detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmitting the signals to the microcomputer 90100 for game control, and a microcomputer 90100 for game control. A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9027 and 9028 is mounted.

  Also, the switch circuit 90110 takes in a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 (which will be described in detail later) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 90100. As will be described in detail later, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is for detecting an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and displays an image display device 905, speakers 908 L, 908 R. In addition, various circuits for controlling an effect operation by an effect electric component such as a game effect lamp 909 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 performs effects such as all or part of the display operation on the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or part of the on / off operation of the game effect lamp 909 and the like. Function for determining the control content for causing the electrical component for execution to perform a predetermined effect operation.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sounds from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. And a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing for the purpose. The sound lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control which is provided separately from the effect control board 9012. A lamp driver circuit for turning off the light is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the main board 9011 has a first gate switch 9021A, a second gate switch 9021B, a first starting port switch 9022A, a second starting port switch 9022B, a count switch 9023, and a first general winning opening switch 9024A. Wirings for transmitting detection signals from the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D are connected.

  Note that the first gate switch 9021A, the second gate switch 9021B, the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D are, for example, What is necessary is just a thing which has arbitrary composition which can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as what is called a "sensor". The main board 9011 also has a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display device 9020, a first reservation display device 9025A, a second reservation display device 9025B, and a general diagram reservation display 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as display control is connected. Further, a wiring for transmitting a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is connected to the main board 9011.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The main board 9011 is provided with, for example, a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 9015, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 90100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in a direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015, and blocks input of a signal from the relay board 9015 to the main board 9011. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the effect control board 9012 or the relay board 9015 to the main board 9011.

  The relay board 9015 may be provided with a transmission direction regulating circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example. Each transmission direction regulating circuit has a diode in which the anode is connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 9011 and the cathode is connected to the effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 9012, and one end is connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor whose other end is connected to ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction restriction circuit can block the input of a signal from the effect control board 9012 to the relay board 9015, and can pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the effect control board 9012 side to the main board 9011 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal on the relay board 9015, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 90100 and the main board side connector on the main board 9011. Is provided, it is possible to prevent input of an unauthorized signal to the main substrate 9011 from outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 905, a voice control command used to control audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. And a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  Such effect control commands include, for example, a game state designation command for designating a game state (normal state, probable change state, or time saving state), a change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game, and a special change in a special figure game. A variable pattern designation command for designating a variation time of a symbol and a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol on the image display device 905, a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol, and a decorative symbol on the image display device 905. The decorative ball stop command for specifying the variable display stop, the big hit start specifying command for specifying the start or end of the big hit gaming state, the big hit end specifying command, and the game ball has won the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Start-up winning command output when a game ball wins a general winning opening般入 Award ports specified command, the game ball in the special winning opening includes a special winning opening winning command or the like to be output when the prize.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 that stores a game control program and fixed data, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 for executing a game control program and performing a control operation, and updating numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 90103 It comprises a random number circuit 90104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90101, reads the fixed data, the CPU 90103 writes the variable data in the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the CPU 90103 reads the variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, the CPU 90103 sends the signal to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 90101 to perform the game control. Specifically, “performing processing” means that the CPU 90103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 9011.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 90120. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 90120 A circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 90121, and thereby a process for controlling the effect operation by the electric components for effect is executed. At this time, effect control CPU 90120 reads fixed data from ROM 90121, fixed data read operation, effect control CPU 90120 writes variable data in RAM 90122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and effect control CPU 90120 stores data in RAM 90122. A variation data reading operation for reading various variation data temporarily stored, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from outside the effect control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and an effect control CPU 90120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the O90125 is also performed.

  The effect control board 9012 includes a wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, a wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the audio control board 9013, Wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the audio lamp control board 9014, wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable accessory 901000, and the like are connected. Further, on the effect control board 9012, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the operation button 9030 has been detected is transmitted from a press detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Further, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 described later, and operation of the display changeover switch 9032 described later are provided. Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position of the unit (first position or second position) is also connected.

  The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 includes an image display device 905, speakers 908L and 908R, a light-emitting element such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decoration LED, operation buttons 9030, a movable accessory 901000, and an effect accessory. A plurality of types of pattern data constituting an effect control pattern are stored in advance in order to control an effect operation using an effect device (electrical component for effect) including a movable member or the like included in the device.

  The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. For example, the display control unit 90123 performs various effect displays such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect displays in a reach effect by determining switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. Control. The display control unit 90123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 confirms, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like, the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the state of the mode changeover switch 9031. Including an input port for taking in various signals such as a signal to enable and a signal to enable the state of the display changeover switch 9032 to be checked, and an output port to transmit various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 Be composed. For example, from an output port of the I / O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, a command transmitted to the audio control board 9013 (sound effect signal), and an audio lamp control board 9014 are transmitted. A command (drive signal) or the like transmitted to movable movable object 901000, which outputs a command (illumination signal) and the like, is output.

  The audio control board 9013 includes, for example, an input / output driver, an IC for audio synthesis, an audio data ROM, an amplifier circuit, and a volume. As an example, in the voice control board 9013, the sound number data indicated by the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesizing IC generates a voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs the generated voice or sound effect to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs to the speakers 908L and 908R an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the audio synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesizing IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate a sound or a sound effect. The storage data of the audio data ROM may be constituted by data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in a time-series manner.

  The audio lamp control board 9014 includes, for example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver. As an example, in the audio lamp control board 9014, the illumination signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the illumination signal and supplies it to the gaming effect lamp 909 and the like.

  In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the occurrence of the abnormality is controlled by controlling the speakers 908 </ b> L and 908 </ b> R via the sound control board 9013 to notify the sound by a sound, or the sound lamp control board 9014. Control of the lighting / extinguishing operation of the game effect lamp 909, the decoration LED, and the like via the CPU and informing by light, or an abnormality notification image (error message) in the display area of the image display device 905 via the display control unit 90123 Is displayed to notify the user. The abnormality includes a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, and the like, and is detected by using the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 and the like.

  The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 includes one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is not limited to a sensor, and may include a circuit for detecting an abnormality, various detection switches not corresponding to the sensor, and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 only needs to be configured to detect an abnormality. One or more sensors are included in each of the abnormality detection sensor groups 9026 according to the type of abnormality. What the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 specifically includes may be determined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like. The abnormality that occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a phenomenon that does not occur or is unlikely to occur in a normal game performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, a magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, And phenomena such as radio wave abnormalities) and phenomena that may hinder the progress of the game, and in particular refers to phenomena that require notification to players and employees of gaming halls (such as pachinko parlors).

  The sensors included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 include, for example, a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, a radio wave detection sensor that detects a predetermined radio wave (a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band, and the like). For example, these sensors and the like may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. It should be noted that a known method can be appropriately used for detecting an abnormality. When the game control microcomputer 90100 detects a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, and the like based on an output signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that an abnormality has occurred is sent to the main board. 9011 to the effect control board 9012 to display an error message on the image display device 905, output a warning sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, and determine that an abnormality has occurred due to a light emission mode when an abnormality occurs in the game effect lamp 909. Notification is performed. For example, when an abnormality has occurred, as shown in FIG. 58 (f), an image of the text “An error has occurred” is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905.

  Here, not only the occurrence of the abnormality, but also any of the magnetic abnormality, the vibration abnormality, the radio wave abnormality, and the opening of the front door by the notification means such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909. May be notified so as to be able to specify whether or not the abnormality is detected.

  The notification of the magnetic abnormality is a notification of an abnormality performed when a magnetic abnormality (an abnormality in which the magnet is near the pachinko gaming machine 901; in this case, there is a possibility of a fraud) is detected. There is a fraudulent act of moving a game medium by means of a magnet to make a winning opening or to fill a predetermined area with the game medium in order to guide the game medium to the winning opening. The notification of the magnetic anomaly prevents such an action from being performed. For example, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided as one sensor of the sensor group 9026 for abnormality detection. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not a signal from the magnetic sensor indicates a magnetic force equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, thereby determining whether or not there is a magnetic abnormality (indicating the magnetic force → presence of magnetic abnormality). When a magnetic abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command designating that the magnetic abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the image display device 905 or the like notifies the magnetic abnormality. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of the text "Magnetic error has occurred" is displayed.

  The notification of the vibration abnormality is, for example, a notification of an abnormality that can be executed in a pachinko game machine or the like provided with the special variable winning ball device 907. There is a fraudulent act of intentionally shaking a pachinko gaming machine to change the flowing direction of a game medium toward a winning port such as a large winning port. The notification of the vibration abnormality prevents such an action from being performed. For example, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided as one sensor of the sensor group 9026 for abnormality detection. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration having a strength equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, thereby determining whether there is an abnormality due to vibration (abnormality of vibration). This indicates that the vibration is abnormal. When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command designating the occurrence of the vibration abnormality is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the image display device 905 or the like notifies the vibration abnormality. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image with the text “Vibration error has occurred” is displayed.

  The notification of the radio wave abnormality is a notification of an abnormality performed when a radio wave abnormality (an abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko gaming machine 901, in this case, there is a possibility that there is a fraud) is detected. By radiating radio waves to the starting port switches (the first starting port switch 9022A and the second starting port switch 9022B), the count switch 9023, etc., these switches are turned on / off, etc. There is cheating to gain. Such notification is prevented from being performed by notification of the radio wave abnormality. For example, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band) is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not the signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates the reception of the predetermined radio wave, thereby determining the presence or absence of the radio wave abnormality (indicating the reception of the predetermined radio wave → presence of the radio wave abnormality). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command designating the occurrence of the radio wave abnormality is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the image display device 905 or the like notifies the radio wave abnormality. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of the text "A radio wave error has occurred."

  Each of the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 is configured by a DIP switch (Dual In-line Package switch), and is provided outside the game area of the game board 902. The mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 formed by DIP switches can be operated by switching the operation unit between a first position and a second position (for example, in the case of a slide type, the position of a knob is changed to one end and the other end). By switching to the side, the process (control program) executed by the effect control CPU 90120 can be switched. When the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, the player cannot operate the mode change switch 9031 and the display change switch 9032 because the glass door frame 903a covers the front of the game board 902. It has become. Note that, when the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 903 (the state shown in FIG. 16), the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are operated by the player via the glass door frame 903a. It is not shown in FIG. 16 because it is installed at a position where it cannot be viewed.

  As described above, the clerk of the game arcade inserts the key into the keyhole 9061 to open the locking device (not shown), and opens the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, The operation of the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 provided on the game board 902 (switching of the DIP switch) becomes possible. When the operation of the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 is completed, the glass door frame 903a is returned to the closed state with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, and a key is inserted into the keyhole 9061 to lock the device (shown in FIG. Is closed.

  When the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the first position, the voltage of the mode changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 90120 is in a low state. When the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position, the effect control is performed. The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 90120 for use becomes high. When the voltage of the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is at the first position, that is, the information for the player is displayed on the image display device 905 (for example, the demo Screen) is displayed, and the information of the winning number management table described later is not displayed on the image display device 905. On the other hand, when the voltage of the mode switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the second position, that is, the information for the clerk is displayed on the image display device 905 (for example, The maintenance mode for displaying the number of winnings in each winning opening) is specified, and information of a winning number management table described later is displayed on the image display device 905.

  When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 90120 is in a low state, and when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, the effect control is performed. The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 90120 for use becomes high. When the voltage of the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening. By specifying that display permission is not given, it is prohibited to display on the image display device 905 information based on a display control table to be described later (information that can specify the number of winnings to the general winning opening). On the other hand, when the voltage of the display changeover terminal is High, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 905 has a general winning opening. By specifying that the number display is permitted, the image display device 905 is allowed to display information (information that can specify the number of winnings to the general winning opening) based on a display control table described later on the image display device 905. I do.

  In this embodiment, the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are provided on the front side of the game board 902 (the surface facing the player). Alternatively, the game board 902 may be provided on the back side (the game island side). In the case of such a configuration, by using the hinge mechanism of the gaming machine frame 903 to rotate the gaming board 902 forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, the back side of the gaming board 902 is provided. The provided mode changeover switch 9031 and / or display changeover switch 9032 can be operated.

  As a control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, there is a start winning command as described above. The start winning command includes a start winning port designation command indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port has generated a starting winning port, and a command to the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. There are a jackpot determination result designation command indicating a jackpot determination result and a jackpot type determination result when a game ball is won, and the like.

  The CPU 90103 sets an effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When a winning is detected, a big hit determination random number and a big hit type determination random number are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted big hit determination random number and big hit type determination random number are stored in the first special figure random number storage area. The command is stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of retained memories (the first number of retained memories after the addition including the effective start winning), and a command for designating the "first starting winning opening" is set as a starting winning opening designation command. In addition, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probable change state). A start prize determination is performed to determine whether or not the prize is awarded.

  If the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table in the start winning prize determination, a start prize determination result designation command for designating "losing" is set. If the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table, the extracted (stored) big hit type determination random number is further stored in the first special map big hit type determination table for each big hit type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in is stored. Then, a start winning prize determination result designation command for designating the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command that specifies “non-probable variable hit” or a command that specifies “probable variable hit” is set as the start winning determination result specifying command. Then, the set start winning port designation command (“first start winning port” designation) and the start winning time determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 9012.

  In addition, the CPU 90103 starts the game ball into the first start winning port in a state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first start winning port reaches the upper limit value (that is, the first start winning port according to the first start winning port). When a prize ball is paid out but an invalid start prize which is not the target of the special map game is detected, a command for designating the "first start prize port" is set as a start prize port designation command and a start prize judgment result is designated. As a command, blank data designating that it is not a valid start winning is set. Then, the set start winning port designation command (“first start winning port” designation) and the start winning time determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012.

  The CPU 90103 sets the effective start winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When a winning is detected, a random number for jackpot determination and a random number for jackpot type determination are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted random number for jackpot determination and random number for jackpot type determination are stored in the second random number storage area for the second special figure. The command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of retained memories (the second number of retained memories after the addition including the effective start winning), and a command for designating the “second starting winning opening” is set as a starting winning opening designation command. In addition, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probable change state). A start prize determination is performed to determine whether or not the prize is awarded.

  If the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table in the start winning prize determination, a start prize determination result designation command for designating "losing" is set. When the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table, the extracted (stored) big hit type determination random number is further stored in the big hit type determination table for the second special map for each big hit type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in is stored. Then, a start winning prize determination result designation command for designating the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command that specifies “non-probable variable hit” or a command that specifies “probable variable hit” is set as the start winning determination result specifying command. Then, the set start winning port designation command (“second starting winning port” designation) and the start winning time determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 9012.

  In addition, the CPU 90103 starts the game ball into the second start winning port in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second start winning port has reached the upper limit value (that is, according to the second start winning port). When a prize ball is paid out but an invalid start prize which is not the target of the special map game is detected, a command for designating a “second start prize port” is set as a start prize port designation command, and a start prize judgment result is specified. As a command, blank data designating that it is not a valid start winning is set. Then, the set start winning port designation command (“second starting winning port” designation) and the start winning time determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012.

  In this embodiment, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the start winning is determined based on the jackpot determining random number and the jackpot type determining random number extracted at the time of the start winning, and based on the determination result. Although it is arranged to execute the prefetch notice effect, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and based on the random number for fluctuation pattern determination extracted at the time of the start winning, the variable pattern of the variable display corresponding to the start winning is determined, A prefetch notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. For example, when the determination result at the start winning prize is a fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the determination result at the start winning prize is the non-reach fluctuation pattern. Good to do.

  Specifically, when detecting an effective starting winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, the CPU 90103 extracts a variation pattern determining random number from the random number circuit 90104, and outputs the extracted variation pattern determining random number to the big hit determination. Along with the random number and the random number for jackpot type determination, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number (the first retained storage number after addition including the effective start winning) in the first special figure random number storage area. Further, upon detecting an effective start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening, the CPU 90103 extracts a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern from the random number circuit 90104 and replaces the extracted random number for determining a variable pattern with the random number for determining a big hit and the big hit. Along with the type determination random number, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number in the second special figure random number storage area (the second reserved storage number after the addition including the valid start prize).

  Here, in the ROM 90101, a variation pattern for outliers in which a random number range corresponding to each of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 23 (A) is set, and each of the large hit variation patterns shown in FIG. 23 (B). And a large hit variation pattern determination table in which the determined random number range is set.

  If the determination result of the start winning determination (display result specified by the start winning determination result designation command) is “out”, the CPU 90103 refers to the out variation pattern determination table to extract (store). The variation pattern determination random number is determined to be included in the random number range of which variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is identified, and the identified variation pattern is “non-reach out”. , A start winning winning variation pattern determination result designating command which designates which variation pattern is “normal reach loss” or “super reach loss”.

  On the other hand, if the determination result of the start winning determination (display result specified by the start winning determination result specifying command) is one of “non-probable variable big hit” and “probable variable big hit”, the CPU 90103 changes By referring to the pattern determination table, it is determined which variation pattern random number is included in the extracted (stored) variation pattern determination random number, and a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is identified. Then, a start prize variation pattern determination result designation command for designating which variation pattern is the “normal reach big hit” or the “super reach big hit” is set.

  Note that upon detecting an invalid start winning, the CPU 90103 sets blank data designating that it is not a valid start winning as a start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command.

  Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set start winning variation pattern determination result designation command to the effect control board 9012 as a start winning command, together with the above-described start winning opening designation command and start winning decision determination result designation command.

  The effect control CPU 90120 includes a start winning prize opening designation command designating “first start winning prize opening” and a start winning prize judgment result designation command including valid data that is not blank data (and a start including valid data that is not blank data). Upon receiving the prize-winning fluctuation pattern determination result designation command), the start prize-winning determination result designation command (and the start prize variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in the first winning map storage area for the first special figure. The command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage number (the number of the first reserved storage after the addition including the valid start winning), and the start winning port designation command specifying the “second starting winning opening” and the valid data that is not blank data are stored. Start winning prize judgment result specifying command (and start prize fluctuation pattern including valid data other than blank data) When the start winning prize determination command designation command (and the start prize variation pattern determination result designation command) is received, the second reserved storage number (in the start winning prize command storage area for the second special figure) is received. (The number of second reserved storages after the addition including the effective start prize). The effect control CPU 90120 confirms the start winning prize determination result designation command (and the start prize fluctuation pattern determination result designation command) stored in the start prize winning command storage area, and thereby determines whether the first condition is satisfied before the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to estimate a display result (and a fluctuation pattern) of the figure or the second special map and execute a prefetch notice effect.

  On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120 is a start winning opening designation command specifying the "first starting winning opening" and a start winning determination result specifying command including blank data (and a start winning fluctuation pattern determination result specifying command including blank data). Is received, an invalid start prize to the first start prize port is specified, and the start prize time determination result designation command (and the start prize change pattern determination result designation command) is designated for the first special figure. It is possible to store the prize history to the first start prize port in the prize history storage area to be described later without storing it in the start prize command storage area (excluded from the execution target of the prefetch notice effect). Start winning prize opening ”designation command and start prize judgment result designation command including blank data (and start winning including blank data) When the time variation pattern determination result designation command is received, it is specified that an invalid start prize has occurred in the second startup winning opening, and the start prize time determination result designation command (and the start prize variation pattern determination result designation command). ) Is not stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special map (excluded from the execution target of the prefetch notice effect), and the winning history to the second starting winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area described later. Is possible.

  As a control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, there is a variation pattern designation command as described above. As described below, when starting variable display of a special symbol, the main board 9011 determines a variation pattern according to the special figure display result derived and displayed, and notifies the effect control board 9012 of the variation pattern. Output a fluctuation pattern specification command to perform The effect control data corresponding to each variation pattern is stored in the ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012 in advance, and the effect control CPU 90120 controls the effect control corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern designation command. The data is selected, and effect control is executed according to the selected effect control data.

  When the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special figure is executed, the CPU 90103 sets the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the first special figure, In addition, among the random numbers for the variation pattern determination, the random number for the jackpot determination and the random number for the jackpot type determination of the head storage area (the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1), and the random number for the variation pattern determination are read out and thereafter. The random number for big hit determination, the random number for big hit type determination, and the random number for change pattern determination in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, it is started to determine whether or not the read random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probable change state). Perform a time determination.

  If the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table in the start time determination, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command designating “outside” and sets The random number for variation pattern determination read from the first storage area is determined to be included in the random number range of any variation pattern set in the variation pattern determination table for outliers, and the random number for variation pattern determination is determined. By specifying the variation pattern, the “outlier variation pattern” is determined.

  If the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table, the read big hit type determination random number is further stored in the big hit type determination table for the first special map for each big hit type. It is determined which of the judgment values matches. Then, a variable display result notification command designating the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for the change pattern read out from the first storage area together with the random number for the big hit determination is the random number for the big hit. The "big hit variation pattern" is determined by determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table falls within the random number range and identifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

  Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern, together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the first special figure.

  When the second start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the CPU 90103 sets the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the second special figure, In addition, among the random numbers for the variation pattern determination, the random number for the jackpot determination and the random number for the jackpot type determination in the first storage area (the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = 1) and the random number for the variation pattern determination are read out, and the subsequent random numbers are read out. The random number for big hit determination, the random number for big hit type determination, and the random number for change pattern determination in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, it is started to determine whether or not the read random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probable change state). Perform a time determination.

  If the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table in the start time determination, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command designating “outside” and sets The random number for variation pattern determination read from the first storage area is determined to be included in the random number range of any variation pattern set in the variation pattern determination table for outliers, and the random number for variation pattern determination is determined. By specifying the variation pattern, the “outlier variation pattern” is determined.

  If the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table, the read big hit type determination random number is further stored in the big hit type determination table for the second special map for each big hit type. It is determined which of the judgment values matches. Then, a variable display result notification command designating the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for the change pattern read out from the first storage area together with the random number for the big hit determination is the random number for the big hit. The "big hit variation pattern" is determined by determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table falls within the random number range and identifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

  Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern, together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the second special figure.

  When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variation start command, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation start of the first special figure, it selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. At the same time, a determined decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, the variable display of the decoration symbol is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Accordingly, of the start winning prize determination result specifying command (and the start prize fluctuation pattern determination result specifying command) stored in the first special map start prize command storing area, the leading storage area (the number of stored storages) = 1) (and the command for specifying the fluctuation pattern determination result at the time of the start prize) and the subsequent command for specifying the result of the start prize at the time of the storage area (and the prize for the start). The time-varying-pattern-determination-result designation command is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

  Further, effect control CPU 90120 stores the timing of establishing the reach state corresponding to the variation pattern in ROM 90121, and performs decoration so that the reach state is established at the timing of establishment of the reach state corresponding to the received variation pattern designation command. Controls variable display of symbols. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the timing of establishing the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern.

  When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variation start command, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation start of the second special figure, it selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. At the same time, a determined decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, the variable display of the decoration symbol is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Accordingly, of the start winning prize determination result designation command (and the start prize fluctuation pattern determination result designation command) stored in the second special map start prize command storage area, the first storage area (the number of reserved storages) = 1) (and the command for specifying the fluctuation pattern determination result at the time of the start prize) and the subsequent command for specifying the result of the start prize at the time of the storage area (and the prize for the start). The time-varying-pattern-determination-result designation command is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

  When the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D detects that the game ball has won the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the game ball is placed in any of the general winning opening. A general winning opening designation command for designating whether or not has won is output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012. That is, when a game ball is detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A, a general winning opening designation command for designating a winning in the first general winning opening 9050A is output, and the game ball is operated by the second general winning opening switch 9024B. When detected, a general winning opening designation command for designating a winning in the second general winning opening 9050B is output, and when a game ball is detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C, a command is sent to the third general winning opening 9050C. When the game ball is detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, a general winning opening specifying command for designating a winning to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is output. .

  Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening and the general winning opening in which the gaming ball has won based on the received general winning opening specifying command. . Also, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 determines which starting winning opening the gaming ball has won when the gaming ball has won the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. It is designed to receive a mouth designation command. Thereby, the effect control CPU 90120 stores information that can specify the general winning opening in which the prize has occurred and information that can specify the starting winning opening in which the prize has occurred in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122 in accordance with the order in which the prize is generated. It has become possible.

  The effect control CPU 90120 determines which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D the general winning opening specified by the received general winning opening designation command (general winning opening in which the game ball has won). Confirmation is also made to determine whether the starting winning opening (starting winning opening in which the game ball has won) specified by the received starting winning opening designation command is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. The prize history of each general winning opening and each starting winning opening is stored in the RAM 90122. For example, when the game ball wins in the order of the second general winning opening 9050B, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second starting winning opening, and the third general winning opening 9050C, the [2nd general winning opening] Winning opening, first starting winning opening, first general winning opening, second starting winning opening, third general winning opening] are stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122.

  In addition, when the winning in the starting winning opening and the winning in the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 issues a starting winning opening designation command and a start winning judgment determination result designation command. , May be transmitted prior to the general winning opening designation command. For example, detection by one of the first starting port switch 9022A and the second starting port switch 9022B, and detection by one of the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D. When the detection is confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, within the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 90100 changes the start winning opening designation command and the start winning judgment determination result designation command to the general winning opening designation command. It is better to send the message first in priority. By setting the transmission order as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 recognizes that, when the general winning opening designation command is received, the starting winning opening designation command and the start winning judgment determination result designation command have already been received. It is possible, and as a specific effect executed based on the winning in the general winning opening, it becomes possible to execute a pre-reading advance effect based on the start winning time determination result designation command received earlier.

  In the case where a winning in the general winning opening occurs a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits a plurality of general winning opening specifying commands in accordance with a predetermined priority order. I do. For example, when the detection by the first general winning opening switch 9024A and the detection by the second general winning opening switch 9024B are confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, within the same interrupt processing), the microcomputer 90100 for game control Alternatively, a general winning opening designation command for designating a winning in a general winning opening that is more difficult to win may be transmitted first with priority. Further, when the number of prize balls given according to the general winning opening is different, even if the general winning opening designation command for designating the winning to the general winning opening having a larger number of prize balls is transmitted first with priority. Good.

  When the count switch 9023 detects that a game ball has won a special winning opening, a special winning opening winning command designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening is sent from the microcomputer 90100 for game control to the effect control board 9012. Is output to Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening based on the received special winning opening winning command, the winning history to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening described above. Like the history, it is possible to store the winning history for the special winning opening in the winning history storage area.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 is a special winning opening winning command during a period from receiving the big hit start specifying command for specifying the start of the big hit gaming state to receiving the big hit end specifying command for specifying the end of the big hit gaming state. And the number of times of receiving the general winning opening designation command can be separately counted. Thereby, it is possible to separately count the number of winnings to the special winning opening and the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period of being controlled to the big hit gaming state, and to display the totaling result as shown in FIG. 905 can also be displayed.

  In addition, when a game ball is being fired in the game area 9010, the game ball usually wins to any of the starting winning opening, the general winning opening, and the large winning opening at a certain frequency. If the variable display of the decorative symbol has not been executed and the game ball has not won any of the starting winning opening, the general winning opening, and the special winning opening for a predetermined period (for example, one minute), There is a high possibility that the player is in a non-game state in which no game is performed. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and receives the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening winning command for a predetermined period (for example, one minute). When there is no game, it is possible to make a game end determination that determines that the game has ended.

  FIG. 18A is a diagram showing an example of the winning number information managed by the winning number management table stored in the RAM 90122. In the winning number management table, the number of winnings in each of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is stored. The effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of winnings in each general winning opening for each gaming state based on the big hit start specifying command, the big hit end specifying command, the game state specifying command, and the general winning port specifying command. . The game state designation command is a timing at which the game state changes (in this case, the game state designation command designates a game state to be controlled, and is transmitted, for example, at the end of the big hit game state or at the end of the time reduction state). ) Or at the time when the variable display of the special symbol is started (the game state designation command in this case designates the game state when the special figure game is executed).

  In this example, the number of winnings in the second general winning opening 9050B is 50 (total for the entire period), of which 46 is the number of winnings in the normal state, 2 is the number of winnings in the jackpot game state, and 2 is the number of winnings in the probable change state. Is 1 and the winning number in the time reduction state is 1. That is, the number of wins in the left-handed period is 46, and the number of wins in the right-handed period is 4. The total number of winnings in the general winning opening is 108, of which 81 is the winning number in the left-handed period and 27 is the right-handed period.

  As described above, the number of winnings in the left-handed period and the number of winnings in the right-handed period are separately stored together with the number of winnings in each general winning opening, and displayed on the image display device 905 (or the pachinko gaming machine 901). Is transmitted to a game device such as a card unit or a call lamp device provided and displayed on a display device included in the game device, or transmitted to an information management device and displayed on a display device included in the information management device. By doing so, in the game hall, it is possible to grasp the easiness of winning of the game ball to each general winning opening, and to use it for maintenance of the game nail. For example, if the number of game balls winning a certain general winning opening is excessively large or small, it is estimated that bending or breakage has occurred in the gaming nail near the general winning opening, and maintenance of the gaming nail is performed. It can be performed.

  Information on the number of winnings in the winning number management table (number of winnings in each general winning opening, number of winnings in the general winning opening in each game state, number of winnings in the general winning opening in the left and right-handed periods, and information on the general winning opening Is displayed on the image display device 905 when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position (in the case of the maintenance mode), and is displayed in the first position (in the case of the game mode). Do not show. The store clerk of the game arcade switches the mode changeover switch 9031 from the first position to the second position to display the winning number information in the winning number management table, performs maintenance of the gaming nail with reference to the information, and performs general maintenance to the general winning opening. Appropriate winning frequency of game balls. Then, after maintenance is completed, the mode changeover switch 9031 is returned from the second position to the first position.

  In this embodiment, the winning number information in the winning number management table does not depend on the game state (for example, the normal state, the probable change state, the time saving state, the big hit game state), and the execution state of the special figure game (special symbol Whether or not the variable display is executed, the number of stored special figure games), and the execution status of the ordinary figure game (whether or not the variable display of the ordinary symbols is executed, the number of reserved memories of the ordinary figure game) Regardless of this, while the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is at the second position, the image is continuously displayed on the image display device 905. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning number information in the winning number management table may be one that can be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the game state. The operation unit is in the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state. Even if the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position, it is not displayed in the probable change state, the time saving state, or the big hit game state. It may be.

  The winning number information in the winning number management table may be one that can be displayed on the image display device 905 in accordance with the execution state of the special figure game. For example, the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is set to the second position. Even if the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the reserved storage number of the special figure game is zero, the display can be performed only during the period, and even if the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. Alternatively, the display may not be performed during the period in which the special symbol is variably displayed, or during the period in which the number of held special games is not zero. The winning number information of the winning number management table may be one that can be displayed on the image display device 905 in accordance with the execution state of the general-purpose game. For example, the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is set to the second position. It is possible to display only during the period in which the variable display of the normal symbol is not executed and the number of stored symbols of the general symbol game is 0, and the operation unit of the mode switch 9031 is in the second position. Alternatively, the period may not be displayed during the period in which the variable display of the ordinary symbol is being executed or the period in which the number of reserved memories of the ordinary symbol game is not zero.

  The winning number information stored in the winning number management table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 9031, the setting state of the display changeover switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation button 9030 (the setting of FIG. 20 (1) to (3)). Regardless of the setting on the screen), it is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command. Further, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to a game information management device (for example, a not-shown hall computer provided in the game hall) after the business operation of the game hall. Then, in the gaming information management device, the winning number information for each gaming machine is stored for each business day. The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is obtained when the winning history in the above-described winning history storage area is deleted (reset) based on execution of a specific effect corresponding to the winning history storage area. Is not erased, and after the transmission to the game information management device is completed, or after the clerk resets the operation button (for example, the operation button in a state where the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905). 9030).

  For example, the store clerk of the game hall sets the operation button 9030 in a state where the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 (the mode switching switch 9031 is in the second position (display setting)). By pressing the time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the winning numbers of all the items stored in the winning number management table (the winning number of each general winning opening and the total winning number of the general winning opening) can be reset to 0. It is possible.

  FIG. 18B is a diagram illustrating an example of the winning number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 90122. In the display control table, the number of winnings in each of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is stored. The effect control CPU 90120 can count the number of winnings for each general winning opening based on the general winning opening specifying command. In this example, the total number of winnings in the general winning opening is 11, of which 3 is the winning number in the first general winning opening 9050A, 5 is the winning number in the second general winning opening 9050B, and the third general winning opening is The number of winnings in the 9050C is 2 and the number of winnings in the fourth general winning opening 9050D is 1.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the winning number information of the display control table (specifically, the number of objects displayed according to the total winning number) is displayed when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is at the second position (display setting). Is displayed on the image display device 905 when the display setting of the general winning number is performed by the operation button 9030. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is at the first position (in the case of non-display setting), regardless of whether or not the display setting of the general winning number is set by the operation button 9030, a win in the display control table is performed. Numeric information is not displayed (display is prohibited). Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of the display setting), when the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 9030 (in the case of the non-display setting). Does not display the winning number information in the display control table.

  That is, when the store clerk of the amusement arcade sets the display prohibition of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 9032, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed regardless of the display setting operation of the player. I have. Only when the store clerk at the amusement arcade sets the display permission of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 9032, the winning number to the general winning opening is displayed according to the display setting operation of the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, a specific effect (specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect) based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is executed. As for the effect, as shown in FIG. 19, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting), the display setting of the general winning number (execution of the specific effect) is performed by the operation button 9030. Setting) has been performed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is at the first position (in the case of execution non-permission setting), it is determined whether or not the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of the specific effect) is performed by the operation button 9030. No specific effect is executed (execution is prohibited). Even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is at the second position (in the case of execution permission setting), the display setting of the general winning number is not set by the operation button 9030 (in the case of non-execution setting). Does not execute the specific effect.

  That is, when the store clerk at the amusement arcade has set the execution disablement of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 9032, the execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the execution setting operation of the player. Only when the store clerk at the game hall has set the execution permission of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 9032, the specific effect can be executed according to the execution setting operation of the player.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the setting as to whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting as to whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the operating means for setting is also common. (Game side: display changeover switch 9032, player side: operation button 9030). Not limited to such a form, whether to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening and whether to enable execution of the specific effect may be individually settable, and may be set by different operation means. You may.

  The winning number information stored in the display control table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 9031, the setting state of the display changeover switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation button 9030 (the setting of FIG. 20 (1) to (3)). Regardless of the setting on the screen), it is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command. The information on the number of wins stored in the display control table (the number of wins in each general winning opening and the total number of wins) is based on the identification of the winning history in the winning history storage area described above corresponding to the winning history storage area. Even if it is erased (reset) based on the execution of the effect (A or B), it is not erased, and when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the game is over, for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. It is deleted (reset to 0) when the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the big winning port winning command are not received for a predetermined period (for example, one minute).

  When the number of winnings and the total number of winnings for each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game end determination, the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905 is displayed. Is also reset to zero. For example, the coin-shaped object (prize-corresponding display) displayed on the right side of the character “general prize” on the screen of FIG. 21 described later is not displayed, and the number of display objects becomes zero. When the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total winning number stored in the display control table are determined by the game end determination. Is reset to 0 based on the total winning number stored in the display control table at that time when the winning number to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905 next. For example, the number of objects corresponding to the total winning number) is displayed.

  In addition, the store clerk or the player of the game arcade presses the operation button 9030 in a state in which the winning number information of the display control table is displayed on the image display device 905 (a state in which an object corresponding to the total winning number is displayed). By pressing the button for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the winning numbers of all the items stored in the display control table (the winning number of each general winning opening and the total winning of the general winning opening) are determined regardless of the game end determination. ) Can be reset to 0, and accordingly, the winning number information displayed on the image display device 905 is also reset to 0 (all displayed objects are deleted).

  As shown in FIG. 20, the display setting operation of the player is received by operating the operation button 9030 during the display of the demonstration screen not related to the progress of the special figure game and the progress of the general figure game. A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, the variable design of the decorative symbol is not executed, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening winning command are executed for a predetermined period (for example, 1). In a state in which no reception is performed for more than one minute), a demonstration screen is displayed on the image display device 905, and the screen in FIG. 20A is displayed at predetermined intervals during the display of the demonstration screen.

  On the screen of FIG. 20A, a message “Press the determination button for the display setting of the number of general winnings.” Is displayed, an image simulating the operation button 9030 is displayed below the screen, and the operation button 9030 is displayed. An arrow prompting to press is displayed. When the player presses operation button 9030 according to the instruction, a selection screen in FIG. 20 (2) is displayed. On the selection screen, an icon including the character “display” and an icon including the character “not display” are displayed, a message “selection button after selecting by jog dial” is displayed, and further, an operation button 9030 ( An arrow is displayed that prompts the user to press after rotating the jog dial.

  When the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed, an icon including the word “display” is selected by rotating the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the left, and the general winning opening is selected. When not displaying the winning number, the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is rotated to the right to select an icon including the character “not displayed”. In this example, an icon that includes the characters "display" is selected.

  Then, when the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where the icon including the character "display" is selected in FIG. 20 (2), as shown in FIG. 20 (3), "the general winning number is displayed" is displayed. A message is displayed, and the display returns to the normal demonstration screen of FIG. By this setting operation, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 905, and the player can grasp this. Here, it is assumed that the total winning number (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total winning number in FIG. 21) stored in the display control table is immediately displayed when the setting operation is completed. The total winning number is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 905 when the variable display of the special symbol is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game end determination is not performed). You may make it.

  On the other hand, if the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the character “not displayed” is selected in FIG. Return to the normal demo screen. With this setting operation, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 905.

  Here, in this embodiment, only when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is at the second position, that is, at the game arcade side, the winning number information stored in the display control table is displayed on the image display device 905. Only when the display permission is given, a screen for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings at the general winning opening as shown in FIGS. 20 (1) to (3) is displayed on the image display device 905. Shall be displayed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, when the game hall does not permit the image display device 905 to display the winning number information stored in the display control table, As shown in FIGS. 20 (1) to (3), the screen itself for selecting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 described above, it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed only by the non-display setting of the display changeover switch 9032 regardless of the display setting / non-display setting of the player. Is done.

  As described above, it is possible to reflect the intention of a game hall or a player as to whether or not to display the number of winning game balls in the general winning opening. In this embodiment, only when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position) on the game hall side, the player sets whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. It is possible. That is, in this embodiment, the intention of the game hall is given priority over the intention of the player. Therefore, on the amusement arcade side, if the player does not want to know the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 may be set to the first position (non-display position).

  Further, in the case where the intention of the game hall is given priority over the intention of the player, even though the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side ( Regardless of the setting on the player side, it has already been determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed), but the player side as shown in FIGS. When the setting screen is displayed, the player mistakenly recognizes that the player can display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by his / her own setting operation.

  In order to prevent such an erroneous recognition, in this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side (regardless of the setting on the player side), When it is already determined not to display the winning number in the winning opening), the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 20 (1) to (3) is not displayed. That is, the notification itself that “the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed in accordance with the setting operation on the player side” is not performed.

  The display setting on the amusement arcade side (the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position) and the display setting on the player side (the icon including the word “display” on the selection screen of FIG. If it is determined by pressing the operation button 9030 in the selected state) that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is to be displayed, the lower part of the screen of the image display device 905 is displayed as shown in FIG. The character "General prize" is displayed. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D), as shown in FIG. 21B, a coin-shaped object is displayed on the right side of the character of "general winning". (Winning display) is displayed.

  The number of coin-shaped objects displayed on the image display device 905 corresponds to the total winning number in the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 21 (3), every time a game ball wins a general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D), the total number of winnings in the display control table is incremented by one. Accordingly, the number of coin-shaped objects also increases. In addition, the coin-shaped object includes a number “10”, which indicates the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball has won a general winning opening. Therefore, the player can also grasp the number of prize balls awarded in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening. Note that the number of prize balls given when a game ball is won in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening, large winning opening) is stored in the ROM 90121 in advance. And

  In this way, by displaying the object corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and by increasing the number of objects to be displayed in accordance with the increase in the number of winning, the player can enter the general winning opening It is possible to easily grasp that a game ball has won a game ball and the number of game balls won to a general winning opening.

  When the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 90120, as described above, the winning number of the game balls to each general winning opening and the total winning number stored in the display control table are reset to 0. As a result, as shown in FIG. 21 (4), all coin-shaped objects displayed on the right side of the character “general prize” are erased. That is, it is notified that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is 0.

  As described above, when the game end determination is made, that is, when it is specified that the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been notified is reset to zero (general). It is possible to prevent a player who subsequently plays a game with the gaming machine from knowing the number of winnings in the general winning opening by setting a state in which it is displayed that there is no winning in the winning opening). .

  In this embodiment, the condition for determining the end of the game and the condition for shifting to the demo screen described above are set as a common condition, so that the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been notified is 0 when shifting to the demo screen. Will be reset to In this way, when displaying the demonstration screen, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been notified may be reset to zero.

  Note that, as described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). Is set so as not to display the general winning number on the player setting screen (FIG. 20), the display control for increasing the number of objects displayed for each winning in the general winning opening shown in FIG. 21 is not executed. . In these cases, the character itself of “general winning number” shown in FIG. 21 is not displayed, and the coin-type object itself does not matter regardless of the number of winnings in the general winning opening (total winning number in the display control table). Do not show.

  When the number of objects (normal objects) displayed for each winning in the general winning opening is increased, the screen becomes difficult to see as the number of winnings increases. In this case, one special object (for example, an object in a mode different from the normal object including the number “100”) may be displayed instead of the predetermined number of normal objects. Thus, the predetermined number of winnings and the number of prize balls corresponding thereto can be notified in the display area of one special object without requiring the display area of the normal object for the predetermined number.

  Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of displayed objects is increased by one each time one general prize hole is won. The object may be displayed according to the number of winnings. For example, the number of displayed objects may be increased by one every five winnings in the general winning opening.

  In addition, the display setting on the game arcade side (the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position) and the display setting on the player side (including the characters “display” on the selection screen of FIG. 20B). When the operation button 9030 is pressed while the icon is selected), it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is to be displayed, as shown in FIG. In, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed together with the number of winnings in the large winning opening.

  FIG. 22A shows a screen displayed on the image display device 905 when the big hit game state is controlled. When the first round game is started, the characters “General Winning Number” are displayed, and the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the jackpot game state is displayed on the right side thereof, and the “Big Winning Number” is displayed. Is displayed, and on the right side thereof, the number of winnings to the special winning opening in the jackpot gaming state is displayed. In this example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the jackpot gaming state is still 0, and the number of awarding balls awarded when a game ball wins in the general winning opening is 10, so that [0 × 10] Is displayed. In addition, since the number of winnings in the special winning opening in the big hit gaming state is still 0, and the number of awarding balls to be awarded when a game ball wins in the special winning opening is 15, it is displayed as [0 × 15]. Have been. In the big hit gaming state, the number of prize balls [0 × 10] given in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening and the number of prize balls [0 × 15] given in accordance with the winning in the big winning opening. Is displayed as [0 balls in total] because the sum of the numbers is zero.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (2), as a result of performing the first round game, the game ball wins the large winning opening (special variable winning ball device 907) seven times, and the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A). Since the game ball has won one to the fourth general winning opening 9050D), the number of general winnings is 1, and the number of large winnings is updated to 7. In addition, the total number of the prize balls [1 × 10] given in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening and the number of prize balls [7 × 15] given in accordance with the winning in the large winning opening is 115. Therefore, [Total 115 balls] is displayed. It should be noted that the number of prize balls awarded according to the winning in the general winning opening [1 × 10 = 10 balls] and the number of award balls awarded according to the winning in the large winning opening [7 × 15 = 105 balls] May be displayed individually.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (3), as a result of performing the second to fifteenth (final) round games, in the jackpot game state, the game balls are counted in the special winning opening (special variable winning ball device 907). The game prize was won 105 times, and the general prize port (the first general prize port 9050A to the fourth general prize port 9050D) was awarded three times in total, so that the general prize number was 3, and the grand prize number was updated to 105. ing. Also, in the big hit gaming state, the number of prize balls [3 × 10] given according to the winning in the general winning opening, and the number of prize balls [105 × 15] given according to the winning in the big winning opening. Is displayed as [Total 1605 balls] because the sum of the numbers is 1605.

  In this way, by displaying the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the period controlled in the big hit gaming state separately from the number of winnings in the big winning opening, the player can obtain only the number of winnings in the big winning opening. In addition, they will be interested in the number of winnings in the general winning opening. In addition, by displaying the number of prize balls according to the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening and the number of prize balls according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the player can win the prize in the special winning opening. Not only the number of prize balls awarded accordingly, but also the number of award balls awarded in accordance with a prize in the general winning opening is concerned.

  In addition, not only the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the period of being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state may be displayed on the image display device 905, The number of winnings in the general winning opening in the normal state may be displayed on the image display device 905. Further, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the right-hitting period (big hit gaming state, or the probable change state or the time saving state) may be displayed on the image display device 905, and the general winning in the left-hitting period (normal state) may be displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth may be displayed on the image display device 905. In addition, the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure game) may be displayed on the image display device 905.

  Note that, as described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). Is set so as not to display the general winning number on the player setting screen (FIG. 20), the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period of controlling to the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. 22 is displayed. Is not executed. In these cases, the character itself of “General Winning Number” shown in FIG. 22 is not displayed, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the number of prize balls corresponding thereto during the period in which the jackpot game state is controlled. In addition, neither the total number of the prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening nor the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings in the large winning opening is displayed. Only the number of winnings in the large winning opening and the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning number are displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 21, an example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening is displayed on the object, but the image display device 905 displays the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening. It may not be displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 22, an example has been described in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to a general winning opening and the number of prize balls awarded in accordance with a prize in the general winning opening are displayed. These may not be displayed on the device 905.

  As described above, only the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be displayed, and the number of award balls corresponding to the general winning opening or the number of awarding balls awarded according to the winning to the general winning opening may not be displayed. . With such a configuration, when the number of prize balls corresponding to a general winning opening is changed in the process of designing a gaming machine, the display information on the image display device 905 must be changed in accordance with the change. It is possible to prevent the situation from disappearing. Conversely, only the number of prize balls awarded in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game arcade side, the player setting shown in FIGS. An example in which the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not notified that the display / non-display switching of the winning number is possible) is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. 20 (1) to (3) are displayed (the display / non-display switching of the winning number is possible May be notified to the player).

  In such a configuration, even if the player has set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the player setting screen of FIGS. 20 (1) to (3), The effect control CPU 90120 displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 905, based on the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 being set to the first position (non-display position) on the game arcade side. Do not do (prioritize the playground setting). At this time, it may be displayed on the image display device 905 that the winning number cannot be displayed due to the priority of the game hall setting.

  When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen of FIG. Is notified to the player), but the setting operation of the player may be invalidated. For example, even if the operation button 9030 is pressed on the player setting screen of FIG. 20 (1), the screen does not shift to the selection screen of FIG. Whether or not it is possible may not be selectable.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the playground setting is prioritized over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may be prioritized over the gameplace setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is at the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screen shown in FIGS. When the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the word "display" is selected on the selection screen of FIG. If the operation button 9030 is displayed while the icon 905 is displayed on the selection screen of FIG. 20B (display control of FIGS. 21 and 22 is performed) and an icon including the character “not displayed” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. The number of wins to the mouth may not be displayed on the image display device 905 (the display control in FIGS. 21 and 22 is not executed).

  In addition, the game setting and the player setting may be set to the same priority, and it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening according to the order of the received setting operation. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening with priority given to the last set operation (latest setting operation). For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), afterwards, the player wins the general winning opening on the player setting screen of FIGS. 20 (1) to (3). When the number is set to be displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 21 and 22 is executed). Even if the number of winnings to the general winning opening is set not to be displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 20 (1) to (3), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is thereafter moved to the second position. If (display position) is set, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 21 and 22 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is thereafter displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. Is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 21 and 22 is not executed). Also, even if the number of winnings to the general winning opening is set to be displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 20 (1) to (3), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is thereafter moved to the first position. In the case of (non-display position), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 21 and 22 is not executed).

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening is to be displayed on the image display device 905 by operating the display changeover switch 9032 by the clerk of the game arcade. By operating the operation button 9030, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 905. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. By operating the switch 9032, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 905, while the player displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the image display device 905. It may not be possible to set whether or not to display (for example, a setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 20 (1) to (3) is not provided). As described above, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 905 only on the game hall side.

  Conversely, by operating the operation button 9030 by the player (and the clerk of the game hall), it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 905. On the other hand, means for enabling only the game hall to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 905 may not be provided (for example, the display changeover switch 9032 may not be provided). In the case of such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905 by the common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030) by the player and the clerk of the game arcade. It can be set. As described above, the player and the game hall may be able to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation.

  Further, in this embodiment, the prize number information stored in the prize number management table is displayed on the image display device 905. An information display device provided corresponding to the gaming machine 901, for example, a display unit of a card unit provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 or a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 901 to display information. It may be displayed on a device. In addition, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to an information management device (for example, a hall computer) that manages game information of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the information management device transmits a general winning port for each gaming machine. May be stored and displayed on the display device. Note that as a configuration in which the mode changeover switch 9031 is not provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the gaming machine (image display device 905), and the information display device The information may be displayed only on the information management device.

  In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 by setting the mode changeover switch 9031, and is stored in the display control table by setting the display changeover switch 9032. The example in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 905 has been described. In this way, without providing individual switches for controlling the display of each of the winning number management table and the display control table, it is possible to win. A common switch for performing display control of both the number management table and the display control table may be provided. For example, by setting the common switch to the display setting, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table are both displayed on the image display device 905, and the common switch is displayed. May be set to the non-display setting so that neither the winning number information stored in the winning number management table nor the winning number information stored in the display control table is displayed on the image display device 905.

  In FIG. 23 (A), when a special symbol (outlier symbol) other than a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it is determined by the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100). An out-of-place variation pattern is illustrated. FIG. 23B illustrates a big hit variation pattern determined by the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) when a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol. Have been. Since the special figure fluctuation time is determined for each fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 that has received the fluctuation pattern designation command can execute an effect according to the special figure fluctuation time.

  Of the variation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are variation patterns that are non-reach out-of-reach effects, PX003 is a variation pattern that is normal-reach out-of-reach effects, and PX004 is a super-reach out-of-reach effects. It is a fluctuation pattern. Of the big hit variation patterns, PY003 is a variation pattern that is an effect mode of a normal reach jackpot, and PY004 is a variation pattern that is an effect mode of a super reach jackpot. Here, the variation pattern of the super reach is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is executed after the reaching state is established. The normal reach variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is not executed after the reach state is established.

  The battle effect is an effect that indicates whether or not an ally character and an enemy character battle and a win or loss results in a big hit. In PX004, which is a variation pattern of super-reach loss, a defeat effect in which the ally character defeats the enemy character is executed, whereas in PY004, which is a variation pattern of the super-reach jackpot, the ally character wins over the enemy character. An effect is performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120 receives the variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the special figure is executed in the game control microcomputer 90100 as described above. Thereby, when the special display is being variably displayed (before the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed), the specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol of the variable display (that is, the big hit). It is possible to execute a fluctuation result notice effect for notifying that the game state is controlled to a game state).

  In the fluctuation result announcement effect shown in FIG. 24 (a), together with the change announcement effect of the first mode in which only the sound effect in which the sound “Now is a chance!” Is output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the sound effect, A change notice effect of the second mode in which a role effect in which the movable character 901000 operates (rotating operation and lighting) is executed can be executed. Due to such a difference in the effect form, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is satisfied).

  The effect control CPU 90120, based on the random number for announcement effect determination extracted from the random number circuit 90124, when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect A: fluctuation result announcement effect) based on the winning in the general winning opening is satisfied, The mode of the fluctuation result notice effect is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (at the timing when the winning condition based on winning in the general winning opening is established), the mode of the fluctuation result notice effect is determined, and the determined mode is set. , A fluctuation result announcement effect is executed. As will be described later, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the special symbol) is not executed, the execution of the fluctuation result announcement effect is suspended or the fluctuation result announcement effect is stopped. Do not execute.

  For example, if the variable display result specified by the last received variable display result notification command (variable display result of the currently executed variable display) specifies “outside”, the sound effect is generated at a rate of 80%. The change announcement effect of the first mode involving only the sound effect and the accessory effect is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, if the variable display result specified by the last received variable display result notification command (variable display result of the currently executed variable display) specifies "big hit", the sound effect is produced at a rate of 25%. The change announcement effect of the first mode involving only the sound effect and the character effect is executed at a rate of 75%.

  Further, as described above, when an effective start winning in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening occurs in the game controlling microcomputer 90100, the effect controlling CPU 90120 executes the starting winning opening designation command and the start winning winning. Receive the hour judgment result specification command. Thereby, before the special symbol start condition is satisfied, the specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol of the variable display that has not been executed yet (that is, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state). ) Can be executed in advance.

  In the look-ahead notice effect shown in FIG. 24B, only a sound effect in which a sound of “Challenging soon!” Is output from the speakers 908L and 908R is executed, and in addition to the look-ahead notice effect of the first mode and the sound effect, the movable role A second look-ahead notice effect in which a character effect in which the object 901000 operates (rotating operation and lighting) is executed can be executed. Such a difference in the effect form makes it possible to suggest the possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. I have.

  The effect control CPU 90120 reads ahead based on the random number for announcement effect determination extracted from the random number circuit 90124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect B: prefetch advance notice effect) based on the winning in the general winning opening is satisfied. The mode of the notice effect is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (timing when the winning condition based on winning in the general winning opening is established), the mode of the look-ahead notice effect is determined, and in the determined mode. A prefetch notice effect is executed. Note that, as described later, when the number of storages to be held is 0, the execution of the prefetch notice effect is suspended or the prefetch notice effect is not executed.

  For example, when the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area does not include the start prize determination result designation command that specifies "big hit" (all start prize designations that specify "losing") In the case of the time determination result designation command), the look-ahead announcement effect of the first mode with only the voice effect is executed at a rate of 85%, and the second mode with the sound effect and the accessory effect at a rate of 15%. Perform a prefetch notice effect. On the other hand, when the start prize judgment result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area includes the start prize judgment result designation command for specifying "big hit", the voice effect is produced at a rate of 10%. The first look-ahead announcement effect of the first mode involving only the sound effect and the accessory effect is executed at a rate of 90%.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a specific effect that is executed based on a winning of a game ball to a general winning opening. A variation result announcement effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display being executed is a big hit symbol is executed as a specific effect A in this embodiment. In addition, whether the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied is a big hit symbol, that is, a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of whether or not the hold memory includes a hit determined to be a big hit is performed in this execution. It is executed as the specific effect B in the form.

  In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not the specific effect can be executed, and notifies the number of winning to the general winning opening. When the setting is performed (when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting)), the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of the specific effect) is set by the operation button 9030. Only when it is performed), the effect control CPU 90120 can execute the specific effect.

  As described above, each time the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command and the starting winning opening designation command, the effect controlling CPU 90120 stores the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122. As described above, the winning history storage area is provided for each specific effect. That is, in this embodiment, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are separately provided. For example, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second When a prize is generated in the order of the general prize port 9050B, the first start prize port, the second start prize port, the third general prize port 9050C, and the fourth general prize port 9050D, a prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and Each of the winning history storage areas corresponding to the specific effect B is referred to as [first general winning opening, second general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, third general winning opening, fourth winning opening]. The winning history is stored.

  In the effect form in which only the special effect A can be executed, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the winning history every time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (the timing at which a winning in any winning opening occurs). ), It is confirmed whether or not the winning condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. In addition, in the effect form in which only the specific effect B can be executed, a prize is won each time a prize history is stored in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at the timing when a prize is generated in any of the winning ports). It is confirmed whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the winning condition being satisfied. Further, in the effect form in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed, each time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (any one of them). At the timing when a prize is awarded to the winning opening of the special effect A), it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect A is satisfied in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and The execution of the specific effect A is determined based on the established winning condition, and it is determined whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is satisfied in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B. The execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B being established.

  In addition, when the execution of the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the specific effect A execution flag. If the special symbol is variably displayed (variable display of the decorative symbol) at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, as described above, the specific effect A according to the variable display result is performed as described above. A mode (only a voice effect or both a voice effect and a character effect) is determined, a change result announcement effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect A execution flag is deleted. That is, the specific effect A is executed at the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening without suspending the fluctuation result notice effect.

  On the other hand, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the specific effect A is executed because there is no target of the fluctuation result announcement effect. And keep the specific effect A execution flag set. The effect CPU for performance control 90120 can determine that the execution of the specific effect A is determined by the setting of the specific effect A execution flag, but that the specific effect A is not executed and is on hold. It has become. Then, when the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the special symbol) is satisfied, the mode of the specific effect A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, and the suspended state is determined. The specified effect A is executed, and the set specified effect A execution flag is deleted.

  The present invention is not limited to this mode. When the special symbol is not variably displayed (variable display of the decorative symbol) at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is suspended. Alternatively, the execution of the specific effect A may be stopped, and the specific effect A may not be executed even after the variable display start condition is satisfied.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the specific effect B execution flag when the execution of the specific effect B (prefetch notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. At the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, if the number of reserved storages (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1 or more, as described above, 1 The mode of the specific effect B (only the sound effect or both the sound effect and the character effect effect) according to the above-described start winning prize determination result is determined, the look-ahead notice effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect is performed. Clear the B execution flag. That is, the specific effect B is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without suspending the pre-reading advance effect.

  On the other hand, if the number of stored memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag is set because the target of the prefetch notice effect does not exist. State. The production control CPU 90120 can determine that the execution of the specific production B has been determined by setting the specific production B execution flag, but that the specific production B has not been executed and is in a suspended state. It has become. Then, when the start condition is satisfied (when the number of retained memories becomes 1 or more) due to the occurrence of the winning in the start winning opening, the mode of the specific effect B is determined based on the start winning time determination result, The specific effect B in the suspended state is executed, and the set specific effect B execution flag is deleted.

  The present invention is not limited to this mode, and when the number of retained memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is stopped without suspending the execution of the specific effect B, and thereafter, Even when the start condition is satisfied and the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more, the specific effect B may not be executed.

  When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped (for example, when a power cut is detected), the effect control CPU 90120 sets a winning history storage area (a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A). The winning history and the specific effect execution flags (specific effect A execution flag and specific effect B execution flag) stored in the winning effect storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are all deleted. Accordingly, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 901 during execution of the specific effect (fluctuation result notice effect, look-ahead notice effect) or in a state where the specific effect has not been executed after the execution of the specific effect has been determined. Is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted, the specific effect being executed or the specific effect determined to be executed is not executed again. That is, since the winning history and the specific effect execution flag are deleted for a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the specific effect is not executed. When it is confirmed based on the winning history from the start of the power supply that the winning condition is satisfied, a new special effect is executed.

[First production style]
In the first effect form shown in FIG. 25, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 places the game ball in one of the first general prize port 9050A to the fourth general prize port 9050D. A winning condition (referred to as a first winning condition) is satisfied each time a win is made. When the first winning condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is to be executed based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D satisfying the first winning condition). (Including any winning prize history) is deleted.

  On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probable change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 every time the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (the second winning condition) is satisfied. When the second winning condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not a specific effect is to be executed based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 20%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D satisfying the second winning condition). (Including any winning prize history) is deleted.

  In the first effect form and the second effect form to the fourth effect form described below, (1) The ratio of the specific effect being executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the normal state is (2) ) In the probable change state or the time saving state, the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the game ball winning the general winning opening. In the probable change state and the time saving state, the player is usually more interested in the winning situation of the game ball in the second starting winning opening and the variable display of the decorative pattern than the winning situation of the gaming ball in the general winning opening, Even if the specific effect is executed, it is difficult to generate the same interests as in the normal state. For this reason, in the probable change state or the time saving state, the execution ratio of the specific effect is reduced as compared with the normal state, and a decrease in interest in the specific effect is suppressed.

  In the second to fourth effect modes, which will be described later, unlike the first effect mode, whether or not to execute a specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining a specific effect execution. The second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, can execute a specific effect when the winning condition is satisfied. (2) The winning condition in the probable change state or the time saving state is (1) normal A larger number of winnings is required than the winning conditions in the state. Therefore, the execution ratio of the specific effect in the (1) normal state is higher than the execution ratio of the specific effect in the (2) probability change state or the time saving state.

  In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening. In addition, contrary to the examples of the first effect form to the fourth effect form, (2) the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state is ( 1) In the normal state, the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening may be set higher.

  In the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, similarly to the first effect form, when the winning condition is satisfied, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the random number for specific effect execution determination. You may do so. For example, in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the first prize condition required in the normal state and the second prize condition required in the probable change state or the time saving state are the same prize condition, By making the lottery probability when the winning condition is satisfied in the normal state different from the lottery probability when the winning condition is satisfied in the probable change state or the time saving state, as in the effect form, the rate at which the specific effect is normally executed and the probability The ratio in which the specific effect is executed in the state or the time reduction state may be made different.

  Further, the specific effect may be executed at a different ratio according to the display result of the variable display or the determination result at the time of the start winning, as well as the game state. For example, when the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the specific effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case where the display result of the variable display is a lost symbol. When there is a hold memory determined to be a big hit, there is no hold memory determined to be a big hit at the time of starting prize (when there is only a hold memory determined to be incorrect at the time of a start winning), The specific effect may be executed at a high rate. In addition, the number of times the specific effect is executed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number (for example, the specific effect can be executed only once regardless of the type, or the specific effect of a different type is classified into various types. It can be executed only once every time).

[Second production form]
In the second effect form shown in FIG. 25, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that at least two of the first general prize port 9050A to the fourth general prize port 9050D The winning condition (hereinafter referred to as a first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins at least once each in the winning opening. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probable change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 assigns two or more of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D to the general winning opening, respectively. The winning condition (hereinafter referred to as a second winning condition) is established by winning the game balls two or more times. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

  As described above, in the second effect mode, and in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode, which will be described later, the number of wins to the general winning opening required to execute the specific effect in the normal state, and the probability change state or Since the number of prizes to the general winning opening required to execute the specific effect in the time reduction state is different, it is possible to interest the number of game balls to the general winning opening according to the gaming state. .

  Further, in the second effect form, in order to execute a specific effect, at least one or more game play is performed for each of two or more general prize ports out of the first general prize port 9050A to the fourth general prize port 9050D. The ball must be awarded. In this way, by setting the winning of each of a plurality of general winning ports as the execution condition of the specific effect, not only the presence or absence of the general winning port, but also the game ball winning any of the general winning ports. You can be interested in what you do.

  In the second effect mode, and in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode to be described later, the start of the big hit gaming state is designated based on the control of the big hit gaming state by the game control microcomputer 90100. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the jackpot start designation command, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both deleted. It shall be.

  In the second effect mode, and in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode, which will be described later, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on the change of the gaming state. . Therefore, the fact that the first prize condition is satisfied means that the first prize condition is satisfied as a result of checking the prize history in the prize history storage area in the normal state. The first winning condition is not always satisfied based on the condition. Similarly, the fact that the second prize condition is satisfied means that the result of checking the prize history in the prize history storage area in the probable change state or the time saving state indicates that the second prize condition is satisfied. The second winning condition is not always satisfied based on the winning history of only the time saving state. The present invention is not limited to such a mode, and based on the transition from the normal state to the probable state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probable state or the time saving state to the normal state, the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased. Is also good. That is, it is determined whether or not the first winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history only in the normal state, and whether or not the second winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history only in the probable change state or the time saving state. You may confirm it.

[Third production style]
In the third effect form shown in FIG. 25, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening) within 120 seconds. The winning condition (hereinafter, referred to as a first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins a total of three times or more in the winning opening 9050D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) within 120 seconds. The winning condition (hereinafter referred to as a second winning condition) is established by the game balls winning a total of five times or more. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

  Here, the period of 120 seconds is started based on that the winning history of the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A (for example, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds). Set). If the winning condition is not satisfied within a period of 120 seconds (when the timer for the specific effect A times out), the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted without executing the specific effect A. . On the other hand, if the winning condition is satisfied within a period of 120 seconds (if the winning condition is satisfied before the time-out of the timer for the specific effect A), the specific effect A is executed and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is executed. Is erased.

  As described above, the prize frequency (the number of prizes within a predetermined period) required to execute the specific effect in the normal state, and the prize frequency (the predetermined period) required to execute the specific effect in the probable change state or the time saving state (The number of winnings in the game), it is possible to make the player interested in the frequency of winning the general winning opening depending on the game state.

  Further, in the third effect mode, when the specific effect A for the variable display that has been executed when the first general winning opening is won in the predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed (only the variable display period of 1). If there is a winning condition based on the winning history), there is a specific effect A that targets a variable display that is different from the variable display that was performed when the first general winning opening was won during a predetermined period (120 seconds). (A winning condition may be satisfied by winning histories in a plurality of variable display periods).

  Note that, as in the third effect mode, a special effect is variably displayed a predetermined number of times as a mode in which a specific effect is executed when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in a predetermined period reaches a predetermined number. The specific effect may be executed when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in a certain period reaches a predetermined number. For example, it is specified until all the reserved memories of the special figure game are exhausted, that is, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening becomes a predetermined number during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the number of the reserved memories is executed. An effect may be executed.

[4th production style]
In the fourth effect form shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the gaming state is (1) the normal state, in which case the starting winning opening (one of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening). The game ball wins in the following order: starting winning opening (one of first starting winning opening and second starting winning opening); general winning opening (one of first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D). The winning condition (first winning condition) is established by winning the mouth. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probable change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening) and the starting winning opening (the first start winning opening). One of the winning opening and the second starting winning opening), the general winning opening (any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D), and further, the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth winning opening). A winning ball (a second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning port in the order of the general winning port 9050D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

  In this manner, the specific effect is executed on condition that the winning order for the general winning opening and other winning openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning opening is a specific order. By doing so, it is possible to give an interest not only in the status of winning in the general winning opening, but also in the order of winning in the general winning opening and other winning openings.

  It should be noted that the number of times a game ball wins continuously to a general winning opening and the number of times a game ball wins continuously to another winning opening may have a range. For example, the winning condition may be established by successively winning at least three times in the starting winning opening and then continuously winning at least two times in the general winning opening. The winning condition may also be determined as to which of the plurality of general winning openings or which of the plurality of other winning openings. For example, the winning condition is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in the order of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A, and the second general winning opening 9050B. Is also good. In addition, the order is not limited to the order in which the winning in the general winning opening occurs after the winning in the starting winning opening, and the winning condition may be determined by the occurrence of the winning in the starting winning opening after the winning in the general winning opening. May be established.

  Further, the winning condition may be established based on the fact that the winning order of the game balls to the plurality of general winning openings becomes a specific order. For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition is determined by the game ball winning a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B. When the gaming state is (2) the probable change state or the time saving state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second general winning opening 9050B, and the third general winning The winning condition (hereinafter referred to as a second winning condition) may be established when the game ball has won a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the mouth 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D.

Further, the winning condition may be established based on the winning of the game balls to the plurality of general winning openings and the order of the winning of the game balls to one or more starting winning openings being a specific order. . For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition is determined by the winning of the game ball in the order of the first general winning opening 9050A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 9050B, and so on. When the gaming state is (2) the probable change state or the time saving state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 9050B, Furthermore, a prize condition (a second prize condition) may be established by a game ball winning in the order of a third general prize port 9050C, a second start prize port, and a fourth general prize port 9050D. Good.

  In addition, the order is not limited to the order of entry into the general winning opening and the starting winning opening, and the winning is based on a specific order of entering the general winning opening and entering the special winning opening. The condition may be satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied based on the fact that the order of entry into the general winning opening and the entry into the first passing gate 9041A or the second passing gate 9041B is a specific order. You may do so. When a specific area in which a jackpot type (for example, a probable big hit) is determined based on the entry of a game ball is provided, the order of entry into the general winning opening and the entry into the specific area is specified. The winning condition may be established based on the order.

  In the first to fourth effect modes, the example in which the fluctuation result notice effect (special effect A) is executed as the specific effect has been described. You may.

[Fifth stage to eighth stage]
In the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 26, unlike the first effect form to the fourth effect form, (1) a normal state and (2) a probable change state or a time saving state. The prize conditions are not different, and are common prize conditions. In the examples of the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, the first prize condition in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, that is, the prize condition employed in the normal state, respectively, is provided as a common prize condition. ing. Then, (1) when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is the normal state, a fluctuation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as a specific effect, and (2) a game when the winning condition is satisfied. When the state is the probable change state or the time saving state, a prefetch notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. Thereby, the type of the specific effect can be made different depending on the game state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and the specific effect of the specific effect executed based on the game ball winning the general winning opening can be made. Interest can be improved.

  In the fifth effect form shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution of the specific effect at a rate of 50% when the winning condition is satisfied. Then, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and All the winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probable change state or the time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and every time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A. , And the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

  In the sixth to eighth effect modes shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the specific effect A when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the normal state, Every time the specific effect A is executed, both the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (2) the probable change state or the time saving state, the specific effect B is executed. Both the winning history in the winning history storage area and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are deleted.

  In the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, the big hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit game state is given based on the control of the big hit game state by the game control microcomputer 90100. Is received, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both erased. In the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on the change of the gaming state. The present invention is not limited to such a mode, and based on the transition from the normal state to the probable state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probable state or the time saving state to the normal state, the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased. Is also good.

  In the seventh effect mode, the specific effect timer is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the specific effect B. . When the timer for the specific effect times out, neither the specific effect A nor the specific effect B is executed, and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B are displayed. Both are erased. On the other hand, if the winning condition is satisfied before the time-out of the specific effect timer, (1) in the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning history and the specific effect B in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. (2) In the case of the probable change state or the time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and the winning history and the specific effect of the specific effect A in the winning history storage area are deleted. All winning histories in the winning history storage area B are deleted.

[Ninth production form to twelfth production form]
In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 27, unlike the first effect form to the eighth effect form, (1) the normal state and (2) the probable change state or the time reduction state. The winning conditions are different, and the type of the specific effect executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions is also different. That is, (1) when the first prize condition is satisfied in the normal state, the fluctuation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as a specific effect, and (2) the second prize condition in the probable change state or the time saving state. Is established, a look-ahead preview effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. Thereby, the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect can be made different depending on the game state when the game ball has won the general winning opening, and the gaming ball has won the general winning opening. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific effect executed based on the specific effect.

  In the ninth effect form shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the game ball in one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. A winning condition (hereinafter referred to as a first winning condition) is satisfied each time a win is made, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probable change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 every time the gaming ball wins one of the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (the second winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

  In the tenth effect mode shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B to one each when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established by the game balls winning at least twice, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probable change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the game ball at least twice in both the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. , A winning condition (hereinafter referred to as a second winning condition) is established, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

  In the ninth effect mode to the twelfth effect mode, a big hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit game state is issued based on the control of the game control microcomputer 90100 to the big hit game state. Is received, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both erased. In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on the change of the gaming state. The present invention is not limited to such a mode, and based on the transition from the normal state to the probable state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probable state or the time saving state to the normal state, the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased. Is also good.

  In the eleventh effect form shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B within 120 seconds when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. When the game ball wins a total of three times or more, the winning condition (the first winning condition) is established, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probable change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 makes the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D a total of five or more game balls. As a result, the winning condition (the second winning condition) is established, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

  In the eleventh effect form, the specific effect A timer is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history of the first general winning opening is stored in the winning effect storage area of the specific effect A. Then, when the timer for the specific effect A times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted without executing the specific effect A. On the other hand, if the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state before the time-out of the timer for the specific effect A, the specific effect A is executed, and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted. In addition, the specific effect B timer is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history of the first general winning opening is stored in the winning effect storage area of the specific effect B. When the timer for the specific effect B times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted without executing the specific effect B. On the other hand, if the second winning condition is satisfied in the probable change state or the time saving state before the time-out of the specific effect B timer, the specific effect B is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted. Is done.

  In the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 27, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the first starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 9050B, The winning condition (hereinafter referred to as a first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in this order. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probable change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the second starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 9050C, the fourth general winning opening. The winning condition (hereinafter referred to as a second winning condition) is established by the game ball winning the winning opening in the order of 9050D. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

  Like the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, a general winning opening (a general winning opening and a starting winning opening in the twelfth effect form) to be awarded of a game ball for executing a specific effect is changed according to a game state. By doing so, a specific effect is appropriately executed according to the game state. In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, in order to satisfy the first winning condition in the normal state, a target winning opening to be won in order to satisfy the first winning condition, and in order to satisfy the second winning condition in the probable change state or the time saving state. The example shows that the target winning openings to be awarded are all different from each other, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the target winning opening in the normal state and the target winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state are partially It may be common. For example, both the first winning condition and the second winning condition may include winning in the second general winning opening 9050B.

[13th production form to 16th production form]
In the thirteenth effect form to the sixteenth effect form shown in FIG. 28, the ratio at which the specific effect A is executed when the timing at which the first winning condition is satisfied is a period after (1) the reach state in the reach variation is established. However, when the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is (2) a period before the reach state is established during the reach change period or during the reach change, the timing at which the specific effect A is executed is higher.

  Here, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation is, specifically, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop) after the reach state is established in the variable display of the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach). (Symbol) is a period until it is stopped and displayed. Further, (2) the period before the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is, specifically, a period during which the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) is performed. This period is a period from the start of variable display of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach effect (normal reach, super reach) until the reach state is established.

  The first prize condition and the second prize condition in the thirteenth effect form to the sixteenth effect form are the same as the first prize condition and the second prize condition in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, respectively. Has become. Regardless of the effect form, when the timing at which the first winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reaching state in the reach variation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is determined by the second winning condition. When the established timing is (2) outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is higher. In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[17th production form to 20th production form]
In the seventeenth effect form to the twentieth effect form shown in FIG. 29, when the timing at which the winning condition is satisfied is (1) a period after the reaching state in the reach variation, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning condition is executed. Is established, the specific effect B is executed when (2) is outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change.

  The prize winning conditions in the seventeenth effect form to the twentieth effect form are the same as the prize winning conditions (common prize conditions) in the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, respectively. In any of the effect forms, if the timing at which the winning condition (common winning condition) is satisfied is (1) the period after the reaching state in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning condition is satisfied. If the performed timing is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing different types of specific effects according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[21st production form to 24th production form]
In the twenty-first effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form shown in FIG. 30, the specific effect A is executed when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is a period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation. If the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is (2) a period outside the reach variation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach variation, the specific effect B is executed.

  The first prize condition and the second prize condition in the twenty-first effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form are the same as the first prize condition and the second prize condition in the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, respectively. Has become. Regardless of the effect form, if the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reaching state in the reach variation, the specific effect A is executed, and the second winning condition is satisfied. When the performed timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing the specific effects in different proportions depending on the game period when the winning condition is satisfied, and executing different types of specific effects depending on the game period when the winning condition is satisfied, Interestingness when a game ball wins a general winning opening can be improved.

[25th production form and 26th production form]
In the twenty-fifth effect form shown in FIG. 31, unlike the first to twenty-fourth effect forms, the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) does not depend on the game state or the game period. The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins a total of three times or more. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. In addition, the second winning condition is satisfied when the game balls have won a total of five times in the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) irrespective of the game state and the game period. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

  In the twenty-sixth production mode shown in FIG. 31, unlike the first to twenty-fourth production modes, the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening) can be achieved within 120 seconds regardless of the game state or the game period. The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball has won the winning opening 9050D) three times or more in total. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. In addition, regardless of the state of the game or the game period, the second prize is obtained when the game ball has won the general prize port (first general prize port 9050A to the fourth general prize port 9050D) five times or more in total within 120 seconds. The condition holds. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

  In this way, different effects are executed in accordance with the number of winnings in the general winning opening and the winning frequency (the number of winnings in the predetermined period) regardless of the playing state and the playing period, thereby obtaining the number of winnings in the general winning opening. And the frequency of winning. In this example, the effect mode (output sound) differs according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening and the winning frequency, and the variable display to be notified differs (specific effect A: variable display being executed, The specific effect B: a variable display that has not been executed), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is different whether or not the display result of the variable display is suggested depending on the number of winnings in the general winning opening and the winning frequency. For example, an effect that gives a notice of the display result of the variable display and an effect that is not related to the display result of the variable display may be executable, and an effect (for example, a high probability (An effect notifying that the game is in the state and an effect not related to the game state).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that a prize has occurred in the general prize port by receiving the general prize port designation command, and that the first general prize port 9050A to the fourth general prize port 9050D. Can be specified to which of the game balls has been won, and upon receipt of the start winning port designation command, the winning in the starting winning port has occurred and the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port has been played. It is possible to specify whether or not the ball has won, and it is possible to specify that the winning in the special winning opening has occurred by receiving the special winning opening winning command. Therefore, a winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 32 is stored as the winning number management table, and can be updated.

  The second start winning opening is formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B, and the normally variable winning ball device 906B is controlled to be opened (from the closed state where the game ball does not win or is difficult to win), the game ball can win or can easily win. The state is switched to a state), so that the game balls can win. The special winning opening is formed by a special variable winning ball device 907, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is controlled to be opened (a game ball can enter or can easily enter from a closed state where the game ball does not win or is difficult to win). By switching to the open state), the game ball can win. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32, the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball device 907 are divided into a winning opening in which a game ball can be won by the operation of the winning. On the other hand, the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D and the first starting winning opening are always open so that the game ball can be won regardless of the operation of the official game. It is divided into

  In the winning number management table of FIG. 32, the game ball has won the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening. The number of prize balls given at that time (the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening, in this example, 10, 10, 10, 10, 2, 2, 15) is stored. Then, for each winning opening, the winning number (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420 in this example), which is the number of game balls winning in the winning opening, and the winning number are multiplied by the winning ball number. The number of paid out balls (the total number of balls paid out due to the winning of a game ball in the winning opening, in this example, 110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300) is stored.

  Then, as the winning ratio, (1) the winning number of each winning opening (11,36,22,14,754,315,420 respectively) with respect to the total winning number of each winning opening (1572 in this example). And (2) the total number of winnings of each winning opening (in this example, 1572), the non-principal winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D and the first start winning). (3) The ratio of the winning numbers (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754), the ratio of the winning numbers (315 + 420) of the special winning opening (the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening), and (3) the total number of winnings of each winning opening ( In this example, the ratio of the winning number (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754 + 315) other than the special winning opening and the ratio of the winning number (420) of the special winning opening to 1572) are stored.

  As the payout ratio, (1) the payout number of each winning opening (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300 respectively) with respect to the total payout number of each winning opening (9268 in this example). And (2) the total number of payouts of each winning opening (in this example, 9268), the non-principal winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D and the first start winning). Of the number of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) and the ratio of the number of payouts (630 + 6300) of the bonus winning opening (the second starting winning opening and the grand winning opening); and (3) the total number of payouts of each winning opening ( In this example, the ratio of the number of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508 + 630) other than the special winning opening and the ratio of the payout number (6300) of the special winning opening to 9268) are stored.

  Here, as described above, during the period in which the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is at the second position (display position), the effect control CPU 90120 displays each information stored in the winning number management table on an image display. It is displayed on the device 905. Accordingly, the clerk at the game hall is paid out when the game ball wins at the bonus winning opening with respect to the total number of balls (9268) paid out by winning the game ball at each winning opening. The ratio of the number of balls (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) (hereinafter referred to as “first payout ratio”, which is 74.77% in this example) can be grasped. In addition, the total number of balls (6268) paid out due to the winning of the game ball in each winning opening, and the number of balls (6300) paid out due to the winning of the gaming ball in the big winning opening, The ratio (hereinafter referred to as “second payout ratio”, which is 67.98% in this example) can be grasped.

  Here, if the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies that fact in a manner that can be specified. . In the example of FIG. 32, since the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first reference ratio (70%), the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted with a bold frame. If the second payout ratio is higher than a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60%), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies the user in such a manner that it can be specified. In the example of FIG. 32, since the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second reference ratio (60%), the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted with a bold frame.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 905, and displays the comparison result with the predetermined first reference ratio and second predetermined ratio. It can be displayed in a manner that can be grasped. Note that the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed on the image display device 905 by, for example, setting of the display changeover switch 9032 and setting operation of the operation button 9030 irrespective of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031. When the demonstration screen is displayed on the image display device 905, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed irrespective of the settings of the game hall or the player. In addition, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed according to the game state, for example, may be displayed when the game is controlled to the big hit game state.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 outputs the calculated first payout ratio and the second payout ratio to a game device (for example, a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901, and In the device, the received first payout ratio and the second payout ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and the second payout ratio to an information management device such as a hall computer, and the information management device causes the first payout ratio and the second payout of each gaming machine to be transmitted. The ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device.

  When outputting the general winning opening designation command, the starting winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening winning command to the effect control CPU 90120, the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs external output information corresponding to these commands. Information that a winning in the general winning opening has occurred, information that can specify which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D the gaming ball has won, a winning in the starting winning opening has occurred. Information that can specify whether the game ball has won the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and the information that can specify that a winning has occurred in the big winning opening. (Card unit, call lamp device) and information management device (hall computer).

  Thereby, the information corresponding to the general winning opening specifying command, the information corresponding to the starting winning opening specifying command, the information corresponding to the special winning opening winning command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio can be specified. Receiving the above information, the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 32 can be stored for each gaming machine and can be updated. Thereby, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for each gaming machine can be grasped. In addition, for each gaming machine, it can be grasped whether the first payout ratio exceeds the first reference ratio and whether the second payout ratio exceeds the second reference ratio.

  In addition, regarding the counting period of the winning number information (the value of each item in FIG. 18 or FIG. 32) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901, if no setting is made for the counting period, the pachinko machine This is a period from when the power supply of the gaming machine 901 is started to when the power supply is stopped. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is reset (the number of winnings in each winning opening becomes 0), and the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is restarted. At times, the number of winnings in each winning opening stored in the winning number management table is zero. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is deleted without being backed up.

  The totaling period of the winning number information (the value of each item in FIG. 18 or FIG. 32) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be set on the gaming arcade side. Using the button 9030, a totaling period (for example, 10 hours or 3 hours) of the gaming machine can be set. In a gaming machine (a card unit or a call lamp device), a clerk of a game arcade inputs a desired totaling period using an input device or the like, and the input totaling period is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 901 and the totalizing period is transmitted. (Stored in the RAM 90122). In the information management device (hall computer), the manager of the game arcade inputs a desired totaling period using an input device or the like, and the input totaling period is set for each pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, a pachinko machine selected as a setting target). It may be transmitted to the gaming machine 901) and set as a totaling period (stored in the RAM 90122). Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a winning number management table is created for each set tally period (for example, 10 hours), and these are displayed on the image display device 905, or a gaming device (card Unit, call lamp device) and display on the display device of the gaming device, or output to the information management device (hall computer) and display on the display device of the information management device. .

  Further, based on information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, information corresponding to the starting winning opening designation command, and information corresponding to the large winning opening winning command, which is output from the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of winnings in the winning number management table is determined. In an external device that stores and updates information (the value of each item in FIG. 18 or FIG. 32), by setting a tally period using an input device provided in the external device, the tally period is set for each set tally period (for example, 10 hours). A winning number management table can be created and displayed on a display device provided in the external device. For example, when the external device is a gaming device (a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901, a winning number management table for the corresponding gaming machine for each predetermined period is displayed on the display device. When the external device is an information management device that manages game information for each gaming machine, it is possible to display a winning number management table for each gaming machine for each predetermined period on the display device. Becomes

[27th production form]
The above-described specific effect A and the specific effect B both notify the variable display result in the special figure game according to the effect mode. As a specific effect, it is also possible to execute an effect not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the ordinary figure game. FIG. 33 illustrates a specific effect C (point-giving effect) as an effect not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the ordinary figure game.

  In the 27th effect form shown in FIG. 34 and a 29th effect form described later, each time a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124. Whether or not the specific effect C is to be executed is determined based on the execution determination random number, and when it is determined that the specific effect C is to be executed, the specific effect C is executed. When the specific effect C is executed, the total point of the point storage area formed in the RAM 90122 is incremented by one, and as shown in FIG. 33, the image display device 905 displays an image including the character “1 point”. 902000 is displayed.

  That is, each time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not one point is to be awarded. In this case, a point giving effect in which one point is given is effected. Benefits are provided to the player according to the total points in the point storage area.

  For example, when the total points have reached 5 (when winning 5 times), a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server is displayed on the image display device 905. The player can access the image providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the owning information terminal and download the desired standby image or the like to the information terminal. . When the total points have reached 10 (when winning 10 times), a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 905. The player can access the music providing server by causing the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player to read (image) the two-dimensional code, and download the desired music to the information terminal.

  In the twenty-seventh effect form, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) If the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (out of the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%. The specific effect C is executed. The effect control CPU 90120 transmits a fluctuation start command for designating a fluctuation start in the special figure game and a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a fluctuation time of a special symbol in the special figure game or a decoration pattern on the image display device 905. By receiving the information from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed.

  As in the specific effect A and the specific effect B, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C is provided. Every time the specific effect C is executed, a winning history (at least one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D which is the winning condition) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C History is included).

  Here, the total points of the point storage area formed in the RAM 90122 are set to 10, regardless of the winning history in the winning history storage area (even if the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted). After reaching (after the two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed in this example), it is reset to 0, and is incremented by 1 again when the specific effect C is executed.

  In the 27th effect form and a 29th effect form described later, (1) a specific effect is provided based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period in which a special symbol is variably displayed (within a symbol fluctuation period). The rate of execution is lower than (2) the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Is set. In the period of (1), the effect corresponding to the special map game (for example, a change result announcement effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R, and therefore, the player usually receives a general prize. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the period (1), the interest of the specific effect may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period of (2), the effect corresponding to the special figure game that is originally of interest is not executed preferentially, and the specific effect is executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the period (1), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased.

  In addition, by executing a specific effect C (point-giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the general figure game as the specific effect, the execution state of the special figure game and the number of retained memories are reduced. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not spoiled. For example, when an effect related to a variable display result in a special figure game, such as a specific effect A, is adopted as the specific effect, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is determined by (2) the variable display of the special symbol is executed. If the period is not performed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), there is no target of the fluctuation result notice at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the winning in the general winning opening is stopped) or the execution is suspended until the condition for starting the variable display relating to the special figure game is satisfied (general winning). The specific effect is not executed at the timing of winning the mouth, and thereafter, the specific effect is executed at the timing when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the interest may decrease due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the ordinary figure game as the specific effect.

  In the twenty-seventh effect form, the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is defined as (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). (In the period), the specific effect C is not executed, and (2) the specific effect C can be executed only in a period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period). Is also good. Also, contrary to the example shown in the twenty-seventh effect form, (1) specified based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period in which a special symbol variable display is being executed (within a symbol fluctuation period). The rate at which the effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on (2) a game ball winning a general winning opening during a period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period). May be set to be higher.

[28th production form]
In the twenty-eighth effect mode, unlike the twenty-seventh effect mode, it is not determined whether or not to execute a specific effect based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the twenty-eighth production mode, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). ), The specific effect A (fluctuation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%. (2) If the special symbol A is in a period in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Does not execute the specific effect A.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 24A, the specific effect A is one of a first mode in which only a voice effect is executed and a second mode in which a character effect is executed together with the sound effect. This is a variation result announcement effect that suggests the possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), the specific effect B is one of a first mode in which only the voice effect is executed and a second mode in which the character effect is executed together with the sound effect. This is a look-ahead preview effect that suggests a possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the specific effect C is a display result of the variable display related to the special figure game (whether or not a big hit symbol) and a display result of the variable display related to the ordinary figure game (whether or not to become a hit symbol). The effect is not related to any one of the above, and points are given to the player in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening.

  As described above, when the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2), the specific effect A is not executed (see the aforementioned “ The execution of the specific effect A is suspended, and the process is executed when the start condition of the variable display relating to the special figure game is satisfied is not performed). The effect A is to be executed. Each time the specific effect A is executed, a winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D which is a winning condition). History is included).

  In the twenty-eighth production mode, as a specific production, a specific production A (variable result notice production) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening, I try to improve my interest in specific productions. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is (2) a period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a subject of the variation result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning opening), and thereafter, when the condition for starting the variable display relating to the special figure game is satisfied, the specific effect A is specified. In the case where the effect A is executed, there is a possibility that the interest may decrease due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. For this reason, in the twenty-eighth effect mode, the specific effect A is not executed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period).

  In the twenty-eighth production mode, when the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol fluctuation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20% during the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period). In such a case, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs during the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the general winning opening is set). The specific effect A is not executed at the winning timing), and thereafter, the specific effect A is executed when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied. As described above, the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is either the case of the period (1) (within the symbol fluctuation period) or the case of the period (2) (out of the symbol fluctuation period). May also be able to execute the specific effect A, and the specific effect A may be executed at a different rate.

  Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol fluctuation period), the running characteristic is further increased. The execution ratio of the specific effect A may be different depending on the variable display result of the figure game, whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed, and the like. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the specific effect A at a rate of 80% when the determined decorative symbol is determined to be the big hit symbol, and determines the determined decorative symbol as a lost symbol. If determined, the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[29th production form]
In the twenty-ninth production mode, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) the number of retained memories (for example, the first retained memory number and the second retained memory number). (2) the number of reserved storages is 0, but during the period in which the special symbol is variably displayed (within the symbol fluctuation period). In some cases, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is defined as (3) the period in which the number of stored memories is 0 and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

  That is, at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, or at least it is determined to execute the variable display of the special symbol ((1) or (2) above). ), The special effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and the special symbol is not variably displayed and the special symbol is variably displayed at the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening. Is not determined (in the case of the period of (3) above), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

  Every time the specific effect C is executed, a winning history (at least one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D which is the winning condition) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C History is included).

  In the twenty-ninth effect form, when the game ball wins the general winning opening, the variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least it is determined to execute the variable display of the special symbol ((1) above). Or when the period of (2)), the specific effect is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is not executed and the special symbol variable display is performed. When the execution is not determined (when the period is the period (3)), the ratio is set lower than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed. In the period of (1) and (2), the effect corresponding to the special map game (for example, the fluctuation result notice effect or the look-ahead notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. In general, the player is more interested in these effects including variable display of decorative symbols than in the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the periods (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period of (3), the effect corresponding to the special figure game which is normally the object of interest is not executed, and the specific effect is executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. For this reason, the specific effect is executed at a higher rate than the periods (1) and (2), so that the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased.

  In addition, by executing a specific effect C (point-giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the general figure game as the specific effect, the execution state of the special figure game and the number of retained memories are reduced. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not spoiled. For example, as a specific effect, when a look-ahead notice effect that can be executed only when the number of reserved storages is 1 or more as in the specific effect B is adopted, the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is determined by the number of stored memories. Is 0, there is no target for the prefetch notice at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the winning in the general winning opening is stopped), or the execution is suspended until the number of stored memories becomes one or more (the general winning opening is won). At the timing, the specific effect is not executed, and thereafter, the specific effect is executed at the timing when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the interest may decrease due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the ordinary figure game as the specific effect.

  In the 29th effect form, the variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least the variable display of the special symbol at the timing when the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Is determined to be executed (when the period is the above (1) or (2)), the special effect C is not executed, the special symbol is not variably displayed, and the special symbol is not executed. The specific effect C may be executable only when it is not determined to execute the variable display (when the period is the period (3)). Also, contrary to the example shown in the twenty-ninth effect form, whether the special symbol is variably displayed at the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Alternatively, at least when it is determined that variable display of a special symbol is to be performed (when the period is the period of (1) or (2) above), the ratio at which the specific effect is performed is determined by the variable display of the special symbol. If it is not determined that the special display is to be executed and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (in the case of the period of (3) above), the ratio of executing the specific effect may be set to be higher.

  In addition, the timing at which the variable display related to the special figure game is started (the timing at which the start condition is satisfied) and the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and including simultaneously). In this case, the specific effect may not be immediately executed, but may be executed after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, after 5 seconds) from the start of the variable display. According to this, even though the specific effect is not related to the special figure game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the specific effect B or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. Can be prevented from being misunderstood as being related to the special map game. In addition, the timing when the game ball wins in the starting winning opening (the timing when the starting condition is satisfied) and the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and including simultaneously). In some cases, the specific effect may not be executed immediately, but may be executed after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, after 5 seconds) from the increase in the number of stored memories. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special figure game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, when the specific effect is the specific effect A or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. Can be prevented from being misunderstood as being related to the special map game.

[30th production style]
In the thirtieth production mode, unlike the twenty-ninth production mode, the presence / absence of execution of a specific production is not determined based on the specific production execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the thirtieth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) the number of retained memories (for example, the first retained memory number and the second retained memory number). And the total number of reserved storages) is within one or more periods, the specific effect B (prefetch notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved storages is 0. Is the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). Is not performed, the specific effect B is not executed.

  As described above, when the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2) or (3), the specific effect B is not executed. (The above-described process of “holding the execution of the specific effect B and executing it when the number of storages to be held becomes 1 or more” is not performed.) Only when the period is (1), The specific effect B is executed. Each time the specific effect B is executed, a winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at least one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D satisfying the winning condition). History is included).

  In the thirtieth production form, as a specific production, a specific production B (look-ahead pre-production production) related to the variable display result of the special figure game held at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is specified. I try to improve my interest in directing. However, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the period of (2) or (3) in which the number of retained memories is 0, there is no target of the prefetch notice at this timing. In this case, the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the specific effect B is executed when the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more. In the case of executing the game, there is a possibility that the interest may be reduced on the contrary due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. For this reason, in the thirtieth effect form, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (the period in which the number of stored memories is 0), the specific effect B is not executed. .

  In the thirtieth production mode, when the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the holding memory). Executes the specific effect B at a rate of 80%, and executes the specific effect B at a rate of 20% during the period of (2) or (3) (within the period of no holding storage). You may do so. In such a case, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs during the period (2) or (3) (without the storage of the hold), the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended. (The specific effect B is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and thereafter, the specific effect B is executed when the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more. As described above, the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is during the period (1) (within the holding memory), or when the timing (2) or (3) (without the holding memory). ), The specific effect B can be executed in each case, and the specific effect B may be executed at a different ratio.

  Further, when the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the holding memory), the holding is further performed. The execution ratio of the specific effect B varies depending on whether the reach effect is executed in the variable display result of the special figure game related to the memory or the variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the execution of the special figure game related to the holding storage, and the like. You may do so. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the start winning prize determination result designating command specifying “big hit” is stored in the start winning command storage area (that is, the hold storage in which the variable display result of the special figure game becomes a big hit symbol). Is present), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and the start winning prize determination result designation command designating “big hit” is not stored in the start winning command storage area (ie, If there is no hold memory in which the variable display result of the special figure game becomes a big hit symbol), the specific effect B may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[31st production style]
In the thirty-first effect form shown in FIG. 35, the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed ( If it is during the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A (fluctuation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%. (2) During the period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). In some cases, a specific effect C (point-giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, the timing when the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (1) and the case of (2). Different types of specific effects are to be executed. As a result, it is possible to interest the effect performed when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and it is possible to improve interest. Each time a specific effect (specific effect A or specific effect C) is executed, the winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth prize port 9050A to the fourth prize). The winning history to any of the general winning openings 9050D is deleted).

  In the thirty-first effect form, the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game that is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is executed. I am trying to improve my interest. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is (2) a period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a subject of the variation result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, if no specific effect is executed, the execution frequency of the specific effect is reduced. On the other hand, in order not to decrease the execution frequency of the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and thereafter, the special figure game is executed. In the case where the specific effect A is executed when the variable display start condition is satisfied, the interest may be degraded due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect.

  In the thirty-first effect form, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display in the ordinary figure game is substituted for the specific effect A. By executing the specific effect C not related to the display result, such a problem can be avoided. It should be noted that each type of specific effect is always executed (performed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is entered into the general winning opening. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

[32nd production style]
In the thirty-second effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) the number of retained storages (for example, the first retained storage number and the second retained storage number). If the sum is within one or more periods, the specific effect B (prefetch notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. Is during the period in which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A (fluctuation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of reserved memories is 0. And during a period in which the special symbol is not variably displayed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (1), the case of the period of (2), In the case of the period of 3), specific effects of different types are respectively executed. As a result, it is possible to interest the effect performed when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and it is possible to improve interest. Each time a specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B, or specific effect C) is executed, a winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general winning which is a winning condition). The winning histories to any of the mouths 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D are deleted).

  In the thirty-second effect form, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is within the period (1), that is, when the target of the prefetch notice exists, the specific effect B (the prefetch notice) Effect), and within the period of (2), that is, in the case where there is no object of the pre-reading notice but the object of the fluctuation result notice exists, the specific effect A (the fluctuation result notice effect) Is executed, and in the case of the period of (3), that is, when neither the target of the pre-reading notice nor the target of the fluctuation result notice exists, the specific effect C (point-giving effect) is executed.

  In this way, by selecting a specific effect that can be executed immediately at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and by executing this, the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening is appropriately improved. I try to make it. It should be noted that each type of specific effect is always executed (performed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is entered into the general winning opening. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

  In the thirty-second effect form, when the number of retained memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing. In other words, regardless of whether or not the target of the fluctuation result notice exists, the pre-read notice effect is executed. That is, in the case where “the target of the fluctuation result advance and the target of the prefetch advance notice exist”, the prefetch advance notice effect is executed with priority. The present invention is not limited to such a mode, and when the number of retained memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing, the fluctuation result notice is given. If the effect is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed at that timing, a prefetch notice effect may be executed. That is, in the case where "the target of the fluctuation result notice and the target of the pre-read notice exist," the change result notice effect may be executed with priority.

[Modifications of the 27th production form to the 32nd production form]
In the twenty-seventh effect form to the thirty-second effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect may be made different depending on the state when the game ball has won the general winning opening. Here, the “state” is a state generated as a result of a game in the gaming machine, and is a state based on the game in the gaming machine. The execution ratio of the specific effect is made different depending on the state division. For example, in the twenty-seventh effect form, when the game ball wins the general winning opening is within the symbol fluctuation period, if the game state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect is 30%. C, and if the gaming state at that time is the probable change state or the time saving state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside (2) the symbol fluctuation period, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 100% if the gaming state at that time is the normal state, If the gaming state at that time is the probability change state or the time saving state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

  Further, in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form, the type of the specific effect to be executed may be made different depending on the state when the game ball has won the general winning opening. For example, in the thirty-first effect form, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is within the symbol fluctuation period, if the number of retained memories at that time is 0, the specific effect A (fluctuation result notice) Effect), and if the number of stored memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetch notice effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the symbol fluctuation period (2), if the number of retained memories at that time is 0, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed, If the number of reserved storages at that time is one or more, the specific effect B (prefetch notice effect) is executed. According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

  As described above, the classification of the state for making the execution ratio of the specific effect or the type of the specific effect different is (1) the game state is the normal state, or (2) the game state is the probable change state or the time saving state. Or (1) the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, or (2) the number of reserved storages is 0. For example, there may be a classification of (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, or (2) a period before the reach state is established in the reach change. Also, (1) is a period during which a variable display without a reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) is a period during which a variable display with a reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, May be the division. In addition, the classification may be based on whether (1) a period during which variable display without pseudo continuous production is performed or (2) a period during when variable display with pseudo continuous production is performed. . Furthermore, even if the classification is (1) before the execution of the pseudo continuous production in the variable display with the pseudo continuous production, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo continuous production in the variable display with the pseudo continuous production. Good. Further, both the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect may be changed according to the difference between these categories.

  The specific effect C (point-giving effect) is switched in accordance with the display setting table in FIG. 19, as in the other specific effects A and B, which are executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It has become. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display setting (second position), and the display setting is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen in FIG. 20). Executable only in the case. As described above, whether or not to execute the specific effect C can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

  In addition, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is not limited to one point being awarded for one winning in the general winning opening, and two points or three points are awarded for one winning in the general winning opening. May be performed. The number of points to be awarded may be different depending on, for example, which general winning opening the gaming ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening, for example, The game state may be different depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the probability change state, or the time saving state.

  Further, in the specific effect C (point giving effect), points may be given according to factors other than winning at the general winning opening. For example, points may be given according to winning at the starting winning opening. May be given, or points may be given according to establishment of a reach state or the like.

[33rd production form]
FIG. 36 exemplifies a specific effect D (gauge update effect) as an effect in which the effect mode changes stepwise according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 36, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) refers to the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 displayed on the image display device 905 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. This is an effect that can be changed stepwise from a minimum of 0 steps to a maximum of 10 steps.

  In the example of FIG. 36 (a), the filling area 902100a (the black portion in the gauge image) in the gauge image 902100 is set to 0 level in response to the game ball winning one of the first general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. (The state where the white part occupies 10/10) and increases to one stage (the state where the black part occupies 1/10 and the white part occupies 9/10) (gauge +1). In the example of FIG. 36 (b), the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is changed from the 0th stage to the 3rd stage (black portion) in response to the game ball winning one of the first general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. Occupies 3/10, and the white portion occupies 7/10) (gauge +3).

  In this way, when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 increases in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and reaches 10 stages (the black portion in the gauge image occupies 10/10. Is in the state), the privilege is given to the player. For example, similarly to the specific effect C described above, a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 905, and the player can display a desired image or music on the image providing server or the music providing server. It can be downloaded from the providing server to the information terminal.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 905, and a special music is output as BGM during the game. You may make it possible. Alternatively, a variable result announcement effect for announcing the possibility that the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game executed at the timing when the filling area 902100a reaches the tenth stage may be a big hit symbol may be executed. At the timing when the area 902100a reaches the tenth stage, a pre-reading announcement effect may be executed to announce the possibility that the display result of the variable display relating to the special figure game which is suspended will become a big hit symbol.

  That is, the privilege provided when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels may be an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the ordinary figure game. The effect may be an effect related to a variable display result in a game or a variable display result in a general-purpose game. The effect may be an effect related to the gaming state, or may be an effect not related to the gaming state. Further, each time the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels, a different effect may be executed. Further, different effects may be executed according to a game state or the like when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches ten stages.

  When the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels, a message to the image display device 905 or voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R is notified to that effect, and thereafter, the gauge image 902100 is displayed. Is reset to the 0 stage. After the reset, the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is increased again according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening.

  In the thirty-third effect form to the thirty-seventh effect form shown in FIGS. 37 to 38, each time a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the identification extracted from the random number circuit 90124. Based on the effect execution determination random number, it is determined whether or not the level of the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 (hereinafter referred to as “gauge level”) is increased by one level. Is increased by one step from the current level. That is, each time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is performed to determine whether to increase the gauge level by one step. If a winner is won, the gauge level increases by one level.

  In the thirty-third effect form, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) a rate of 80% when the special symbol variable display is not performed (outside the symbol variation period). Increases the gauge level by one step. The effect control CPU 90120 transmits a fluctuation start command for designating a fluctuation start in the special figure game and a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a fluctuation time of a special symbol in the special figure game or a decoration pattern on the image display device 905. By receiving the information from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed.

  Note that, similarly to the specific effects A to C, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is provided. When the gauge level has reached 10 levels, a notification to that effect and a grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.) The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the thirty-third effect form and the thirty-fourth effect form, the thirty-sixth effect form, and the thirty-seventh effect form to be described later, (1) a general winning opening during a period in which a special symbol is variably displayed (in a symbol fluctuation period). The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won is that (2) the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Based on the gauge level is set lower than the rate of increase. In the period of (1), the effect corresponding to the special map game (for example, a change result announcement effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R, and therefore, the player usually receives a general prize. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased in the period (1), the interest of the specific effect may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period of (2), the effect corresponding to the special figure game that is normally the object of interest is not executed, and the gauge level is increased. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than in the period (1), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased.

  Note that, in the thirty-third effect form, the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D corresponds to (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). (2) The gauge level can be increased in a period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Is also good. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the thirty-third effect form, (1) a gauge based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period in which a special symbol variable display is being executed (within a symbol fluctuation period). The rate at which the level increases is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period (2) in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). You may set so that it may become.

[34th production form]
In the thirty-fourth effect form, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), and When the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 40%. The timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), and When the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

  The effect control CPU 90120 transmits a fluctuation start command for designating a fluctuation start in the special figure game and a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a fluctuation time of a special symbol in the special figure game or a decoration pattern on the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and until the variable display of the special symbol is completed (the fixed special symbol is displayed). The remaining time (until the stop is displayed) can be specified. For example, when the fluctuation start command and the fluctuation pattern designation command are received, the fluctuation time of the special symbol designated by the fluctuation pattern specification command is set as the value of the fluctuation time timer. The remaining time until the timer value times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the special symbol ends (until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed). Further, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed).

  When the gauge level has reached 10 levels, it is notified to that effect and provided with a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.). Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the thirty-fourth effect form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3) when the symbol is less than 10 seconds until the symbol is stopped. The gauge level is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the state of the fixed decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed than the winning state of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased in the period (3), the interest of the specific effect may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level, the player is likely to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than in the period of (3), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased.

  In the thirty-fourth production mode, when the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2), the gauge level is increased. It is possible that the gauge level is not increased in the period (3). Also, contrary to the example shown in the thirty-fourth production mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3) ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when the symbol stop is less than 10 seconds.

  In the thirty-fourth production mode, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In such a case, the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game being executed or when the unsuccessful symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the timing of the game ball winning any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2), and the decoration symbol being executed is When the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and when the display result is a lost symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%. When the timing at which the game ball wins any of the mouths 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed becomes a big hit symbol. May increase the gauge level at a rate of 30%, and when the display result is a lost pattern, the gauge level may be increased at a rate of 10%.

[35th production style]
As described above, the specific effect B has been exemplified as the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the variable display result in the held special figure game. In the specific effect B shown in FIG. 24 (b), is the start winning prize judgment result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area included in the start prize judgment result specifying command designating "big hit"? Based on whether or not, it is determined whether the effect of the prefetch notice effect is the first condition (only sound effect) or the second condition (sound effect and character effect). That is, in the pre-reading advancement effect such as the specific effect B, the variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “target fluctuation”) to be subjected to the pre-reading advance notice is not notified to the player. It has become difficult to grasp.

  It is also possible to adopt an effect for notifying the target fluctuation as the prefetch notice effect. For example, as described above, the start winning storage display area 905H includes a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the starting condition is first satisfied based on the occurrence of the start winning. Is provided. When receiving the start winning prize determination result designation command, if the command for specifying the "big hit" is received, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the display portion corresponding to the command and the display corresponding to the command specifying "outside". It is possible to execute a pending change effect that is displayed in a special mode (for example, gold) different from the region. The target variation in this case is a variable display corresponding to the display portion displayed in a special mode, and the player can grasp the remaining variable display count executed until the target variation.

  For example, if a command for designating a "big hit" is received when a start winning determination result designation command is received, a display portion corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 70%, and at a rate of 30%. The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a normal mode. On the other hand, if the command for designating “outside” is received when the start winning judgment result designation command is received, the display portion corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 95%. A display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a normal mode. As described above, when the display portion corresponding to the hold memory generated by the start winning is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning, the display portion in the special mode is displayed every time the variable display game is executed (the start condition is satisfied). Each time), and when the start condition of the variable display game (variable display which is the target of the prefetch notice) corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is satisfied, The display portion disappears from the start winning storage display area 905H. In such an embodiment, the hold change effect is executed during the period from the start winning to the start of the variable display game corresponding to the starting winning.

  That is, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied in the order in which the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the holding change effect is executed, and the display portion displayed in the special mode (the target of the holding change effect) is displayed. The display part corresponding to the normal mode (display information corresponding to the variable display hold storage that is not the target of the hold change effect) existing to the left of the variable display display information corresponding to the variable display hold storage Thus, it is possible to grasp the number of remaining variable display games until the variable display which is the target of the pending change effect is executed.

  Note that the timing for displaying the display portion in a special mode is not limited to the start winning. For example, the display portion may be displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and may be changed from the normal mode to the special mode after a predetermined effect, and the timing when the start condition is satisfied (the display mode of each display portion) May be changed from the normal mode to the special mode. In these aspects, from the timing when the display portion corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice changes from the passing state to the special mode, until the start condition of the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice is satisfied During the period, the pending change effect is being executed.

  In the thirty-fifth effect form, the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general prize port 9050A to the fourth general prize port 9050D is as follows. When there is no period (when there is no display part of the special mode in the hold change effect and it is not the execution period of the target change), the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%.

  The timing at which the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined as follows: (2) The prefetch notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count up to the target change is 2 or more. If the period is during the period (when there are two or more special figure games whose start conditions are satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect), a ratio of 40% Increases the gauge level by one step.

  Further, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (3) the prefetch notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change becomes 1 (When there is one special figure game whose start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect), the gauge is set at a rate of 20%. The level increases by one level.

  In addition, when the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of (4) the prefetch notice effect (in the change in hold change effect). In the case where the variable display based on the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion in the special mode is being executed), the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

  When the gauge level has reached 10 levels, it is notified to that effect and provided with a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.). Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the thirty-fifth effect form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when the number of remaining variable displays up to the target change is two or more is (3) the target change. Is the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count is 1; (4) When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 0 (execution of the target change) During the period), the gauge level is set to be higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target fluctuation to be executed next than in the winning state of the game ball to the general winning opening. Also, during the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target variation currently being executed than in the winning state of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased in the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific effect may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, by increasing the gauge level, the player is likely to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than in the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased.

  In the thirty-fifth effect form, when the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2), the gauge level is increased. It is possible that the gauge level is not increased in the period of (3) or (4). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 35th effect form, (2) the rate of increase in the gauge level when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the remaining variable display until the target change. The rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of times of display is 1 may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when (4) the target variation is being executed.

  In the thirty-fifth effect mode, the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the same as any of the common periods ((2), (3), and (4)). In the case of (i), the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the target variation and the case where the unsuccessful symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the variable display result in the target variation is obtained when the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2). The gauge level is increased at a rate of 70% when a big hit symbol is obtained, and the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40% when a variable display result is a lost symbol. When the timing at which the game ball wins any of the winning openings 9050D is the period of (3), if the variable display result in the target change becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30%, When the variable display result is a lost symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 20%, and the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening are set. When the timing at which the game ball wins any of the winning openings 9050D is the period of (4), if the variable display result in the target change becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 15%, If the variable display result is a lost symbol, the gauge level may be increased at a rate of 10%.

[36th production form]
In the thirty-sixth production mode, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) a period in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (2) the variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without the reach effect is performed. In this case, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 40%.

  Further, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (3) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is being executed, and If the period is before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (4) the variable display accompanied by the reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed and the reach state is set. When the period is after the establishment, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

  When the gauge level has reached 10 levels, it is notified to that effect and provided with a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.). Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the thirty-sixth production form, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening before the reach state in the reach fluctuation is changed, (4) the ratio after the reach state in the reach fluctuation is general The gauge level is set to be higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the winning opening. In the period (4), the player is more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed after the reach state is established, rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased in the period (4), the interest of the specific effect may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the reach state is not established, the player is likely to be interested in the gauge level by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than in the period of (4), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased.

  In the thirty-sixth production mode, when the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (3), the gauge level is increased. If possible, the gauge level may not be increased during the period (4). Also, contrary to the example shown in the thirty-sixth production mode, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is being executed and before the reach state is established is (4) ) The gauge level may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases during the period in which the reach fluctuation is being executed and the period after the reaching of the reach state.

[37th production style]
In the thirty-seventh effect form shown in FIG. 38, the rate at which the gauge level is increased differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings has been won. When the timing at which the game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). , The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%.

  In addition, when the timing at which the game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%.

  When the gauge level has reached 10 levels, it is notified to that effect and provided with a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.). Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the thirty-seventh effect form, the rate of increase in the gauge level is different between (1) during the symbol fluctuation period and (2) outside the symbol fluctuation period. The rate at which the gauge level increases is different between a case where a game ball wins at 9050C and a case where a game ball wins at the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Since the rate at which the gauge level increases according to the general winning opening in which the game ball has won is different, the player becomes interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won and improves the interest. be able to.

  For example, the first general prize provided closer to the end of the game area 9010 than the prize of the game ball to the second general prize port 9050B and the third general prize port 9050C provided near the center of the game area 9010. When it is difficult to win game balls in the mouth 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Is set to be higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, thereby increasing the interest in winning in the general winning opening, which is more difficult to win. It is good to raise it.

  In the thirty-seventh production mode, the gauge level can be increased when the game ball has won the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, and the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening can be provided. When a game ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. Also, contrary to the example shown in the thirty-seventh effect form, the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening 9050B. Alternatively, the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C may be set to be lower.

[38th production style]
In the thirty-eighth effect form to the forty-second effect form shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, it is not determined whether or not to execute the specific effect based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124. Further, in the thirty-eighth effect form to the forty-second effect form, the gauge level that increases in response to one winning in the general winning opening is not limited to one level. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the gauge level may be increased by three levels in accordance with one winning in the general winning opening.

  In the thirty-eighth production mode, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The gauge level increases by one level (gauge +1), and (2) the gauge level increases by three levels during a period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increases (gauge +3).

  When the gauge level has reached 10 levels, it is notified to that effect and provided with a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.). Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the thirty-eightth production mode, and in the thirty-ninth, fourteenth, and forty-second production modes described later, (1) a general winning opening during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The number of steps of the gauge level that increases based on the winning of the game ball in (2) is that the game ball has won in the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period). It is set to be less than the number of gauge level steps that increase based on. In the period of (1), the effect corresponding to the special map game (for example, a change result announcement effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R, and therefore, the player usually receives a general prize. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased in the period (1), the interest of the specific effect may be spoiled. On the other hand, during the period of (2), the effect corresponding to the special map game which is normally the object of interest is not executed preferentially. Is in a situation where it is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than in the period (1), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased.

  Note that, in the thirty-eighth production mode, the timing at which a game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is performed (symbol variation). (In the period), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of change by one step is 80%), and (2) the period in which the special symbol is not variably displayed ( If it is outside the symbol fluctuation period), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps may be, for example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%). Also, contrary to the example shown in the thirty-eighth production mode, (1) a gauge based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period in which a special symbol variable display is being executed (within a symbol fluctuation period). The number of steps at which the level increases is greater than the number of steps at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the gaming ball has won a general winning opening during the period in which (2) the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). May be set to increase.

  In addition, it is assumed that there are cases where benefits of different values are provided as benefits provided when the gauge level reaches 10 levels. For example, it is assumed that when the gauge level reaches ten levels, a two-dimensional code that can download only an image is displayed, and a two-dimensional code that can download an image and music is displayed. At this time, the latter has a greater benefit value than the former. The number of steps at which the gauge level increases may indicate the magnitude of the privilege value provided when the gauge level reaches ten steps. For example, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). If the privilege value is small, the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of change by one step is 80%). If the privilege value is large, the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. The rate of increase is, for example, 40% (the rate of change by one step is 60%). (2) When the special value is small during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol change period) For example, the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is set to, for example, 50% (the rate at which the level is changed by one level is 50%). Ratio, for example 80% to above increase (percentage of changing one step 20%) may be.

[39th production style]
In the thirty-ninth production mode, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) a period in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by three levels (gauge +3). The timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), and When the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level increases by two levels (gauge +2). The timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), and When the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level increases by one step (gauge +1).

  When the gauge level has reached 10 levels, it is notified to that effect and provided with a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.). Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the thirty-ninth production form, (2) the number of steps of the gauge level which increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3) less than 10 seconds before the symbol is stopped. It is set to be higher than the number of steps of the gauge level which is increased based on the occasion where the game ball has won the general winning opening. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the state of the fixed decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed than the winning state of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased in the period of (3), the interest of the specific effect may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the finalized decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level a lot, the player is likely to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than in the period (3), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased.

  In the thirty-ninth production mode, if the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. If the rate of increase is, for example, 80% (the rate of change by one step is 20%), and during the period of (3), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of change by one step) May be 80%). In contrast to the example shown in the thirty-ninth production mode, (2) the number of steps at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is ( 3) It may be set to be smaller than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when the symbol stop is less than 10 seconds.

  In the thirty-ninth production mode, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In such a case, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on whether the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game being executed, or the case where the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the timing of the game ball winning any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2), and the decorative symbol being executed is When the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by three levels, and when the display result is a lost symbol, the gauge level is increased by two levels, while the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening If the timing at which the game ball wins any of the winning openings 9050D is the period of (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is set to two levels. The gauge level may be increased by one step when the display result is a lost symbol.

[40th production style]
In the fortieth production mode, the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general prize port 9050A to the fourth general prize port 9050D is determined as follows: (1) The prefetch notice effect is not executed and the target fluctuation is also executed. When there is no period (when there is no display portion of the special mode in the pending change effect and it is not the execution period of the target change), the gauge level is increased by four levels (gauge + 4).

  The timing at which the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined as follows: (2) The prefetch notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count up to the target change is 2 or more. If the time period is during the period (when there are two or more special figure games whose start conditions are satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect), the gauge level is 3 Increase by steps (gauge +3).

  Further, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (3) the prefetch notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change becomes 1 (When there is one special figure game in which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect), the gauge level increases by two steps. (Gauge +2).

  In addition, when the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the (4) prefetch notice effect (in the change in the hold change effect) In the case where the variable display based on the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion in the special mode is being executed (when the variable display is being executed), the gauge level increases by one level (gauge +1).

  When the gauge level has reached 10 levels, it is notified to that effect and provided with a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.). Accordingly, the winning history (including at least three or more winning histories for the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is deleted.

  In the fortieth production mode, (2) the number of gauge level steps that increase based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening when the number of remaining variable displays until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the target change (4) When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 0 (the target change) Is set to be greater than the number of levels of the gauge level that increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the execution period. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target fluctuation to be executed next than in the winning state of the game ball to the general winning opening. Also, during the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target variation currently being executed than in the winning state of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot in the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific effect may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, by increasing the gauge level a lot, the player is in a situation where the player is easily interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than in the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased.

  In the fortieth production mode, when the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. The rate of increase is, for example, 80% (the rate of change by one step is 20%). In the case of (3) and (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (only one step). The rate of change may be 80%). Also, contrary to the example shown in the fortieth production mode, (2) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the number of remaining variable displays until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the remaining number of steps until the target change. The number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the variable display count is 1 may be set to be smaller than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when (4) the target variation is in the execution period.

  Further, in the fortieth production mode, the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the same as any of the common periods ((2), (3), and (4)). In the case of (i), the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the target variation and the case where the unsuccessful symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the variable display result in the target variation is obtained when the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (2). The gauge level is increased by four levels when a big hit symbol is obtained, and the gauge level is increased by three levels when the variable display result is a lost symbol, and is selected from any of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D. In the case where the timing when the game ball wins is during the period of (3), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by three steps, and the variable display result is a lost symbol. , The gauge level is increased by two stages, and the game is played in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When the ball winning timing is the period of (4), if the variable display result in the target variation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by two steps, and if the variable display result is a lost symbol, The gauge level may be increased by one step.

[41st production style]
In the forty-first effect form, the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). ), The gauge level is increased by four levels (gauge +4). The timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (2) the variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without the reach effect is performed. In this case, the gauge level is increased by three levels (gauge +3).

  Further, the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (3) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is being executed, and If the period is before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by two steps (gauge + 3), and (4) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is being executed and the reach state is established. In the subsequent period, the gauge level increases by one step (gauge +1).

  When the gauge level has reached 10 levels, it is notified to that effect and provided with a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.). Accordingly, the winning history (including at least three or more winning histories for the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is deleted.

  In the forty-first production mode, the number of steps of the gauge level that increases based on the fact that the gaming ball has won the general winning opening before the reach state is established in the (3) reach fluctuation, and (4) after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. The number of gauge levels is set to be greater than the number of gauge levels that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed after the reach state is established, rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased in the period of (4), the interest of the specific effect may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the reach state is not established, by increasing the gauge level a lot, the player is in a situation where the player is likely to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than in the period of (4), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased.

  In the forty-first production mode, if the timing at which the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (3), the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. The rate of increase is, for example, 80% (the rate of change by one step is 20%). If the period is (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of change by one step). May be 80%). Also, contrary to the example shown in the forty-first effect form, (3) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is being executed and before the reach state is established is ( 4) It may be set such that the number of steps in which the gauge level increases is a period during which the reach fluctuation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[42nd production form]
In the forty-second effect form shown in FIG. 40, the number of steps for increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings has been won. When the timing at which the game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) a period in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). , The gauge level increases by one step (gauge +1). On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). , The gauge level is increased by two levels (gauge +2).

  In addition, when the timing at which the game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). , The gauge level is increased by three levels (gauge +3). On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). , The gauge level increases by four steps (gauge +4).

  When the gauge level has reached 10 levels, it is notified to that effect and provided with a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.). Accordingly, the winning history (including at least three or more winning histories for the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is deleted.

  In the forty-second effect form, the number of gauge levels to be increased is different between (1) during the symbol fluctuation period and (2) outside the symbol fluctuation period, and the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning The number of stages of increasing gauge levels differs between when a game ball wins in the mouth 9050C and when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. By increasing the number of gauge levels to be increased according to the general winning opening where the game ball has won, the player will be interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won and improve interest. Can be done.

  For example, the first general prize provided closer to the end of the game area 9010 than the prize of the game ball to the second general prize port 9050B and the third general prize port 9050C provided near the center of the game area 9010. When it is difficult to win the game ball to the mouth 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the gauge level increases when the game ball wins to the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. By setting the number to be greater than the number of steps at which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, the winning in the general winning opening which is more difficult to win is improved. It is good to make it interesting.

  In the forty-sixth production mode, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%). %), And when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%). Is also good. Also, contrary to the example shown in the forty-second effect form, the number of steps at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening. When the game ball wins the 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C, the number of steps at which the gauge level increases may be set to be smaller than the number of steps.

[Modifications of the 33rd production form to the 42nd production form]
In the 33rd production form to the 37th production form, a section serving as a reference for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level, and in the 38th production form to the 42nd production form, the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased is determined. The divisions used as references are not limited to the above examples. For example, the section for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level and the section for determining the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased include (1) whether the gaming state is the normal state, and (2) whether the gaming state is the normal state. It may be a classification of whether it is a probable change state or a time saving state. Further, the classification may be based on (1) whether the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved storages is 0. In addition, the classification may be based on whether (1) a period during which variable display without pseudo continuous production is being executed or (2) a period during which variable display with pseudo continuous production is being executed. . Furthermore, even if the classification is (1) before the execution of the pseudo continuous production in the variable display with the pseudo continuous production, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo continuous production in the variable display with the pseudo continuous production. Good.

  Note that the gauge image 902100 is displayed even when the filling area 902100a is in the minimum 0 stage, but a condition for displaying the gauge image 902100 may be provided. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when the gaming state is the normal state, and the effect of increasing the gauge level can be executed. The effect of increasing the level may not be executed).

  The display of the gauge image 902100 and the effect of increasing the gauge level are performed during the period in which the predetermined effect is being performed, and may not be performed during the period in which the predetermined effect is not being performed. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed only when the background image of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 905 is a predetermined background image (a predetermined stage stage) when a game ball wins a general winning opening. Or the gauge level may be increased. Further, only during a period in which the display portion in the start winning storage display area 905H is displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, white indicating that there is a possibility of changing to a special mode), the game ball is won in the general winning opening. Then, the gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the simultaneous effect at the timing when an RTC (real time clock) (not shown) provided on the effect control board 9012 reaches a predetermined time (simultaneous execution is performed when a predetermined time is reached in the same type of gaming machine). In the case of performing the effect, the gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased when the game ball wins the general winning opening during the execution of the simultaneous effect.

  When increasing the gauge level, a predetermined effect sound may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. At this time, a different effect sound may be output in accordance with the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased. Thus, the volume of the effect sound may be increased.

  In addition, it is preferable to output an effect sound for increasing the gauge level at a different volume from the effect sound related to the special figure game or the effect sound related to the ordinary figure game. For example, the volume of the effect sound for increasing the gauge level may be higher than the volume of the effect sound related to the ordinary figure game, but lower than the volume of the effect sound related to the special figure game. Further, the volume of the effect sound for increasing the gauge level may be higher than the volume of the effect sound related to the special figure game, but lower than the volume of the error sound for notifying the gaming machine error.

  Further, the volume of the effect sound for increasing the gauge level may be different depending on the state. For example, the volume in the normal state may be higher than the volume in the probable change state or the time saving state.

  In addition, the specific effect in which the effect mode changes stepwise according to the winning in the general winning opening is not limited to the specific effect D in which the gauge level is changed, and the displayed character mode is stepwise. May change (for example, the size of the displayed character increases, or the items owned by the character change), and the characters selectable by the player gradually increase. Is also good. In addition, the form and position of the movable role object may change stepwise, or the emission color of the gaming effect lamp 909 may change stepwise. Further, the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R may change stepwise.

  The specific effect D (gauge update effect) is switched in accordance with the display setting table of FIG. 19, as in the other specific effects A to C, which are executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It has become. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display setting (second position), and the display setting is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen in FIG. 20). Executable only in the case. As described above, whether or not to execute the specific effect D can also reflect the intention of the game arcade or the player.

[43rd production style]
The specific effects A to D described above are all effects performed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, but the specific effect is executed when the game ball does not win the general winning opening. It may be. For example, when the game ball does not win any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D during the 10-minute game period, as shown in FIG. The special effect E that displays an image imitating the form of a general winning opening and an annunciation image 902200 including the characters “No general winning” on the image display device 905 can be executed.

  As described above, the specific effect is not limited to an effect performed based on a game ball winning in a general winning opening, but an effect performed based on a game ball not winning in a general winning opening (general winning). An effect that indicates difficulty in winning a prize in the mouth). That is, the specific effect may be an effect related to a game event of winning a game ball to a general winning opening (an effect executed when a game event occurs or a game event does not occur).

  In the forty-third effect form shown in FIG. 42, effect control CPU 90120 stores a non-winning determination timer for determining a period during which a game ball is not winning in a general winning opening. When the value of the non-winning determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 90120 issues a start winning opening designation command, a general winning opening from the game control microcomputer 90100. When either the designated command or the special winning opening winning command is received, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started. If the general winning opening designation command is received before the non-winning determination timer times out (10 minutes after the timer is set), 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning determination timer and again. Start the timer.

  On the other hand, when the non-prize-winning determination timer has timed out by not receiving the general winning opening designation command until the non-winning determination timer has timed out, the notification image 902200 is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. The specific effect E to be displayed is executed. When the specific effect E is executed, 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E (display of the notification image 902200) is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the non-winning determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and executes the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening winning command once for a predetermined period (for example, one minute). If no game has been received, a game end determination is made to determine that the game has ended, and the updating of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped (the timer value is not updated). When the update of the non-prize-winning timer is temporarily stopped, the processing (specifically, execution of the specific effect E) due to the timeout of the non-win-win determination timer is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed during the period in which the game is not performed (the execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the updating of the non-prize-winning timer is not suspended, the effect control CPU 90120 performs processing by the timeout of the non-winning-determination timer (specifically, in response to the detection of the timeout when the timer value becomes 0). (The execution of the specific effect E). Then, in a state where the update of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives any of the starting winning opening specifying command, the general winning opening specifying command, and the big winning opening winning command, Then, the updating of the non-winning determination timer is restarted.

  In other words, the non-prize-winning timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (the game end determination is not made), and is performed for 10 minutes during the period in which the player is playing the game. A timeout occurs when the number of winnings to the winning opening becomes 0 (the effect control CPU 90120 detects the timeout). As a result, when the player is playing a game, the special effect E is executed if no winning in the general winning opening occurs for 10 minutes.

  In the above-described effect form, whether or not a player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being shot toward the game area 9010. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of a game ball in the game area 9010, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game according to whether or not the launch detection sensor has detected a game ball. It may be. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game in accordance with whether or not the hit ball operation handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the firing motor of the hit ball firing device is operating). Good.

  As described above, when no prize is generated in the general winning opening during a predetermined period (a game period of 10 minutes) even though the player is playing a game, the specific effect E is executed, Notifies that no prize has been entered into the general prize port. By this notification, the player can grasp that no prize has been generated in the general winning opening, and can use it as a reference (for example, a judgment material for selecting a platform) when playing the game. In addition, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 in which the specific effect E is executed (or in which the specific effect E is frequently executed), the game nail is set so that the winning frequency to the general winning opening becomes higher. It is possible to take measures such as carrying out maintenance.

  In addition, when no prize has been generated in the general winning opening despite the player playing a game, the specific effect E is executed. When no prize has been generated in the general winning opening, the non-prize-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped (by preventing the effect control CPU 90120 from executing a process based on the timeout of the non-prize-winning timer). The execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

  The specific effect E may also be executed when it is determined that no prize has been made to the general winning opening due to the player not playing a game. The specific effect E may be executed at a lower rate than when it is determined that a prize is not generated in the general prize port even though the player plays a game.

[44th production form]
The specific effect E is not limited to a notification that no prize is generated in the general winning opening within a predetermined period (the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than 1). The fact that the number of winnings to the winning opening is less than a predetermined number may be notified so as to be specified. In the forty-fourth effect form, effect control CPU 90120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening in a predetermined period. When the value of the winning number determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 90120 issues a start winning port designation command, a general winning port from the game control microcomputer 90100. When any of the designated command and the special winning opening winning command is received, 30 minutes is set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started. At this time, the value of the winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122 is set to 0. Then, every time a general winning opening designation command is received during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes from the timer setting), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter area.

  Then, if the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the specific effect E within a predetermined period. Is notified that the number of winnings is less than a predetermined number, and / or the number of winnings within a predetermined period is notified. For example, a message that “the number of general prizes in 30 minutes is less than 3” and / or a message that “there is only one general prize in 30 minutes” are displayed on the image display device 905.

  When the special effect E is executed, 30 minutes is set again as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the winning number determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time since the specific effect E was started. On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determining timer times out is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the specific effect E is not executed, and 30 minutes is set again as a value, and the timer is started again.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and executes the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening winning command once for a predetermined period (for example, one minute). If the game has not been received, a game end determination for judging that the game has ended is made, and updating of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped (to prevent the timer value from being updated). When the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped, the processing (specifically, execution of the specific effect E) due to the timeout of the winning number determination timer is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed during the period in which the game is not performed (the execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). Note that when the update of the winning number determination timer is not suspended, the effect control CPU 90120 performs processing by the time-out of the winning number determination timer (specifically, in response to the detection of the time-out when the timer value becomes 0). (The execution of the specific effect E). Then, in a state where the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended, the effect control CPU 90120 receives any of the starting winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening winning command. Then, the update of the winning number determination timer is restarted.

  That is, the winning number determination timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (the determination of the end of the game is not made). Then, a timeout occurs (the effect control CPU 90120 detects the timeout). At the time of the timeout, the specific effect E is executed only when the number of winnings in the general winning opening during the 30-minute game period is less than a predetermined number.

  In the above-described effect form, whether or not a player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being shot toward the game area 9010. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of a game ball in the game area 9010, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game according to whether or not the launch detection sensor has detected a game ball. It may be. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game in accordance with whether or not the hit ball operation handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the firing motor of the hit ball firing device is operating). Good.

  As described above, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period (the 30-minute game period) is less than the predetermined number even though the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed. Thus, it is notified that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. By this notification, the player can grasp that the frequency of winning in the general winning opening is low, and can use the information as a reference (for example, judgment material for selecting a platform) when playing the game. In addition, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 in which the specific effect E is executed (or in which the specific effect E is frequently executed), the game nail is set so that the winning frequency to the general winning opening becomes higher. It is possible to take measures such as carrying out maintenance.

  Further, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in a predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number even though the player is playing a game, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is performed by the player. If the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number due to the absence of the winning number, the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped (the effect control CPU 90120 executes a process based on the timeout of the number of winnings determination timer). By doing so, the execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

  The specific effect E may also be executed when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number due to the player not playing the game. In this case, the specific production is performed at a lower rate than when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number despite the fact that the player is playing a game. E may be executed.

[45th production style]
In the forty-third effect form and the forty-fourth effect form, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time is determined. Although the specific effect E is executed irrespective of this, the execution ratio of the specific effect E may be made different depending on the state at the time of this determination. In the forty-fifth effect form, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, timing when the winning number determination timer times out). However, (1) the specific effect E is executed in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is not executed in the probable change state or the time saving state.

  The gaming state at the timing when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is determined to be smaller than the predetermined number (timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1). ) When in the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%. (2) When in the probable change state or the time saving state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 20%. You may. As described above, the specific effect E may be executed at different rates according to the gaming state when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is determined to be smaller than the predetermined number.

[46th production style]
In the forty-third effect form and the forty-fourth effect form, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time is determined. Although the specific effect E is executed in a common mode regardless of the above, the effect mode of the specific effect E may be made different depending on the state when this determination is made. In the forty-sixth production mode, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, timing when the winning number determination timer times out). However, when (1) the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + voice output), and (2) when the specific effect E is the It is executed in two modes (only image display).

  Specifically, the first aspect of the specific effect E is, in addition to the image display device 905, an image display that indicates that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in a predetermined period is smaller than a predetermined number, and a notification to that effect. This is a mode in which sound is output by outputting sounds from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the second mode of the specific effect E is a mode in which only information is displayed by image display and notification is not performed by voice output.

  The gaming state at the timing when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is determined to be smaller than the predetermined number (timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1). In the case of the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode at a rate of, for example, 80% (performed in the second mode at a rate of 20%). The specific effect E may be executed in the first mode at a rate of, for example, 20% (executed in the second mode at a rate of 80%). In this manner, the specific effect E in a different mode may be executed according to the gaming state when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is determined to be smaller than the predetermined number.

[Modifications of the 43rd production form to the 46th production form]
The specific effect E executed in the forty-third effect form to the forty-sixth effect form is similar to the other specific effects A to D executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and is the display setting table of FIG. Is switched according to the execution. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display setting (second position), and the display setting is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen in FIG. 20). Executable only in the case. As described above, whether or not to execute the specific effect E can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

  For example, when the player does not want to execute the specific effect E on the game hall, the display switch 9032 is switched to a non-display setting (first position), so that the specific effect E is not executed regardless of the player setting. . With such a configuration, the intention of the game hall is also reflected with priority on whether or not to execute the specific effect E, that is, whether or not to notify the difficulty of winning in the general winning opening. Can be done.

  Further, the value of the non-winning determination timer in the forty-third production mode, and the value of the winning number determination timer and the value of the winning number counter area in the forty-fourth production mode are stored in the RAM 90122. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, it is not backed up at the time of disconnection, and is deleted accordingly. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is restarted, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd production mode and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the 44th production mode are both invalid. The value of the timer is not referred until a predetermined time is set by the effect control CPU 90120. In addition, the initial value of the winning number counter area in the forty-fourth effect mode becomes 0 when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is restarted.

  In this way, with the stop of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is deleted without being backed up, and when the power supply is restarted, the addition starts from 0 again. become. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a control burden in which a backup means at the time of a power failure must be provided.

  As in the forty-fifth effect form and the forty-sixth effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect E or the division for making the effect mode of the specific effect E different is (1) whether the gaming state is the normal state or (2) The game state is not limited to the probability change state or the time saving state. For example, it may be classified into (1) whether the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved storages is 0. Further, a classification may be made as to whether (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, or (2) the period before the reach state is established in the reach change. Also, (1) is a period during which a variable display without a reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) is a period during which a variable display with a reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, May be the division. In addition, the classification may be based on whether (1) a period during which variable display without pseudo continuous production is performed or (2) a period during when variable display with pseudo continuous production is performed. . Furthermore, even if the classification is (1) before the execution of the pseudo continuous production in the variable display with the pseudo continuous production, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo continuous production in the variable display with the pseudo continuous production. Good. Further, both the execution ratio of the specific effect E and the mode of the specific effect E may be changed according to the difference between these categories.

  The specific effect E executed in the forty-third effect form to the forty-sixth effect form is executed when the number of winnings to the general winning opening during a predetermined game period is smaller than a predetermined number. The present invention is not limited to this mode, and only the specific general winning opening among the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is set to the predetermined general winning opening in a predetermined period. When the number is smaller, the specific effect E may be executed. For example, only the second general prize port 9050B and the third general prize port 9050C, which have higher game ball prize frequencies than the first general prize port 9050A and the fourth general prize port 9050D, are provided as general prize ports in a predetermined game period. The number of winnings may be counted, and the specific effect E may be executed when the counted number of winnings is smaller than a predetermined number.

  In the 43rd to 46th production modes, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening within a certain period of time (10 minutes or 30 minutes) is smaller than a predetermined number, the specific production E is executed. However, the period for determining the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not limited to this. The period may be defined by the number of times the special figure game is executed, and may be, for example, a period in which the variable display related to the special figure game is executed 100 times. Further, the period may be a period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the present time, or may be a period defined by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). In addition, the period may be a period in which the game state is controlled to a predetermined game state, for example, a period in which the game state is controlled to a normal state (a period in which the game is played by left-handing), a probability change state, or a time reduction. It may be a period in which the state is controlled (a period in which the game is played by right-handing).

  Further, the following method may be used as a method of determining whether or not the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening in a predetermined period is smaller than a predetermined number.

(A) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening with respect to the predetermined number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is smaller than the predetermined number. While the firing motor provided in the hit ball firing device is being driven, approximately 100 game balls are fired in the game area 9010 in one minute. Therefore, for example, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening for the number of hit balls of 1000 shots (equivalent to a game period of 10 minutes) is smaller than a predetermined number, the specific effect E may be executed. . In addition, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls shot into the gaming area 9010 is calculated, and when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio, the specific effect E is executed. You may.

  In addition, the ratio of the winning number to the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired in the game area 9010 is different depending on whether the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio or higher than the predetermined ratio. A specific effect may be executed. For example, when the ratio of the number of winning balls to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is low, the character A appears and the frequency of winning to the general winning opening is low. Informing that the level is the level, the character B appears when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is a medium ratio higher than the low ratio. To notify that the winning frequency to the general winning opening is medium level, and the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired in the game area 9010 is higher than the medium ratio. In the case of the ratio, the character C may appear to notify that the winning frequency to the general winning opening is a high level.

(B) A determination may be made as to whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening in a predetermined period is smaller than a predetermined number. For example, when 10 game balls are paid out as a prize ball when a game ball wins in the general prize port, the number of prize balls paid out according to the prize in the general prize port in a 30-minute game period. If the number is less than 30 (three winnings), the specific effect E may be executed. Also, whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening with respect to a predetermined number of hit balls (for example, 1000 shots) fired in the game area 9010 is smaller than a predetermined number. May be determined, and a ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize in the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired in the game area 9010 is calculated, and the ratio is determined to be a predetermined value. When the ratio is lower than the ratio, the specific effect E may be executed. In addition, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize in the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired in the game area 9010 is lower than a predetermined ratio, The specific effect in a different mode may be executed.

  As described above, it may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning in the general winning opening is smaller than a predetermined number. Note that such a form can be applied to a case where a different number of prize balls are paid out according to a general winning opening in which a game ball has won.

(C) For a predetermined winning number (for example, 100) to the starting winning opening, it may be determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening is smaller than a predetermined number (for example, 5), The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, for a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10000) paid out according to the winning in the starting winning opening, the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening is larger than the predetermined number. May be determined as to whether or not the number of prize balls paid out according to a prize in the general winning opening, relative to the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize in the starting winning opening. The ratio of numbers may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. Also, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the prize to the general winning opening to the number of prize balls paid out according to the prize to the start winning opening is lower than a predetermined ratio. The specific effect in a different mode may be executed depending on whether the ratio is equal to or more than the predetermined ratio.

  Further, for example, the total number of awarded balls in a predetermined period paid out when the gaming state is the normal state (the number of awarded balls paid out according to the winning in the starting winning opening and the number of winnings in the general winning opening) Calculated as the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize in the general winning opening to the total number of prize balls paid out and paid out), and when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio, The specific effect E may be executed. Moreover, you may make it execute the specific effect of a different aspect according to the ratio.

(D) A determination may be made as to whether or not the number of winnings at the general winning opening for a predetermined consumption amount (for example, 1000 yen) in the gaming machine is smaller than a predetermined number (for example, two times). Alternatively, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the consumption amount of the gaming machine may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In such a form, different predetermined numbers (for example, 2 times for 4 yen, 8 times for 1 yen) according to the unit price of lending (for example, 4 yen or 1 yen) of the game medium used for the gaming machine. Or a different predetermined ratio (for example, 2 times / 1000 yen for 4 yen, 8 times / 1000 yen for 1 yen). In addition, a specific effect in a different mode is executed depending on whether the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the consumption amount of the gaming machine is lower than a predetermined ratio or higher than a predetermined ratio. You may make it.

[47th production form]
In the forty-seventh effect form shown in FIG. 45, a character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening, and during the period in which the character is displayed, the first starting winning opening is entered. Effective starting winning of a game ball (that is, winning of a game ball to the first starting winning port in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning port is less than the upper limit value) and game to the second starting winning port Based on the occurrence of any one of the effective start winning of the ball (that is, the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value). In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a holding change effect is executed to change the display portion corresponding to the held variable display game including the variable display game based on the generated effective start winning from the normal mode to the special mode. .

  Note that, based on the occurrence of the effective start prize, the effect control CPU 90120 holds the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize in a special mode from the beginning without passing through the normal mode. A change effect may be executed. For example, when a new effective starting prize occurs, a displayed part corresponding to a variable display game corresponding to the new effective starting prize is performed in response to the displayed character performing an action such as raising a wand. May be displayed in a special mode instead of the normal mode (from the beginning of the display of the hold information, the state in which the hold information of the special mode corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is finally satisfied exists).

  Here, in the forty-seventh effect form, and in the forty-eighth effect form and forty-ninth effect form to be described later, a random number circuit 90124 is provided each time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening. From the random number for character determination. Based on the extracted random numbers for character determination, whether or not a character should appear and, if a character should appear, which of the characters A to C should appear in the character determination table of FIG. Determine at the indicated rate.

  Note that the effect control CPU 90120 may extract the character determining random number only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting a character determination random number on the condition that the game is not controlled to the big hit gaming state, it is possible to restrict the character from appearing during the period of being controlled to the big hit gaming state. . Further, during the period in which the variable display game is being executed, the character determination random numbers are not extracted after the reach state is established, so that it is possible to prevent the character from appearing after the reach state is established.

  In the example of FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the character A appears at a rate of 10% when receiving a general winning opening designation command for designating a winning in the first general winning opening 9050A, It is determined that the character B appears at a rate of 30%, and that the character C appears at a rate of 60%. Further, when a general winning opening designation command for designating a winning in the second general winning opening 9050B is received, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 50%, and a character A appears at a rate of 35%. The character B is determined to appear at a rate of 10%, and the character C is determined to appear at a rate of 5%.

  Further, when CPU 90120 for effect control receives a general winning opening designation command designating winning in third third winning opening 9050C, it determines that none of the characters appear at a rate of 90%, and determines that 10% of the characters do not appear. It is determined that the character C appears at a ratio. Further, when a general winning opening designation command for designating a winning in the fourth general winning opening 9050D is received, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 75%, and a character C appears at a rate of 25%. I decide to let it.

  That is, in this example, when a game ball wins in one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left gaming region 9010A, the third game provided in the right gaming region 9010B is provided. A character appears at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in one of the general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The player shoots a game ball in the left game area 9010A when the game state is the normal state, and shoots a game ball in the right game area 9010B when the game state is the change state or the time saving state. Characters will appear at a higher rate than in the state or the time saving state.

  In the forty-seventh effect form to the forty-ninth effect form, a specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect)) is established based on the fact that a predetermined condition (effective start winning, reach state) is established during the period in which the character is displayed. , Specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect due to dialogue)) is executed, so in these effect modes, when the game state is the normal state, the game state is higher than when the game state is the probable change state or the time reduction state. A specific effect can be executed at a ratio.

  As described above, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous as compared with the probability change state and the time saving state, and the player is in a state of low interest in the game, for example, the variable display of the special figure game. By increasing the frequency of execution, interest is improved. On the other hand, the probability change state and the time saving state are advantageous compared to the normal state, and the player's interest in the game, for example, the variable display of the special figure game is high, so that the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are performed. If it is still high, it may detract from interest. Therefore, in the probability change state and the time saving state, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are set to be low.

  In addition, without being limited to the example shown in FIG. 43, even when a game ball wins at the same general winning opening, the appearance ratio of the character may be changed according to the game state. In the case where a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B, a character appears at a rate of 50%. However, when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B in the probable change state and the time saving state, 10%. May appear at the ratio of.

  Further, the character may appear only in the normal state, and may not appear in the probable change state and the time saving state. As described above, to make the execution ratio of the effect in one state different from the execution ratio of the effect in the other state, the effect can be executed only in one state, and the effect is not executed in the other state. Shall be included. Also, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 43, the appearance ratio of the character in the probable state and the normal state may be higher than the appearance ratio of the character in the normal state.

  In the example of FIG. 43, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A, a character appears at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B. I have. Further, when a game ball wins at the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a character appears at a higher rate than when a game ball wins at the third general winning opening 9050C. In this embodiment, when a game ball is fired in the left game area 9010A, the frequency of the game ball winning in the second general winning port 9050B is higher than that in the first general winning port 9050A, and the game ball is shot in the right game area 9010B. When a game ball is fired, the frequency of the game ball winning in the third general winning opening 9050C is higher than that in the fourth general winning opening 9050D. That is, when a game ball wins at a general winning opening where game balls are hard to win, a character appears at a higher rate than when a game ball wins at a general winning opening where game balls easily win. Conversely, when a game ball wins in a general winning opening where game balls are easy to win, a higher percentage of characters than when a game ball wins in a general winning opening where game balls are hard to win. You may make it appear.

  In the example of FIG. 43, the characters that may be displayed when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B, in which the game ball wins frequently in the normal state, are: Characters A to C, but may be displayed when a game ball wins at the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D where the frequency of winning the game ball in the probability change state and the time saving state is high. Is a character C only. In the probable state and the time saving state, which are gaming states having a higher level of entertainment than in the normal state, a situation occurs in which a character appears but the display period of the character elapses without a predetermined condition being satisfied. Since it is conceivable that the character C may be lowered, only the character C having the longest display period can be displayed.

  In addition, without being limited to the example shown in FIG. 43, even when a game ball wins at the same general winning opening, the character that appears may differ depending on the game state. 2 If the game ball wins in the general winning opening 9050B, the characters A to C may be displayed. Only C may be displayed. Also, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 43, the number of characters that may be displayed in the probable state and the normal state is set to be larger than the number of characters that may be displayed in the normal state. You may.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a display period of each character displayed on the image display device 905. The characters A to C are all displayed on the image display device 905 immediately at the timing when the character to be displayed is determined based on the winning in the general winning opening. That is, since the character is displayed immediately after the winning in the general winning opening, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred.

  When the character A is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) When the predetermined condition is not satisfied within one minute from the start of the display (effective start winning, the reach state is not satisfied), the display of the character A is started. The character A is erased from the screen at the time when one minute has elapsed, and (2) if the predetermined condition is satisfied within one minute from the start of the display, the specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect) ), The character A is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect)) ends.

  The predetermined condition in (1) is a condition related to a game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (including a condition related to an effect executed with the progress of the game). Even if an effective start prize occurs, if the number of held variable display games including the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize is 1, the start condition is satisfied for the variable display game. Immediately after the start condition is satisfied (the hold information is erased), it is difficult to secure a period for executing the hold change effect by the displayed character. Therefore, when the number of variable display games held after the effective start winning is less than a predetermined number (1 in this example), the holding change effect is not executed, and the number of variable display games held after the effective start winning is changed to the predetermined number. If the number is larger than (1 in this example), a hold change effect may be executed.

  Also, the character may be erased when the game mode shifts to the big hit game state or when the above-described effect control CPU 90120 determines that the game has ended. Also, it is assumed that the character displayed on the image display device 905 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped is not displayed again after the power supply is restarted. That is, it is assumed that the backup processing for displaying the character displayed before the power interruption on the image display device 905 again after the restart of the power supply is not performed.

  The execution of the specific effect F (hold change effect) is performed when the appearing character has performed a predetermined action (that is, with a change in the mode of the displayed object). It is assumed that both the case where the mode of the corresponding display part has changed and the case where it has not changed are included. The timing at which the specific effect F (hold change effect) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action, and more specifically, as shown in FIG. In the example, the character A is used. However, in the specific effect F (holding change effect), the character B may appear or the character C may appear). This is the timing at which the action effect in which the corresponding display portion is covered is performed for a certain period of time (a predetermined action effect period has elapsed).

  Also, the fact that the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) is executed means that the appearing character 903100 (character B in this example, but specific effect G, as shown in FIGS. 47F and 47G). (The character A may appear or the character C may appear in the (fluctuation result announcement effect)) means that a predetermined line is spoken, and the timing at which the specific effect G (the fluctuation result announcement effect) ends This is the timing at which the speech of the character is displayed for a certain period of time (a predetermined speech display period has elapsed).

  When the character B is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within two minutes from the start of the display (effective start winning, the reach state is not established), the display of the character B is started. When the character B is erased from the screen at the timing when two minutes have elapsed, and (2) when the predetermined condition is satisfied within two minutes from the start of the display, the specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect) ), The character B is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) is completed.

  When the character C is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) when a predetermined condition (effective start winning, establishment of the reach state) is not satisfied within three minutes from the display start, the display of the character C is started. The character C is erased from the screen at the timing when three minutes have elapsed, and (2) when the predetermined condition is satisfied within three minutes from the start of the display, the specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect) ), The character C is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect)) ends.

  In this manner, the character is immediately displayed on the image display device 905 based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, and the state after the game ball has won the general winning opening to the player. Can be recognized. In addition, the period in which the character is displayed is a specific period in which the specific effect can be executed by satisfying the predetermined condition. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period in which the character is not displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Is not executed, the player recognizes that "if the predetermined condition is satisfied while the character is displayed, the specific effect will be executed", and the player plays the game to satisfy the predetermined condition. As a result, the interest of the game is enhanced until the specific effect is executed.

  Further, since the display period varies depending on the displayed character, the player can be interested in which character is being displayed. The player who has confirmed the type of the character can grasp the display period of the character, that is, the period in which a predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute a specific effect. Thereby, interest until the specific effect is executed can be enhanced.

  In addition, as described above, the appearance ratio of each character, that is, the set ratio of the specific period in which the predetermined condition must be satisfied according to the general winning opening differs, so that the player can place the game ball in any of the general winning openings. You will be interested in winning.

(Specific example of specific effect F (pending change effect))
In the forty-seventh effect form shown in FIG. 45, when an effective start winning is generated in a state where any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905, the character displayed as the specific effect F is displayed. A pending change effect with the action of is performed. As described above, the occurrence of an effective start winning means that a game ball is awarded to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value, and This means that a game ball is awarded to the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value.

  The effect control CPU 90120 receives the start winning winning port designation command specifying the "first starting winning mouth" or the "second starting winning mouth" and the start winning time determination result designation command including valid data other than blank data. Based on this, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of the effective start winning. FIG. 46 shows a specific example of the pending change effect in the 47th effect mode.

  In FIG. 46 (a), the decoration symbols are changed (for example, scrolling up and down) in the decoration symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and are stored in the hold state. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is two. At this time, in the start winning storage display area 905H, a display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied among the variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Are displayed in the normal mode, and the display portion (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game in which the second start condition is satisfied is displayed in the normal mode.

  At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to cause the character A to appear at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the game ball has won the second general winning opening 9050B (see FIG. 43). In FIG. 46B, based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a character 903000 (a character A) holding a cane 903001 on the image display device 905. The character A appears on the screen immediately after the general winning.

  Then, within one minute from the appearance of the character A, it is assumed that an effective start winning at the first starting winning opening has occurred and a predetermined condition has been satisfied. In FIG. 46 (c), the number of retained storages becomes three, and the display part (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game in which the third start condition is satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. The effect control CPU 90120 that detects the occurrence of the effective start winning, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, determines whether or not to change the display part corresponding to each of the three holding memories from the normal mode to the special mode. Is determined.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 executes each start winning prize determination result designation command (not blank data) stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure and the start winning command storage area for the second special figure. Contains valid data). Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), with respect to the start winning determination result designation command designating "big hit", the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. It is determined that the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, with respect to the start winning prize determination result designating command designating “outside”, it is determined that the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, and the rate is changed to 90% It is determined that the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode.

  In this example, with respect to the start winning prize determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game in which the first and second start conditions are satisfied, the form of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal form. (No change in hold), and only for the start winning prize determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied for the third time, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. (It is determined that there is a pending change).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (e), the effect control CPU 90120 causes the character 903000 (character A) to direct the tip of the cane 903001 to the start winning prize memory display area 905H, and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the cane 903001. Thus, an action effect of a mode in which a display part corresponding to each hold storage is surrounded is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (f), with the execution of the action effect, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the display mode of the left end and the second display part from the left to the normal mode based on the above-described determination. The display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the above-described determination for the third display region from the left without being changed. When the action effect is executed for a predetermined period, the character 903000 (character A) having the wand 903001 and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the wand 903001 are erased from the screen.

  As a result of the change in the mode of the display portion accompanying the action effect, the player has a third display portion from the left because the character 903000 (character A) that has appeared based on the winning in the general winning opening has performed an action. Is changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and the player is expected to have a variable display game that is executed three times after the currently executed variable display game.

  On the other hand, in FIGS. 46 (c) and (d), regarding the start winning prize determination result designation commands corresponding to the three variable display games for which the start conditions are not satisfied, the display part modes corresponding to the respective commands are usually changed. When it is determined not to change the state as it is (no change in hold), even after the action effect shown in FIG. 46 (e) is performed, as shown in FIG. All three corresponding retention sites remain unchanged in the normal mode.

  As described above, when the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed with “the effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character is displayed”, the effective start winning occurs in the character display period. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the game is awarded to the general winning opening, and to enhance the interest from the time when the specific effect is executed until the game ball is won. Also, with the effect configuration in which the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition has not been established yet is triggered by an event of winning a general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game, a game ball is provided in the general winning opening. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the winning to the execution of the specific effect.

  In addition, with the action of the character 903000 (character A), of the display parts corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been established, whether the display form of the display part changes from the normal form to the special form If not, and if it changes, it can be noticed which display mode of the display part changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, the suggestion of the variable display game that can be expected by the player can enhance the interest.

  Further, an effect indicating the winning in the general winning opening (the appearance of the character A) and an effect indicating the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied (the action of the character A) are a common object (the action of the character A). By being constituted by the character A), it is possible to further enhance the interest from when the game ball wins the general winning opening to when the specific effect is executed. Then, the prize to a general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied are indicated by a common object, thereby indicating the appearance and action of the character. The interest of the player can be increased.

  Note that the specific effect F (hold change effect) is a variable display game (effective start winning that triggers execution of the hold change effect) (effective start winning that triggers determination that the predetermined condition is satisfied). Finally, the display result is announced for each of the held variable display games including the variable display game in which the starting condition is satisfied). However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the holding change effect is executed. Only the variable display game (variable display game in which the start condition was finally satisfied) corresponding to the effective start prize (the effective start prize in which it is determined that the predetermined condition has been satisfied) that triggered the game is targeted. The display result may be announced in advance. Conversely, a variable display game corresponding to an effective start prize that triggered the execution of the hold change effect (the effective start prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was satisfied) (finally, the start condition The display result may be announced in advance by targeting a variable display game excluding the variable display game in which (a) is established.

(Character deletion process)
In addition, similarly to the specific effects A to D, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (hold change effect) is provided. When the specific effect F is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the displayed character from the screen and sets the winning history (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the first general winning opening 9050A) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F. (4) One or more winning histories to the general winning opening 9050D and one or more winning histories to any of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are deleted (the winning history of FIG. 45). Reset condition).

  Further, if the displayed character is erased after the predetermined display period has elapsed without executing the specific effect F, the winning history (at least at least in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F) One or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D are deleted) (winning history reset condition in FIG. 45).

  FIG. 48A is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed. In this drawing, it is assumed that the variable display game of the decorative symbol is executed in the order of the variable display 1, the variable display 2, the variable display 3, and the variable display 4. When the variable display 1 is executed, any of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen at the timing (1) based on the fact that the game ball has won one of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. You.

  When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (2) one minute after the appearance without the occurrence of the effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 is ended and the variable display 2 is started. However, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not displayed and is continuously displayed. I have. If an effective start winning is generated within one minute after the appearance of the character A, the character A is not displayed after the end of the action effect.

  When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is not displayed at the timing of (3) two minutes after the appearance without a valid start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, and the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts. However, the variable display 1 ends, the variable display 2 starts, and the variable display 2 starts. With the end of the display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not displayed but is continuously displayed. If an effective start winning is generated within two minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the end of the action effect.

  When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is not displayed at the timing when five minutes have elapsed from the appearance without the occurrence of the effective start winning. In this example, the effective start prize is generated at the timing of (4) before five minutes have elapsed from the appearance of the character C, and the action effect is executed without the character being hidden, and the action is performed. At the timing of the end of the effect (5), the display part corresponding to one or more on-hold storage has changed from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts. With the end of the display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, and the end of the variable display 3 and the start of the variable display 4, the character C does not become non-display. It is displayed continuously.

  As described above, once the character is displayed, the character is continuously displayed until “the predetermined condition is satisfied” or “the predetermined period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied”. ing. Then, the character is not displayed at the earlier timing of “the predetermined condition is satisfied” and “the predetermined period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied”.

[48th production style]
In the forty-eighth effect mode shown in FIG. 45, a character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on a game ball winning in a general winning opening, and a reach state is established during a period in which the character is displayed. Based on the displayed result, the dialog according to the display result of the variable display game being executed (variable display game with a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state) is displayed. That is, the display control of the character is the same as that of the 47th effect mode, except that the predetermined condition to be satisfied within the display period of the character and the type of the specific effect executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied are different.

(Specific example of specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect))
In the forty-eighth effect mode shown in FIG. 45, when the reach state is established in a state where any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905, the specific effect G is displayed as the specific effect G. A fluctuation result announcement effect accompanied by a dialogue display is executed. The effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the timing of establishing the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern, as described above. Therefore, when the variable display game with the reach state is being executed, and when the remaining time of the variable display game with the reach state reaches the predetermined reach state establishment timing, it is determined that the reach state has been established. It is possible to grasp, and if the character is displayed at this time, it is possible to execute the specific effect G. FIG. 47 shows a specific example of the fluctuation result notice effect in the forty-eighth effect mode.

  In FIG. 47 (a), the decoration symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is changing the decoration symbol (for example, scrolling up and down), and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is one. At this time, it is assumed that a display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode in the start winning storage display area 905H. .

  At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to cause the character B to appear at a rate of 30% based on the fact that the game ball has won the first general winning opening 9050A (see FIG. 43). In FIG. 47 (b), based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a character 903100 (character B) holding a stick 903101 on the image display device 905. Character B appears on the screen immediately after the general winning.

  In FIG. 47 (c), after the appearance of the character B, it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed has been completed and the display result has been derived and displayed. Here, as the determined decorative symbol, a combination of “2” on the left, “1” on the right, and “3” in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is performed. Is no longer present, and the leftmost display portion is in a non-display mode.

  Then, it is assumed that the reach state is established and the predetermined condition is established within two minutes after the appearance of the character B. In FIG. 47 (e), the character 3050 of "REACH!" Is displayed at the top of the screen as the reach state is established. The effect control CPU 90120 that has detected the establishment of the reach state, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state in which the character is displayed, determines the speech of the character B.

  Here, effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether the display result of the currently executed decorative design variable display game is determined to be a big hit combination or a loss combination. In addition, you may make it confirm whether the last variation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is a variation pattern designation command for a big hit or a variation pattern designation command for a loss. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (f), when it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is to be a big hit combination, the character “chance!” It is determined to be displayed next to the character, and the dialogue “Intense heat!” Is determined to be displayed beside the character being displayed at a rate of 75%. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is a loss combination, it is determined that 90% of the words "chance!" It is determined that the line of "Intense heat !!" is displayed beside the character being displayed at the rate of%.

  In this example, it is assumed that it has been decided to display the line "Intense heat !!" beside the character being displayed. Based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 produces an effect in which the character 903100 (character B) raises the wand 903101 and utters a dialogue 903102 "Admiration heat!", As shown in FIG. 47 (g). Is executed. When the dialogue 903102 is displayed for a predetermined period, the character 903100 (character B) holding the stick 903101 and the dialogue 903102 emitted from the character 903100 are erased from the screen.

  As a result, for the player, the character of the character 903100 (character B) that has appeared based on the winning in the general winning opening may result in the final stop display of the decorative pattern that is a big hit combination as a result of the reach effect. You can grasp that it is high.

  As described above, the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) is executed triggered by “the reach state is established during the period in which the character is displayed”, and thus the reach state is established in the character display period. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the game is awarded to the general winning opening, and to increase the interest from the time when the specific effect is executed to the time when the specific effect is executed. In addition, in the event of a prize winning in a general prize port that is not related to the progress of the variable display game, the display result of the variable display game for which the display result has not yet been derived and displayed has been announced, so that the game can be played in the general prize port. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the winning of the ball to the execution of the specific effect. Also, the dialogue of the character 903000 (character A) can be noticed, and the interest in the character display effect can be improved.

  In addition, an effect that suggests winning in the general winning opening (the appearance of the character B) and an effect that suggests the display result of the variable display game in which the display result is not derived and displayed (the dialogue of the character B) are a common object. By being constituted by the (character B), it is possible to further enhance the interest from when the game ball wins the general winning opening to when the specific effect is executed. Then, the prize to the general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game that has not been determined are suggested by the common object, so that the appearance of the character and the player's Can increase interest.

  In the forty-eighth effect mode, the specific effect G in which the character emits a predetermined line is executed when the reach state has been established, that is, when the variable display of the decorative symbol has been changed to the predetermined mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the specific effect G may be executed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, regardless of the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Also, for example, when a predetermined announcement effect different from the specific effect G (for example, a step-up announcement effect performed immediately after the start of the variable display game) is executed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, The special effect G may be executed as follows.

  Also, in the forty-eighth effect mode, an example has been described in which a character is displayed based on winning of a game ball to a general winning opening, regardless of the mode of variable display of a decorative pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. The character may be displayed on condition that the variable display of the decorative symbol executed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening becomes a predetermined mode. For example, the game ball wins in the general winning opening. The character may be displayed on condition that the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed at this time is in the reach state (the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is being executed).

(Character deletion process)
As with the specific effects A to D and the specific effects F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the displayed character from the screen and sets a winning history (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the first general winning opening 9050A) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G. (4) (one or more winning histories to the general winning opening 9050D are included) (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 45).

  Further, if the displayed character is deleted after the predetermined display period has elapsed without executing the specific effect G, the winning history (at least in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G) One or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D are deleted) (winning history reset condition in FIG. 45).

  FIG. 48B is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the variable display game of the decorative symbol is executed in the order of the variable display 1, the variable display 2, the variable display 3, and the variable display 4, and the reach effect is executed only in the variable display 4, and the reach state is performed. Is established. When the variable display 1 is executed, any of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen at timing (11) based on the fact that the game ball has won any of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. You.

  When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (12) one minute has elapsed from the appearance without establishing the reach state. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not displayed but is continuously displayed. When the reach state is established within one minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is not displayed after the end of the line display effect.

  When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is not displayed at the timing of (13) when two minutes have elapsed from the appearance without establishing the reach state. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2 and the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not displayed but is continuously displayed. When the reach state is established within two minutes after the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the end of the line display effect.

  When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is not displayed at the timing when five minutes have elapsed from the appearance without establishing the reach state. In this example, since the reach state is established at the timing (14) before five minutes have elapsed from the appearance of the character C, the line display effect is executed without the character being hidden. During this time, the character C is not displayed when the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts. Is not displayed continuously.

[49th production style]
In the above-described forty-seventh effect form and forty-eighth effect form, the specific effect is executed as long as the predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of which type of character A to C is displayed. However, only when a specific type of character is displayed, a specific effect of the type corresponding to the character may be executed.

  For example, in the forty-ninth effect form shown in FIG. 45, the specific effect F (suspended change effect) is executed based on the fact that an effective start winning has occurred during the period in which either the character A or B is displayed. Even if an effective start prize is generated within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is not executed. In addition, the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) is executed based on the fact that the reach state is established during the period in which the character C is displayed, and if the character A or B is displayed. Even if the reach state is established within a certain period, the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) is not executed.

  As described above, according to the type of the character to be displayed, that is, the notification condition for notifying that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the predetermined condition for enabling the execution of the specific effect, and the predetermined condition The type of the specific effect performed based on the establishment may be different.

  Although the predetermined condition for enabling the specific effect is common regardless of the type of the displayed character, the specific condition to be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied is determined according to the type of the displayed character. The type of effect may be different. For example, when an effective start prize is generated within the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed (the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is not executed). However, if an effective start prize occurs during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) is executed (the specific effect F (hold change effect) is not executed). You may.

  In addition, the predetermined condition for enabling the specific effect to be executed differs depending on the type of the displayed character, but is executed when the predetermined condition corresponding to each is satisfied regardless of the type of the displayed character. The type of the specific effect may be common. For example, when an effective start prize is generated during the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed (even if the reach state is established during that period, the specific effect F is specified). Although the effect F is not executed), even when the reach state is established during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed (a temporary start prize is generated during the period). However, the specific effect F is not executed).

  In addition, during the period in which the character is displayed, (1) when an effective starting prize occurs prior to the establishment of the reach state, a specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action is performed. After the execution, the character is erased. (2) If the reach state is established before the effective start winning, the character being displayed performs a specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) in which the displayed character emits a speech. You may delete it. In this way, it is arranged that there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character. A specific effect of the corresponding type may be executed.

  In addition, during the period in which the character is displayed, (1) when an effective starting prize occurs prior to the establishment of the reach state, a specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action is performed. After execution, the character is erased. (2) Even when the reach state is established prior to the effective start winning, the character is erased after executing the specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action. You may make it. In this way, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character, and a specific effect is performed when any one of the predetermined conditions is satisfied. It may be executed.

[Modifications of the 47th production form to the 49th production form]
In the example of FIG. 44, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed within a predetermined specific period after the character is displayed, the character is erased before the end of the specific period as a trigger. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the character once displayed may be continuously displayed until the specific period ends even after the specific effect is executed. Good.

  In such a case, the specific effect may be executed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied during the period in which the character is displayed. For example, when the character C is displayed based on the winning in the general winning opening, the character C does not disappear from the screen for five minutes while the character C is displayed even if an effective start winning is generated. May be displayed, and the specific effect F (hold change effect) may be executed each time an effective start winning is generated during the five minutes.

  In the example of FIG. 44, an example in which the display period of the character is a predetermined fixed period (one minute, two minutes, and five minutes) has been described. However, the display period of the character is not limited to such a form. The period until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times may be set, or the period until the variable display game being executed when the character is displayed may be ended. The period until the current gaming state (for example, the normal state, the probable change state or the time saving state, the big hitting gaming state) may be ended.

  Further, there may be a character that is continuously displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of the display period. That is, once such a character is displayed, it is assumed that the character is not deleted until a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of display.

  Further, the display period of the character may be determined before the type of the character to be displayed is determined, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when a game ball is won in a general winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 determines which of the one minute, two minutes, and three minutes the character display period is to be set, and the determination is made. If the display period is one minute, the character A is selected at a rate of 70%, the character B is selected at a rate of 20%, and the character C is selected at a rate of 10%, and the determined display period is two minutes. If character B is selected at a rate of 70%, character A is selected at a rate of 15%, character C is selected at a rate of 15%, and if the determined display period is 3 minutes, C may be selected at a rate of 70%, character B may be selected at a rate of 20%, and character A may be selected at a rate of 10%. For example, a different display period may be determined according to which general winning opening the gaming ball has won, or according to the gaming state.

  In addition, the predetermined conditions to be satisfied in order to enable the execution of the specific effect are not limited to the above-described establishment of the effective start prize and the reach state, but also the occurrence of the big hit game state, the big hit game state of a predetermined type (for example, the probability change big hit The occurrence of a jackpot with the largest number of rounds, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive jackpot gaming states (continuous number = probable change state or time saving after the end of the jackpot gaming state) That the number of consecutive big hitting game states controlled to the state +1) has reached the predetermined number of times, the end of the big hitting game state, that the state has been controlled to the predetermined game state (for example, the probable change state), and the display result is a loss combination. The variable display game has been repeated for a predetermined number of times, the variable display game having a variation pattern of “non-reach” (“loss without reach”) has been repeated for a predetermined number of times, Such that the number reaches a predetermined number, other conditions, that may be a condition satisfied with the game. In addition, the specific effect is not limited to the period during which the special symbol is variably displayed, and the variable display of the special symbol (the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol) is performed during the period in which the special jackpot game state is controlled. It may be performed during a period not performed.

  In the forty-seventh effect form and the forty-nineth effect form, an example has been described in which the advance notice effect for giving a notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is a hold change effect. Not limited to this, for example, as shown in FIG. 24B described above, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot hold, an effect with only voice is performed, or an effect with voice and movable role 901000 is performed. It may be a look-ahead announcement effect in which the ratio of the performances differs, or a chance-eye announcement effect as shown in a 50th effect mode or a 51st effect mode described later. Alternatively, a countdown notice effect in which the remaining variable display count up to the variable display serving as the target of the prefetch notice is notified to the player may be provided.

  In the forty-seventh effect form and the forty-ninth effect form, after the character is displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, an effective start prize is generated, and the displayed character is in the form of the hold information. Although the example of executing the hold change effect of changing the above is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a game ball wins a general winning opening, a start winning determination corresponding to each held variable display game is determined. Check the result designation command and start winning fluctuation pattern determination result designation command, and if there is a variable display game with a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, a higher rate than if it does not exist You may make a character appear. In addition, when there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the appearance ratio of the specific character may be higher than in the case where there is no variable display game. Further, different types of characters may appear when there is a variable display game in which a display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, and when there is no variable display game. Then, when an effective start winning is generated after the appearance of the character (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the displayed character may execute a holding change effect of changing the mode of the holding information.

  In the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, when the game is controlled to the big hit game state, the displayed character is erased, and during the period in which the big hit game state is controlled, the game ball is inserted into the general winning opening. The special effect may not be executed by preventing a new character from appearing even if a prize is won. Thereby, the player's consciousness is concentrated on various effects (for example, a fanfare effect, an effect during a round, an ending effect, and the like) executed in accordance with the control to the big hit gaming state, so that these various effects are not disturbed. be able to.

  In the forty-seventh effect form to the forty-ninth effect form, an example has been described in which the specific effect is always executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character. Even when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the period, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period of the character A, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 25%, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character B, the specific effect is performed at a rate of 50%. Is executed, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period of the character C, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 100%, such as when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the displayed character. The execution ratio may be different.

  Here, in the forty-seventh effect form to the forty-nineth effect form, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening while the character is displayed, a new character based on the winning in the general winning opening is displayed. It is assumed that the character that has already been displayed is continuously displayed without performing the operation. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to display a character and the character to be displayed at the rate shown in FIG. 43 on condition that no character is displayed when the game ball has won the general winning opening. And the character is displayed based on the determination.

  The present invention is not limited to such a mode, and when a character is displayed when a game ball has won a general winning opening, the character based on the general winning that has already been displayed is replaced (the character is already displayed). The deleted character may be deleted), and a character based on a later general prize may be displayed.

  Further, by comparing the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize and the display period of the character based on the later general prize, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is better. If it is long, the character is continuously displayed, and the character based on the later general winning is not displayed. If the display period of the character based on the later general winning is longer, the character based on the previous general winning is replaced (already). The displayed character may be deleted) and a character based on a later general winning may be displayed.

  In such a mode, when the character based on the later general winning is displayed instead of the character based on the previous general winning (the character already displayed is deleted), the display period of the character based on the latter general winning is determined. Then, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed may be added (the period in which both are added is set as the display period of the newly displayed character).

  In the 47th to 49th production modes, if a game ball wins in the general winning opening during the character display period, a new character is not displayed based on the winning in the general winning opening. Alternatively, the remaining display period of the character that has already been displayed may be extended. Here, the extended period (the time to be added to the remaining display period) may be a display period (for example, one minute if the character A is displayed) defined for the already displayed character. Also, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs during the character display period, one of the characters is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 43, and the determined character (but newly displayed) is displayed. The display period (for example, 2 minutes for the character B) corresponding to the character that is not displayed may be added to the remaining display period of the already displayed character.

(Display of multiple characters)
Further, when a character is displayed when a game ball wins in the general winning opening, the character based on the previously displayed general winning is displayed (without deleting the already displayed character) together with the character based on the previously displayed general winning. The character based on the general winning may be displayed together. For example, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening when the character A is displayed and it is determined that the character B is newly displayed, a new character A is displayed in addition to the character A already displayed. B may also be displayed on the image display device 905.

  In such a case, a period obtained by adding the display period of the character based on the later general winning to the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general winning is set as a common display period of both characters. You may. In this case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied before the common display period elapses, the specific effect is executed, and one or both characters are deleted. When the common display period elapses without satisfying the predetermined condition, both characters are deleted.

  In a state where both the first character (for example, the character A) and the second character (for example, the character B) are displayed on the image display device 905, the first predetermined condition (for example, valid When the start winning prize is established and the first specific effect (for example, the specific effect F (hold change effect)) based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is executed, the first character is deleted and only the second character is deleted. Then, a second predetermined condition (for example, a reach state) corresponding to the second character is established, and a second specific effect (for example, the specific effect G (variation result) When the notice effect)) is executed, the second character may be deleted. Here, the first character and the second character may be characters of the same type.

  In such a case, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be a common condition (for example, occurrence of an effective start winning), in which case, both the first character and the second character are used. While being displayed on the image display device 905, the first specific effect by the first character and the second specific effect by the second character are performed based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, the occurrence of only one effective start winning). Both effects are performed, and both the first character and the second character are erased.

  Further, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be the same type of effect (for example, a specific effect F (hold change effect)), in which case, both the first character and the second character are displayed on the image display device. When a first predetermined condition (for example, an effective start winning) corresponding to the first character is established in a state displayed at 905, a certain type of specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect)) is executed, When one character is deleted and only the second character is displayed, and then a second predetermined condition (for example, a reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, the same type of specific effect (specific effect F ( Hold change effect)) may be executed to erase the second character.

  Also, as in the forty-ninth production mode, during the period in which the first character (character A or B) is displayed, the first specific production (specific production) according to the establishment of the first condition (the occurrence of the effective start winning). F) can be executed, and during the period in which the second character (character C) is displayed, the second specific effect (specific effect G) can be executed in accordance with establishment of the second condition (establishment of the reach state). In this case, it is assumed that only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 (both the first character and the second character are not displayed at the same time). Here, when the ratio controlled in the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is higher when the second specific effect is executed than when the first specific effect is executed, the first character is changed to the first character. It is assumed that the character is displayed prior to the character. For example, when it is determined that the second character is to be displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening while the first character is displayed, the first character is deleted and the second character is deleted. Is newly displayed. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed, control to display the first character instead is not performed.

  On the other hand, when the first character and the second character are configured to be simultaneously displayed on the image display device 905, the first specific effect is executed in accordance with the establishment of the first condition, and the second condition is executed. It is possible to execute the second specific effect according to the establishment of. However, when the first specific effect and the second specific effect are both effects directed to the same variable display game and the execution periods are overlapped (for example, both are the change result announcement effect of the same variable display game and reach In the case where the second specific effect is executed immediately after the establishment of the state), the second specific effect is executed prior to the first specific effect, and the first specific effect is not executed at this time.

[50th production style]
In the fiftieth effect form shown in FIG. 49, each time a game ball wins a general winning opening, a button icon 904000 is newly displayed on the image display device 905 (see FIG. 50 and the like), and the displayed button icon 904000 is displayed. The types of the specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the number of the special effects. Here, each of the specific effects in the present effect type urges the player to perform some operation, and is an effect in which the display result of the variable display game can be announced based on detection of the operation of the player. As the specific effects, three types of cut-in notice effects (special effect H), pseudo consecutive notice effects (specific effect I), and chance notice notice effect (specific effect J) are provided.

  The display information condition in FIG. 49 is the number of button icons 904000 required to execute each specific effect. If at least the number of button icons 904000 indicated in the display information condition are not displayed, each specific information condition is displayed. No staging is performed. More specifically, the cut-in notice effect is not executed unless one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, the pseudo consecutive notice effect is not executed unless the button icon 904000 is displayed two or more, and the chance eye notice effect is executed. If three or more button icons 904000 are not displayed, the processing is not executed.

  The button icon 904000 displayed on the image display device 905 increases by one each time a game ball wins a general winning opening, and can display up to a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5) on the image display device 905. There is. Then, when the specific effect is executed, the number of button icons 904000 obtained by subtracting the number of display of the button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect from the number of display of the button icons 904000 before the execution of the specific effect, After the execution of the specific effect, the image is displayed on the image display device 905. For example, when (1) cut-in notice effect (the number of required button icons displayed = 1) is executed in a state where five button icons 904000 are displayed, the button icons after the cut-in notice effect are executed The display number of 4000 becomes four, and when the (2) pseudo consecutive announcement effect (the number of required button icons displayed = 2) is executed, the display number of the button icon 4000 after execution of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect becomes three. (3) When the chance notice announcement effect (the number of required button icons to be displayed = 3) is executed, the display number 4000 of the button icon after the execution of the chance notice announcement effect becomes two.

(Cut-in notice direction)
The cut-in notice effect provided as the specific effect H is an effect in which, after the reach state is established, the display result of the variable display of the variable display pattern is announced by the contents of the characters displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 49, the cut-in notice effect is performed when (1) one or more button icons 904000 are displayed and (2) a variable display game is executed in a fluctuation pattern with a reach state. The user is notified to perform a predetermined continuous operation, and (3) the player can execute the predetermined continuous operation by performing the predetermined continuous operation.

  In addition, when the variable display game is executed in the variation pattern accompanied by the reach state in a state where no button icon 904000 is displayed, the continuous hitting operation related to the cut-in notice effect is not notified, and the cut-in notice is not issued. No staging is performed. Further, in the variable display game of the fluctuation pattern without the reach state, the continuous hitting operation related to the cut-in notice effect is not notified, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed.

  In the cut-in notice effect, the reach state is established during the period in which the variable display game is being executed, and thereafter, the player operates the operation button 9030 a plurality of times. The condition is that the variable display game is executed according to the variation pattern to be executed. A specific mode of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 50 (a), the decoration symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” change the decoration symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction), and hold storage. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is one. At this time, it is assumed that a display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode in the start winning storage display area 905H. .

  The effect control CPU 90120 causes the first button icon 904000 to be displayed at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 50B, the screen is updated from a state where the button icon 904000 is not displayed to a state where one button icon 904000 is displayed. In addition, as one or more button icons 904000 are displayed on the screen in total, the character 904000a of “cut-in” indicating “a cut-in notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. Is displayed. Here, the predetermined operation suggestion condition is (1) a state in which one or more button icons 904000 are displayed and (2) a variable display game of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state.

  Then, in FIG. 50 (c), it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed has been completed and the display result has been derived and displayed. Here, as the determined decorative symbol, a combination of “4” on the left, “2” on the right, and “8” in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the next variable display game is a reach variation pattern with a reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Confirmation is made based on the fluctuation pattern designation command received from 90100. Then, when the variable display game to be started has the reach variation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect is satisfied.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Is no longer present, and the leftmost display portion is in a non-display mode.

  In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect of displaying the character 904080 of “reach!” When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. 50 (e). Then, based on the satisfaction of the operation suggestion condition, as shown in FIG. 50 (f), in the center of the screen, in order from the top, a character of "repeat!", A plurality of downward arrows, and an operation button 9030 were imitated. The continuous hit suggestion information 904100 including an image and a time bar indicating the remaining period in which the operation is valid is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 9030 should be continuously performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120 deletes one of the displayed button icons 904000 required for executing the cut-in notice effect, among the displayed button icons 904000, with the display of the continuous hit suggestion information 904100. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and the character 904000a of “cut-in” is deleted from the screen when there is no executable specific effect.

  The player who has recognized the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 performs the operation of pressing the operation button 9030 continuously for a predetermined number of times or more. Effect control CPU 90120 updates the display of the time bar in accordance with the elapsed time after displaying continuous hit suggestion information 904100. The time bar is in a state of five steps out of five steps at the time of being displayed, and it is assumed that the time bar decreases by one step every one second after the display. As shown in FIG. 50 (g), the effect control CPU 90120 activates the operation button 9030 a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar becomes 0 of 5 levels (for example, within 5 seconds from the start of display). When the above operation is performed, the cut-in mode is determined, and a cut-in screen corresponding to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 905.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120, when the continuous hit suggestion condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 50 (h), when the display result of the variable display game to be executed is the final stop symbol of the big hit combination. Decides to display the word "chance!" At a rate of 20%, and to display the letter "pleasure!" At a rate of 80%, and the display result of the variable display game to be executed is a loss combination. In the case of the final stop symbol, it is determined that the character of "chance!" Is displayed at a rate of 80% and the character of "enthusiastic!" Is displayed at a rate of 20%.

  Then, effect control CPU 90120 executes a cut-in notice effect in which a screen including the determined character is displayed on image display device 905. In the example of FIG. 50 (i), a character 904200 of “Hentai !!” is displayed large on the entire screen.

  Note that if the operation button 9030 has not been operated more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the start of display of the continuous hit suggestion information 904100, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates “Chance!” Neither of the characters “and” is displayed on the screen.

(Pseudo consecutive notice production)
The pseudo-announcement effect provided as the specific effect I is as if a plurality of times were performed in a single variable display game by re-changing the temporarily stopped decorative design in the vertical direction again. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed. When the re-variation is performed, a pseudo continuous symbol is formed as a decorative symbol in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 905C in accordance with each symbol stop operation of the player (in this example, the symbol is composed of "NEXT" characters). Is temporarily stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the pseudo consecutive announcement effect, (1) a state in which two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game with a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 8 seconds or more. In such a case, the user is notified to perform a predetermined symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can execute the predetermined symbol stop operation by performing the predetermined symbol stop operation.

  In addition, in the pseudo consecutive announcement effect, the player operates the operation button 9030 three times (each symbol stop operation is performed three times) during the period in which one variable display game is executed. A predetermined operation time is required, and the condition is that a variable display game with a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) or more is executed. With reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, a specific mode of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect will be described.

  In FIG. 51 (a), the decoration symbols are changed (for example, scrolled up and down) in the decoration symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left," "middle," and "right," and are stored in the hold state. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is one. At this time, it is assumed that a display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode in the start winning storage display area 905H. .

  One button icon 904000 is displayed on the left side of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, and “cut after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied”. The character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed, indicating that the in-notification effect can be executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a second button icon 904000 on the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 51B, the screen is updated from a state in which one button icon 904000 is displayed to a state in which two button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, with two or more button icons 904000 displayed on the screen in total, a “pseudo-ren” character 904000b indicating “pseudo-rendition announcement effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. Is displayed. Here, the predetermined operation suggestion condition is (1) a state in which two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game that is executed in a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 8 seconds or more. is there.

  In FIG. 51 (c), it is assumed that after the second button icon 904000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative pattern that has been executed ends, and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as the fixed decorative symbol, a combination that is “5” on the left, “1” on the right, and “7” in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 receives from the game control microcomputer 90100 whether or not the fluctuation time of the next variable display game is 8 seconds or more based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Check based on the fluctuation pattern specification command. When the variable display game to be started has a variation time of 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect has been satisfied.

  When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state, as shown in FIG. Determines that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (performs re-variation) with a probability of 15%, and that the pseudo-continuous symbol is not provisionally stopped (performs no re-performation) at a rate of 85%. On the other hand, if the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach variation pattern accompanied by a reach state, it is determined that the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (performs re-variation) with a probability of 100%.

  The effect control CPU 90120 is configured to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L in response to each symbol stop operation of the player, when it is determined that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and , A decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R, and a pseudo-continuous symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C.

  As described above, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the change start command, the variable display result notification command, and the change pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the change pattern designation command and sets the variable display result. The determined decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to the notification command is determined. When it is determined that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the "left" and "right" decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R in accordance with each symbol stop operation of the player are determined and determined. It may be different from or the same as the “left” and “right” decorative symbols constituting the decorative symbol (final stop symbol).

  When it is determined that the pseudo continuous symbols are not to be temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to each symbol stop operation of the player by displaying a “left” decorative symbol display area 905L and a “right” decorative symbol display. In the area 905R and the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C, the “left”, “right”, and “medium” decorative symbols constituting the determined fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) are respectively rocked and stopped. To decide. That is, when the re-change is not performed, it is determined that the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is rocked and stopped according to each symbol stop operation of the player.

  As described above, when the presence or absence of the re-change and the temporary stop symbol in the case of the re-change are determined, the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, as shown in FIG. Accordingly, there is no variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the leftmost display portion is in the non-display mode. With the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 51 (f), the characters “press!”, The downward arrow, and the operation button 9030 are sequentially placed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L from the top. Operation suggestion information 904050 composed of a simulated image is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that an operation of pressing the operation button 9030 in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L to stop the decorative symbol should be performed.

  Further, with the display of operation suggestion information 904050, effect control CPU 90120 deletes two of the displayed button icons 904000 required to execute the pseudo consecutive announcement effect. As a result, the number of button icons 904000 to be displayed becomes 0, and the character 904000a of “cut-in” and the character 904000b of “pseudo-ren” are erased from the screen when there is no executable specific effect.

  When the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the “left” decoration symbol display area 905L performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030, the “left” decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol (“1” in this example) is stopped swinging in the symbol display area 905L. The swing stop is a state in which the decorative symbol is not completely stopped but swings (the final stop is not displayed), although the decorative design is not scrolled up and down. The decorative symbol that is stopped to swing here is the “left” decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of the temporary stop symbols when it is determined to stop the pseudo continuous symbol. If it is determined not to stop the consecutive symbols, the "left" decorative symbol is a combination of a predetermined determined decorative symbol (final stop symbol).

  When the “left” decorative symbol is stopped swinging, then the effect control CPU 90120 displays the operation suggestion information 904050 in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R as shown in FIG. 51 (g). . Thereby, the player recognizes that an operation of pressing the operation button 9030 to stop the decorative symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R is required.

  When the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the “right” decoration symbol display area 905R performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030, the “right” decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol (“2” in this example) is stopped swinging in the symbol display area 905R. The decorative symbol that is stopped to swing here is the “right” decorative symbol that constitutes the combination of the temporary stop symbols that have been determined in advance when it is determined to stop the pseudo continuous symbol. If it is determined not to stop the consecutive symbols, the "right" decorative symbol is a combination of a predetermined determined decorative symbol (final stop symbol).

  When the “right” decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 90120 then displays the operation suggestion information 904050 in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C as shown in FIG. 51 (h). . Thus, the player recognizes that an operation of pressing the operation button 9030 to stop the decoration symbol in the “medium” decoration symbol display area 905C is recognized.

  It is assumed that the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030.

  At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols based on the table of FIG. 51D, the effect is determined to be “medium” as shown in FIG. Of the symbol "NEXT" is stopped in the decorative symbol display area 905C. As a result, the predetermined combination of the "left", "middle", and "right" temporary stop symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (j), after a temporary stop display for a predetermined time, the decoration symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” change the decoration symbol (for example, A re-variation in which the vertical scroll display is restarted is performed. After the change, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is finally stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the decorative symbols are variably displayed. The display result of the game is determined.

  On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the pseudo-continuous symbol should not be temporarily stopped based on the table of FIG. 51D, the “medium” as shown in FIG. The "medium" decorative symbol constituting the combination of the determined decorative symbol (final stop symbol) previously determined in the decorative symbol display area 905C is stopped swinging. As a result, the combination of the fixed decoration symbols (final stop symbols) of “left”, “right”, and “middle” that have been determined in advance is stopped by swinging. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (l), after the swing is stopped for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left," "middle," and "right." The combination of the symbols is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is determined.

  The effect control CPU 90120 has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo continuous symbol even when the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. In this case, it is assumed that the predetermined combination of the temporary stop symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the re-change is executed. That is, once it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols, the combination of the temporarily stopped symbols is automatically displayed as a temporary stop even if no operation is performed, and the re-variation is executed. And

  In this example, when the button indication 904000 is displayed two or more, and the operation suggestion condition that the variable display game is executed in a variation pattern in which the variation time is 8 seconds or more is satisfied, The operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed irrespective of whether or not the fluctuation pattern accompanies the reach state (that is, regardless of the production mode of the specified fluctuation pattern). The operation suggestion condition may be that two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and that the variable display game is executed in a variation pattern with a reach state. In the case of such an operation suggestion condition, when the display result of the variable display game with the reach state is a big hit, the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped at a higher rate than when the display result is lost. It is good to

  Further, when the execution of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect is set in advance for each variation pattern determined on the game control microcomputer 90100 side, that is, by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100. In a case where the pseudo continuous symbol is specified to be temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the button icon 904000 two or more and specifies that the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. The operation suggestion condition may be that a change pattern designation command is received (a variable display game is executed based on a change pattern accompanied by a pseudo consecutive announcement effect), as in the above-described example, regardless of the change pattern specified. , Two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and Or the variable display game variation time are performed, may be operated suggest condition that.

(Chance eye notice production)
The chance eye notice effect provided as the specific effect J is different from the display result of the decorative symbol pattern which is a big hit combination as the display result of the variable display game executed before the variable display game which is the target of the prefetch notice. By displaying the chance result, which is the display result, at the final stop, the player is notified of the display result of the variable display game that is the target of the prefetch notice.

  In this example, the same odd-numbered decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed in the “left” and “medium” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C, and “left” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R. And, by displaying the final stop display of an even-numbered decorative symbol that is one larger than the odd-numbered decorative symbol finally stopped and displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C of “medium”, “left”, “middle” “ It is assumed that the combination of decorative patterns on the right is completed.

  That is, in this example, the combination of the decorative patterns “left”, “middle”, and “right”, which are the chance eyes, is any of “112”, “334”, “556”, and “778”. In accordance with the player's all symbol stop operation, it is possible to display a final symbol combination of decorative symbols serving as chance eyes.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the chance eye announcement effect is that (1) three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is suspended, and the variable When any of the variable display games executed before the display game does not involve the reach state, the user is notified to perform a predetermined all symbol stop operation, and (3) the player performs the predetermined all symbol stop operation. Executing it makes it executable.

  Also, in the chance eye announcement effect, in a single variable display game, the player operates the operation button 9030 only once so that the combination of the decoration patterns “left”, “middle”, and “right” fluctuates. Stopped. That is, unlike a pseudo consecutive announcement effect in which each symbol stop operation for swinging and stopping each of the "left", "right", and "middle" decorative symbols in one variable display game is required three times, The operation (all symbols stop operation) required in one variable display game is only once. With reference to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, a specific mode of the chance eye announcement effect will be described.

  In FIG. 53 (a), the decoration symbols are changed (for example, scrolling up and down) in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is three. At this time, in the start winning storage display area 905H, each of the display portions (the left end, the second from the left, and the three from the left) corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. ) Are displayed in the normal mode.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the start winning prize variation pattern determination result designation command stored in the first special figure start winning command storage area and the start special winning map start command storage area for the second special figure. After confirming the start winning prize variation pattern determination result designation command, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the leftmost display portion) for which the start condition is first satisfied among the three variable display games on hold. Is the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display region from the left) in which the start condition is satisfied second is the non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied third. It is assumed that the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game to be performed (the third display portion from the left) is a reach variation pattern.

  Further, two button icons 904000 are displayed on the left side of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D a plurality of times (at least two times), "Cut-in announcement effect can be executed after the operation suggestion condition is satisfied", and a character "904000a" of "cut-in", and "pseudo consecutive announcement effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" Is displayed as the character 904000b of "pseudo ream".

  The effect control CPU 90120 displays a third button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 53B, the screen is updated from a state in which two button icons 904000 are displayed to a state in which three button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, with the display of the three or more button icons 904000 on the screen in total, the character 904000c of “chance eye” indicating “chance eye notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. Is displayed. Here, the predetermined operation suggestion condition is (1) a state in which three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is suspended, and the variable display game is That is, none of the variable display games that are executed before the first game is accompanied by the reach state.

  In FIG. 53 (c), after the third button icon 904000 is displayed, it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed has been completed and the display result has been derived and displayed. Here, as the determined decorative symbol, a combination that is “5” at the left, “9” at the center, and “6” at the center, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the variation pattern of the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state, based on the establishment of the next variable display game start condition. Of the two held variable display games, the change pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the leftmost display portion) in which the start condition is satisfied first is the non-reach change pattern, and the start condition is satisfied second. Based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display region from the left) is the fluctuation pattern of reach, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the chance eye announcement effect has been established.

  When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the variable display game to be executed before the suspended reach change pattern variable display game (two times including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied) is executed. Is determined to request the player to stop all symbols after the variable display is started. Also, whether the display result of the variable display game of the held reach fluctuation pattern is a big hit combination or a loss combination is determined by a start winning prize determination result designation command or a start winning fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game. Check based on the judgment result specification command.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (d), when the display result of the variable display game of the held reach fluctuation pattern is a big hit combination, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, all the symbols of the player are displayed. In response to the stop operation, it is determined to stop the chance chance at a rate of 75%, and to stop the non-chance chance (loss combination other than the chance chance) at a rate of 25%. If the display result of the display game is a losing combination, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the chance eyes are stopped at a rate of 25% according to the player's all symbol stop operation, It is decided to stop the non-chance eyes at a rate of 75%.

  When it is determined that the chance eyes are to be stopped, the effect control CPU 90120 configures the chance eyes in accordance with the player's entire symbol stop operation, and displays “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display areas 905L. 905C, and an even-numbered decorative symbol to stop swinging to the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R.

  If it is determined that the chance eyes are not to be stopped, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to the player's all symbol stop operation by displaying the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L and the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C. And a decorative symbol constituting a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which does not become a chance according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R. Decide to stop. That is, it is determined that the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) serving as the non-chance eye is rocked and stopped in response to the player's all symbol stopping operation.

  As described above, when the presence or absence of the opportunity stop and the stop symbol for performing the opportunity stop are determined, the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, as shown in FIG. Accordingly, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the third display part from the left is in the non-display mode. With the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 53 (f), the character 904200 of "Stop all the symbols!" Is displayed large in the center of the screen, and the character of "Press!" , And operation suggestion information 904050 composed of an image imitating the operation button 9030. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 9030 to stop the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is recognized. I do. In the chance eye announcement effect, unlike the pseudo consecutive announcement effect described above, by operating the operation button 9030 only once, all the decorative pattern display areas 905L, “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. The decorative symbols are stopped at 905C and 905R.

  In addition, effect control CPU 90120 displays three buttons required to execute a chance eye announcement effect among displayed button icons 904000 with display of character 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” And operation suggestion information 904050. The icon 904000 is deleted. As a result, the number of button icons 904000 to be displayed becomes 0, and there is no executable specific effect, and accordingly, the character 904000a of “cut in”, the character 904000b of “pseudo ream”, and the “chance eye” Is deleted from the screen.

  Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the characters 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 904050 performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030.

  At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 determines to stop the non-chance eye based on the table in FIG. 53D, the effect control CPU 90120 sets “left” as shown in FIG. In the "medium" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, combinations of fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) that do not become chances according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command are shaken. Operation stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (h), after the swing is stopped for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The combination of the symbols is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is determined. In this case, as the non-chance eye fixed decoration symbol, a combination of “4” on the left, “9” on the middle, and “7” on the right, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

  Note that if the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the character 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 904050, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the player If it has been decided to stop the non-chance eyes in response to the all symbol stop operation, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance eye according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command Is to be stopped by swinging.

  Next, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the start condition of the next variable display game based on the fact that it is determined that the player is required to stop all symbols for the next variable display game. Even when the game is established, it is determined whether or not there is a chance stop as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 54 (i), when the display result of the variable display game of the held reach variation pattern is a big hit combination, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, all the symbols of the player are displayed. In response to the stop operation, it is determined that the chance eyes are stopped at a rate of 75% and the non-chance eyes are stopped at a rate of 25%, and the display result of the variable display game of the held reach variation pattern is lost. In the case of, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the chance eyes are stopped at a rate of 25% in accordance with the player's all symbol stop operations, and the non-chance eyes are determined at a rate of 75%. Decide to stop.

  Further, as in the previous variable display game, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the player to perform all symbol stop operations when it is determined to stop the chances or to stop the non-chances. A combination of decorative symbols to be stopped for swinging is determined according to.

  As described above, when the presence or absence of the chance stop and the stop symbol for performing the stop at the opportunity are determined, as shown in FIG. 54 (j), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Accordingly, there is one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the second display part from the left is in the non-display mode. With the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 54 (k), a character 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” And operation suggestion information 904050 are displayed in the center of the screen. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 9030 to stop the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is recognized. I do.

  Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the characters 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 904050 performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030.

  At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 has determined to stop the chance based on the table of FIG. 54 (i), as shown in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols forming the determined chance eyes is stopped in the middle and right decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (m), after the rocking is stopped for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". The combination of the symbols is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is determined. Here, as the determined decorative pattern of the chance eyes, a combination of “1” on the left, “1” on the middle, and “2” on the right, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

  Note that if the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the character 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 904050, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the player Even if it is decided to stop the chance eyes in response to the all symbol stop operation, a fixed decorative pattern (final stop) that does not become a chance eye according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command (Symbol) is stopped.

  Next, for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game of the reach variation pattern that is the target of the chance eye announcement effect, it is determined that the effect control CPU 90120 requests the player to perform the all symbol stop operation. Therefore, when the start condition of the next variable display game is satisfied, the presence or absence of the stop at the chance is not determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (n), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Is no longer present, and the leftmost display portion is in a non-display mode.

  In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect controlling CPU 90120 executes an effect of displaying the character 904080 of "reach!" When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG.

  In the fiftieth production form described above, the cut-in notice production, the pseudo consecutive notice production, and the chance notice production are all in the state after the game ball has won the general winning opening, that is, the button icon 904000 is displayed. In the displayed state, it can be executed by a player's operation corresponding to each announcement effect. In this way, by providing a specific effect that is executed on condition that the player operates the game ball after winning the game ball in the general winning opening, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball wins in the general winning opening.

  Also, each time a game ball wins in the general winning opening, the button icon 904000 displayed on the screen increases, so that the player can enter the game ball in any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening. Is recognized.

  Further, when the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect is established in a state where one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, a notification that prompts a continuous hit operation as an operation corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is issued, and two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo consecutive announcement production is established in a state where the operation is performed, a notification urging each symbol stop operation is performed as an operation corresponding to the pseudo consecutive announcement production, and a chance is displayed when three or more button icons 904000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition of the notice effect is satisfied, a notification that prompts all symbol stop operations is performed as an operation corresponding to the chance effect notice effect, so that the player can execute the specific effect by performing any operation. Can be grasped.

  In addition, according to the display number of the button icons 904000, the character “904000a” of “cut-in” is displayed when the display number is one or more, and the character 904000b of “pseudo-ren” is displayed when the display number is two or more. Is 3 or more, the character 904000c of “chance eyes” is displayed, so that the player can grasp the type of the specific effect that can be executed according to the number of displayed button icons 904000. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of game balls winning the general winning opening.

  In addition, you may make it alert | report the operation | movement required to perform the specific effect with the type of the specific effect which can be performed. For example, in accordance with the number of displayed button icons 904000, when the number of display is 1 or more, the character of "continuous hit" is displayed beside the character 904000a of "cut-in", and when the number of display is 2 or more, the character of "pseudo continuous" is displayed. The character "Each symbol stop" is displayed beside the character 904000b, and when the number of displayed characters is three or more, the character "All symbols stopped" is displayed beside the character 904000c of "Chance eyes". An operation required according to the type of the specific effect that can be executed can be grasped.

  Here, in this embodiment, there are cases where operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each of a plurality of types of specific effects are simultaneously satisfied. For example, in a state where two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is eight. In this case, a notification prompting a continuous hit operation for executing a cut-in notice effect (display of continuous hit suggestion information 904100) and a symbol stop operation for executing a pseudo consecutive notice effect are prompted. Which one of the notifications (display of the operation suggestion information 904050 in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R) becomes a problem. In this embodiment, the one with the larger number of button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect is executed with priority. Therefore, the notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for the execution of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect (the button icon 904000 needs two or more) is the information that prompts the continuous hit operation for the cut-in announcement effect execution (the button icon 904000 needs one or more). Priority is given to this.

  Further, in a state where three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game of the non-reach variation pattern is satisfied, the variation time of the non-reach variation pattern is 8 seconds or more, and In some cases, the held variable display game has a reach variation pattern, and in this case, a notification urging each symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo consecutive announcement effect (in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R). Display of the operation suggestion information 904050) or a notification that prompts the user to stop all the symbols for executing the chance eye announcement effect (display of the character 904200 of "Stop all the symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050 in each variable display game). The question is, what should be done? In this case, the notification that prompts all symbol stop operations for the execution of the chance eye announcement effect (three or more button icons 904000 are required) is the information that prompts each symbol stop operation for the pseudo consecutive announcement effect execution (the button icon 904000). Needs to be performed two or more times).

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of displayed button icons 904000 is the number of button icons 904000 required for execution of the specific effect (1 for cut-in notice effect, 1 for pseudo consecutive notice effect, 2 chance If the number of the button icons 904000 required for executing the specific effect is subtracted from the number of the button icons 904000 initially displayed, the number of the button icons 904000 is smaller than the number of the button icons 904000 initially displayed. It will continue to be displayed even after the performance has been performed.

  For example, if the chance eye announcement effect is executed in a state in which four or more button icons 904000 are displayed, one button icon 904000 that is continuously displayed remains after the execution of the opportunity eye announcement effect, and thus “ The character "904000a" of "cut-in" remains displayed on the screen. Thereafter, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started, the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect is established, and a notification for prompting the continuous hit operation is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether or not an operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is satisfied (the number of button icons 904000 is checked). The variation pattern of the variable display game is also checked), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and when the variable display game is being executed, whether the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is satisfied. The determination may be made as to whether or not. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not one or more button icons 904000 are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and displays the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 for performing the continuous hit if it is displayed. It may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not two or more button icons 904000 are displayed at a timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (the derivation display of the display result) is a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining). It is also possible to display operation suggestion information 904050 for causing each symbol stop operation to be performed if it is determined. The effect control CPU 90120 holds the variable display game with the reach state (including the variable display game corresponding to the valid start prize) at the timing when the valid start prize is generated, and the variable display game Before any of the variable display games executed prior to the above does not involve the reach state, it is determined whether three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and if so, all symbol stop operations are performed. Character 904200 and “operation suggestion information 904050” of “Stop all symbols!” May be displayed. That is, in the variable display game being executed at the timing when the display number of the button icons 904000 reaches the predetermined number (without waiting for the start condition of the next variable display game to be executed), the predetermined A notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variable display game being executed has the reach variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 1 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. In the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 for performing the continuous hit may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. Further, at the timing when the number of button icons 904000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the remaining time until the end of the variable display game being executed (derived display of the display result). It is determined whether or not the time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining). The operation suggestion information 904050 for causing each symbol stop operation to be performed may be displayed at the timing of the remaining 10 seconds). At the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 3 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the variable display game with the reach state (the variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning). Is determined, and whether or not any of the variable display games executed prior to the variable display game does not involve the reach state is determined, and the variable display game with the reach state is determined. Is held and any of the variable display games executed prior to the variable display game does not involve a reach state, all symbol stop operations are performed in the variable display game being executed. Character 904200 and “operation suggestion information 904050” of “Stop all symbols!” May be displayed. That is, in the variable display game being executed at the timing when the display number of the button icons 904000 reaches the predetermined number (without waiting for the start condition of the next variable display game to be executed), the predetermined A notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

  Further, in the fiftieth production mode, the operation suggestion conditions for notifying to perform predetermined operations (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operations) are all conditions relating to the variable display game (display mode or display mode). (Variation time), and the example in which the specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable display game by performing the predetermined operation has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the operation suggestion condition may be, for example, a big hit. Conditions relating to the gaming state (for example, whether or not controlled to the jackpot gaming state, whether or not the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot, and whether or not the number of rounds is greater than a predetermined number, etc.) The specific effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed in the gaming state. For example, when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number during a period in which the jackpot game state is controlled, a notification that prompts the player to perform a predetermined operation is performed, and the predetermined operation is performed. At times, an effect for notifying whether or not the jackpot gaming state is a probability variable jackpot or whether the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is larger than a predetermined number may be executed. Also, when the display number of the button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number during a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state (however, it is a production mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the probable change state), A notification that prompts the player to perform a predetermined operation may be performed, and when the predetermined operation is performed, an effect may be performed to notify whether or not the gaming state is in a probable change state.

  Further, in the fiftieth effect form, even when the number of displayed button icons 904000 is one, a notification for prompting a continuous hitting operation is performed based on the satisfaction of the operation suggestion condition, and a cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous hitting operation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and if the number of displayed button icons 904000 is not a predetermined number or more (for example, two or more, or three or more), a notification for prompting a predetermined operation is not performed (for example, There is no notification that prompts any of the continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, and all symbol stop operations. May not be executed).

(Example of one announcement)
In addition, in the fiftieth effect form, three operations for each area are performed in order to stop the temporary stop symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. ) May be performed in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R three times for each area. In other words, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L, and the operation button 9030 is displayed. , The left symbol constituting the final stop symbol is oscillated and stopped, and then the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R, and the final stop is performed according to the operation of the operation button 9030. The right symbol constituting the symbol is stopped swinging, and finally, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 905C, and the middle symbol constituting the final stopped symbol in response to the operation of the operation button 9030. May be stopped. In such a configuration, when the combination of the big hit symbols becomes the final stop symbol, the symbol display areas 905L, 905R, "left", "right", and "medium" are operated according to the player's three operations. By stopping the same decorative symbols sequentially at 905C, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of the operation.

  In the left, right, and middle symbol display areas, a combination of special decorative symbols different from a normal decorative symbol (for example, images of alphanumeric characters "1" to "8") is displayed. By stopping, the player is notified that a predetermined operation is to be performed, and further, in accordance with the predetermined operation of the player, whether the display result of the variable display game is a big hit or a loss (or Or a non-probable variable jackpot) may be executed. For example, a special decoration symbol, which is an image simulating the operation button 9030, is stopped in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas (or the normal decoration symbols are displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas). The image of the character "continuous hit!" Is stopped in the "middle" symbol display area. Then, the player who has recognized the image of the character “continuous hit!” Performs a continuous hit operation, so that the display result of the variable display game (for example, the image of the character “big hit!” May be displayed.

  Further, in such a case, in accordance with the image of the character stopped in the "middle" symbol display area (according to a notification mode suggesting that a predetermined operation is performed), the variable display game is executed. The rate at which the display result becomes a big hit (or the rate at which the probability changes a big hit) may be different. For example, in the "middle" symbol display area, the operation button 9030 is longer than when the image of the character "repeat!", Which suggests that the operation button 9030 is pressed short and many times, is stopped as a special symbol. When the image of the character “Long press!” Suggesting that the operation of pressing once is performed is stopped as a special symbol, the ratio of the display result to the big hit may be higher. As described above, the effect in which the display result of the variable display game is notified according to the operation of the player may be executed as the specific effect without going through the reach state. During the period in which one variable display game is being executed, the combination of the special decoration symbols is stopped a plurality of times in the symbol display areas of “left”, “right”, and “medium”, so that the special decoration symbols are stopped. Each time the combination is stopped, the player may perform a predetermined operation. In this case, a notice effect indicating the display result is executed for each predetermined operation (excluding the last predetermined operation), and the display result may be notified according to the last predetermined operation. .

  In the fiftieth production mode, each symbol stop operation is enabled on condition that two or more prizes are made to the general winning opening, and a pseudo consecutive announcement effect is executed in accordance with each symbol stopping operation, and the general winning opening is performed. The example in which the all symbol stop operation is enabled on condition that three or more prizes are won, and the chance eye announcement effect is executed in accordance with the all symbol stop operation has been described, but the notification that the predetermined operation should be performed (the predetermined The condition that the operation is valid) may be a condition of winning four or more times in the general winning opening.

[51st production style]
In the fifty-first effect mode shown in FIG. 49, unlike the fiftieth effect mode, the specific effect that can be executed differs depending on the game state. In the fifty-first effect form, the cut-in notice effect that requires a continuous hitting operation can be executed when the gaming state is the normal state, and in any of the probable change state and the time saving state. On the other hand, the pseudo consecutive announcement effect that requires each symbol stop operation can be executed only when the game state is the normal state, and the chance notice announcement effect that requires all the symbol stop operations is the game state that is in the stable state or the time reduction state It can be executed only when

  In the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo consecutive notice effect, the operation suggestion condition may be satisfied at the same time in the normal state. In this case, the pseudo consecutive notice effect that requires a larger number of button icons 904000 is executed. For each symbol stop operation is preferentially prompted. On the other hand, since the executable game state is different between the pseudo consecutive announcement effect and the chance eye announcement effect, the operation suggestion condition is not satisfied at the same time.

  Even if the number of the button icons 904000 displayed in the normal state is three or more, the chance eye announcement effect is not executed in the normal state, so that the character “cut-in” 904000a and the “pseudo-ren” Is displayed, but the character 904000c of "chance eyes" is not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the probable change state or the time saving state is three or more, the pseudo continuous announcement effect is not executed in the probable change state or the time saving state, so that the character of “cut in” is displayed. 904000a and the character 904000c of "chance eyes" are displayed, but the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" is not displayed.

  As described above, the type of the specific effect to be notified, that is, the type of the specific effect that can be executed is different depending on the game state when the game ball has won the general winning opening, so that the appropriate state is appropriately determined according to the game state. It is possible to make the interest different.

  Note that, in the present effect form, a notice effect requiring a larger number of button icons 904000 is executed with priority, but the present effect is not limited to such a form, and a notice effect with a higher degree of expectation for the player is provided. It may be executed with priority. For example, if the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in announcement effect and the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-serial announcement effect are established for the same variable display game, the announcement effect with a higher hit rate (for example, the pseudo-serial announcement effect) ) Should be executed with priority.

[52nd production style]
In the 52nd effect form shown in FIG. 55, unlike the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 904000 is not displayed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and the game ball to the general winning opening is not displayed. For each prize, whether any of the characters 904000a to 904000c is to be displayed, and if it is to be displayed, the character 904000a for "cut-in", the character 904000b for "pseudo-ren", and the character 904000c for "chance eyes" Is determined to be displayed. FIG. 56 (A) shows whether any of characters 904000a to 904000c is to be displayed in accordance with a winning in each general winning opening, and if so, which of characters 904000a to 904000c is to be displayed. 2 shows a display information determination table for determining.

  The effect control CPU 90120 determines that the character 904000a of “cut-in” is displayed on the screen at a rate of 25% when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A, and “75%”. It is determined that the character “904000b” of “pseudo ream” is displayed on the screen. When a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B, it is determined that none of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and the character 904000a of “cut-in” is displayed at a rate of 25%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and it is determined to display the character 904000b of “pseudo-ren” on the screen at a rate of 25%.

  In addition, when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C, it is determined that none of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 80%, and the character 904000a of “cut-in” is displayed at a rate of 10%. It is determined that the character is to be displayed on the screen, and that the character 904000c of “chance eyes” is to be displayed on the screen at a rate of 10%. Also, when a game ball wins in the fourth general winning opening 9050D, it is determined that none of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 70%, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and the character 904000c of “chance eyes” is determined to be displayed on the screen at a rate of 20%.

  Then, in the same manner as in the fifty-first production mode and the fifty-first production mode, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started in a state where the character 904000a of “cut-in” is displayed, the continuous hit operation is performed. Notifying the user to perform the cut-in announcement effect in response to the continuous hitting operation, and a variable display game of a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or more is started while the character 904000b of “pseudo ream” is displayed. In this case, the user is notified to perform each symbol stop operation, a pseudo consecutive announcement effect is performed in accordance with each symbol stop operation, and the reach variation pattern is changed while the character 904000c of “chance eyes” is displayed. If the display games are suspended and the variable display games executed before that are all non-reach fluctuation patterns, perform all symbol stop operations. Notification to, to run the chance eyes announcement attraction in response to all the symbol stop operation.

  In the example of FIG. 56 (A), when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 100%, and a game ball is displayed in the second general winning opening 9050B. When a prize is won, any of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and when a game ball wins at the third general prize port 9050C, any of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 20%. When a game ball wins in the fourth general winning opening 50C, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 30%.

  As described above, the ratio at which the type of the specific effect that can be executed is notified and the ratio at which the specific effect can be executed are different depending on the general winning opening in which the game ball has won, so that any of the general winning openings is different. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether a game ball enters, and to improve the interest.

  Also, game balls fired in the left game area 9010A are more likely to win in the second general win port 9050B than in the first general win port 9050A, and game balls fired in the right game area 9010B are played in the fourth general win port. Assuming that the third general winning opening 9050C is configured to be easier to win than the 9050D, the general winning opening that is more difficult to win (the first general winning opening 9050A in a normal state, and the first general winning opening 9050A in a stable state or a time saving state). When the game ball wins the fourth general winning opening 9050D), the ratio of executing the specific effect is high.

  Also, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, there is a possibility that either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" is displayed. However, the character "904000c" of "chance eyes" is not displayed. On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, there is a possibility that either the character 904000a of “cut in” or the character 904000c of “chance eyes” is displayed. However, the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" is not displayed.

  As described above, the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of the specific effect that can be executed differ depending on the general winning opening in which the game ball has won, so that the game ball enters any of the general winning openings. You can focus on what you want to do and improve your interest.

  Further, when the gaming state is the normal state, a game ball is fired in the left gaming area 9010A, and when the gaming state is in the probable state or the time saving state, the game ball is fired in the right gaming area 9010B. In the normal state in which the game ball wins in the 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, the characters 904000a to 904000c are more than in the probable state or the time saving state in which the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Is high, and the execution ratio of the specific effect is high.

  When the gaming state is the normal state, the interest is likely to be reduced. Therefore, by increasing the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed, the interest is prevented from being lowered. On the other hand, when the game state is the probable change state or the time reduction state, the player is interested in the special figure game or the ordinary figure game, so that the display of the characters 904000a to 904000c and the execution of the specific effect based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition are rather the game. Therefore, the ratio at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the ratio at which the specific effect is executed are set lower than in the normal state. In this way, it is possible to appropriately change the interest of the game ball winning the general winning opening depending on the game state.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 56 (A), and when the game state is in the probable change state or the time saving state, the ratio at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the specific effect are executed as compared with the normal game state. The ratio may be increased. Conversely to the example shown in FIG. 56 (A), when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first general winning is achieved. Characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in the mouth 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B. Also, in FIG. 56 (A), the pseudo consecutive announcement effect can be executed only at the time of winning the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, but similarly, the third general winning opening 9050C. Alternatively, a specific effect that can be executed only when winning the fourth general winning opening 9050D may be provided.

  In addition, without being limited to the example shown in FIG. 56 (A), as shown in FIG. 56 (B), a game ball wins for each of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When the game state at the time is the normal state, the ratio at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the ratio at which the specific effect is executed are higher than when the game state at the time when the game ball wins is the probability change state or the time saving state. May be increased. In contrast to the example shown in FIG. 56 (B), when a game ball wins at each general winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state, a game ball wins at each general winning opening in the normal state. Characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher ratio. In FIG. 56 (B), a specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is the normal state may be provided, and the specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is the probable change state or the time saving state. May be provided.

  In addition, depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, or the probable change state or the time saving state, the present invention is not limited to the example in which the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c are displayed and the rate at which the specific effect is executed are different. For example, whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, whether or not the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number, the number of successive jackpot game states (continuous number = end of the jackpot game state) Whether the number of consecutive jackpot gaming states controlled to the probability change state or the time saving state later + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, whether or not the variable display game in which the display result is a loss combination has continued for a predetermined number of times, Depending on other conditions, such as whether or not the variable display game of the variation pattern of “reach” (“reach without loss”) has continued for a predetermined number of times and whether or not the number of stored memories has reached a predetermined number. It may be made different proportions percentage or specific effect that 904000a~904000c is displayed is executed.

[Display Area of Each Image on Screen of Image Display Device 905]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 may be set as follows. Hereinafter, the maximum width of an image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 is (X + 1) pixels, and the maximum height is (Y + 1) pixels. The coordinates of the pixel at the upper left corner of the display screen are (0, 0), and the coordinates of the pixel at the lower right corner of the display screen are (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 57A, a rectangular area defined by coordinates (0, 0) and (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1, 0) A rectangular area defined by the coordinates and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices is defined as a second area β. There is no overlapping area between the first area α and the second area β. In the present example, the second area β is an area wider than the first area α.

  In the first area α, prizes related to the number of winnings in each winning opening, such as the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening. Numerical information can be displayed. In the second area β, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), an error message display area 5E, fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B, decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, and a winning prize storage display area 905H. Is provided. In the examples of FIGS. 57 and 58, the background image is visible in the second area β, but is not visible in the first area α.

  In this example, the entire image of the background image stored in the ROM 90121 as the effect data has a total width of (X + 1) pixels as shown in FIGS. This is an image in which the height is (Y + 1) pixels, the character D is climbing near the top of the mountain, and the character E is climbing near the foot of the mountain. In the examples of FIGS. 57 (b) and (c) and FIGS. 58 (e) and (f), the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined by coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] Of these, only the area corresponding to the second area β [rectangular area defined by the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is visible to the player. In the entire area of the background image, an area corresponding to the first area α [a rectangular area defined by coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices] is invisible to the player.

  Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 57 (b) (c) and 58 (e) (f), the player is defined with the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. The character D included in the rectangular area is visible, but the character E included in the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0, 0) and (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is invisible.

  In the examples of FIGS. 57 (b) (c) and 58 (e) (f), in the first area α, “(1) the total number of winnings to the general winning opening on the day” is “today's general winnings”. (2) "Today's navel winning number", which is the total number of winnings in the first starting winning opening on the day, and (3) "Today's total number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, on the day. 3 items of "Den's winning number" are displayed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D when the winning in the general winning opening occurs. A winning prize port designation command for specifying whether the game ball has won the first starting prize port or the second starting prize port when a winning in the starting prize port occurs. Receives a mouth designation command. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can individually total the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening. In this example, (1) “Today's general winning number” is 70, (2) “Today's navel winning number” is 521, and (3) “Today's electric chew winning number” is 217. In this way, by displaying the number of winnings in the general winning opening and the number of winnings in the starting winning opening in a comparable manner, it is possible to relatively grasp the winning situation in each winning opening.

  Also, in the example of FIGS. 57 (b) and 58 (e), in the second area β, the fourth symbol for the first special figure is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 905A. This is a state in which decorative symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. In the start winning storage display area 905H, a round object is displayed at the left end as one piece of suspension information corresponding to one suspension of the special figure game. The image of the fourth symbol being variably displayed, the image of the decorative symbol being variably displayed, and the image of the hold information are all displayed only in the second area β.

  It is assumed that the display layer for the fourth symbol, the display layer for the decorative symbol, and the display layer for the hold information are all higher than the display layer for the background image. Here, the fact that the display layer of a certain image is higher than the display layer of another image means that when a certain image and another image are superimposed and displayed, the visibility of one image is visually recognized by another image. That is, display control that gives priority to sexuality is performed. Specifically, in the examples of FIGS. 57 (b) and (c) and FIGS. 58 (e) and (f), one of the area where the images of the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information are displayed and one of the background images are displayed. In this case, regarding the overlapping area, the display layer is higher in rank than the background image, the decorative pattern, and the hold information are easily visible (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make the background image difficult to view (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information appear to be displayed in front of the background image (on the player side).

  In this embodiment, the display layer of the error message is higher than the display layer of the decorative design. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 58 (f), the area in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the area in which the error message is displayed overlap. In this case, the overlapping area With regard to, the display control is performed such that the error message whose display layer is higher than the decorative symbol is easily visible (including visible), while the decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize (including non-visible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front of the decorative symbol (on the player side).

  In addition, as display control for making the player visually recognize only the area corresponding to the second area β in the entire area of the background image, only the area corresponding to the second area β in the entire area of the background image is set as the background. It is set as the display layer of the image, and the area corresponding to the first area α in the entire area of the background image is not set as the display layer of the background image (that is, the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y), the image data of only a rectangular area defined as the vertex is used).

  In addition, as another display control for making only an area corresponding to the second area β out of the entire area of the background image visible to the player, the entire area of the background image is set as a display layer of the background image (that is, the display layer of the background image is set). The image data of the entire background image [rectangular area defined by coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is used in the display layer higher than the background image display layer. By setting another background image (for example, a white and plain image) for the winning number information in the area corresponding to the area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer cannot be visually recognized. It may be. Note that, in the case of such a configuration, a predetermined transmittance (e.g., visibility of an image of a display layer lower than the display layer) is provided on another background image for winning number information (for example, a plain white image). , 0%), the image of the lower display layer may be made visible, and by setting a predetermined transmittance, the background image of the lower display layer may be set. The area corresponding to the first area α becomes visible, and the character E becomes visible.

  The display layer of the winning number information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layer of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the visibility of the winning number information does not decrease due to the display of other information in the first area α. The display layer of the winning number information may be the same display layer as the error message having no display area in the first area α, or may be a display layer higher than the error message. May also be a lower display layer. For example, the display layer of the winning number information is the highest of all the display layers, and is displayed in the display area of other information (whether displayed in the first area α or displayed in the second area β). Instead, the visibility may not be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are all performed in the second area β. Depending on what is displayed on the image display device 905, the number of prizes to the general prize port (“today's general prize number”), the first start prize, as the prize number information displayed in the first area α. The visibility of the number of winnings in the mouth (“the number of today's navel winnings”) and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening (“the number of current day winnings”) is not hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information.

  Then, when the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are performed on the image display device 905, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening, FIG. As shown in d), based on the effect control CPU 90120 receiving the general winning opening designation command, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (“today's general winning number”). Is updated. As described above, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening while the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are performed, the general prize displayed in the first area α is displayed. The number of wins in the mouth is updated without obstructing visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning number information is updated is not hindered by the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information. As a result, the player can easily understand that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred, and that the winning number in the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

  Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the display result is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol ends and the display result stops as shown in FIG. At the same time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended, and the display result is stopped and displayed. In the present example, it is assumed that the fourth symbol display area 905A remains lit (displayed) in a display color reminiscent of a loss (the display result is stopped and displayed), and as a fixed decorative symbol, In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the lost symbol "5, 3, 1" is stopped and displayed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed (in a state where the display result is derived and displayed), and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed (the display result is derived and displayed). Since each of the decorative symbols (in the state) is displayed in the second area β, depending on whether these images are displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings displayed in the first area α As information, the number of winnings in the general winning opening ("the number of general winnings of the day"), the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening ("the number of navel winnings of the day"), and the winning in the second starting winning opening The visibility of the number (“Today's number of winning electric tunes”) is not hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  Then, in the image display device 905, when the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are performed, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening, as shown in FIG. 57 (d). Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 90120 has received the general winning opening designation command, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (“today's general winning number”) is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are performed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is increased. , Updated without hindering visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning number information is updated is not hindered by the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol. As a result, the player can easily understand that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred, and that the winning number in the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

  In the examples of FIGS. 57 (b), (c), and (d), an example is shown in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without obstructing the visibility. In the same manner as in the case of the general winning opening, the winning of the first starting winning opening is not performed regardless of the variable display and the stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol. The number is updated without the visibility being hindered. Also, when a winning in the second start winning opening occurs, similarly to the case of the general winning opening, regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, The number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is updated without obstructing the visibility.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 (e) and (f), when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the abnormality detection designation command designating that an abnormality has occurred, the image display device 905 displays an error message (in this example, “error has occurred. Is displayed.) Is displayed. As described above, the display layer of the error message is higher than the display layer of the decorative design. Therefore, when the decorative symbol is variably displayed, or when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the effect control CPU 90120 receives the abnormality detection designation command, the area in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the error are displayed. With respect to the overlapping range with the area where the message is displayed, display control is performed so that the error message is easily visible (including visible), while the decorative pattern is difficult to view (including non-visible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 58 (f), when viewed from the player, the error message is closer to the player (on the player side) than the decorative symbol being displayed variably (or the decorative symbol being stopped and displayed). Appears to be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (f), the display of the error message is performed in the second area β. , The number of winnings in the general winning opening ("the number of today's general winnings"), the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening ("the number of today's navel winnings"), and The visibility of the number of winnings in the 2-start winning opening (“Today's winning number of electric chu”) is not hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the display of the error message.

  Then, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while an error message is displayed on the image display device 905, as shown in FIG. 58 (g), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the general winning. Based on the reception of the mouth designation command, the number of prizes to the general prize port displayed in the first area α (“today's general prize number”) is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while the error message is being displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α does not hinder the visibility. Be updated. That is, depending on the display of the error message, the visibility when the winning number information is updated is not hindered. As a result, the player can easily understand that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred, and that the winning number in the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

  In addition, in the example of FIGS. 58 (f) and (g), an example is shown in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without obstructing the visibility. When this occurs, as in the case of the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening is updated without hindering the visibility, regardless of the display of the error message. Also, when a winning in the second starting winning opening occurs, the visibility of the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is hindered regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general winning opening. Will be updated without.

  In the example of FIG. 58 (f), the character "error has occurred" is displayed simply to notify that an abnormality has occurred based on the reception of the abnormality detection designation command. Alternatively, different error messages may be displayed according to the type of abnormality specified by the abnormality detection specifying command. For example, when an error detection specification command that specifies that a magnetic error has occurred is received, the message “Magnetic error has occurred” is displayed, and an error detection specification command that specifies that a vibration error has occurred is received. Sometimes, the character "Vibration error has occurred." May be displayed, and when the abnormality detection designation command for designating the occurrence of radio wave abnormality is received, the character "Radio wave error has occurred." .

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 57A, a rectangular area defined by coordinates (0, 0) and (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1) are defined. , 0) and coordinates (X, Y) are defined as the second area β, but the first area in which the winning number information can be displayed, as well as the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the reservation The second area in which the information and the error message can be displayed is not limited to a rectangular area, but may be any area that does not overlap with each other on the screen.

(Display / non-display setting of winning number information)
As described with reference to FIG. 19, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is operated by opening the glass door frame 903a forward (operating by the clerk of the game arcade but not by the player). Position), and when the setting for displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening by the operation of the player is performed on the player setting screen (see FIG. 20), the general winning opening Winning number information related to the winning number and the like is displayed.

  The example shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 is a display mode of the screen in a state where the setting for displaying the number-of-winning information is performed in this manner, and when the setting for displaying the number-of-winning information is performed. Means that in the first area α, not only the number of winnings in the general winning opening, but also the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening (so-called “navel”) and the winning in the second starting winning opening (so-called “Den Chu”). The number is also displayed. That is, according to the operation of the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030, it is possible to set whether to display the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening or the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 19, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the non-display setting (first position), the winning number information (the winning number to the general winning opening) is operated by the operation button 9030. And whether the setting for displaying the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) is performed. Do not show. Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display setting (second position), the setting for displaying the winning number information is not performed by the operation button 9030 (in the case of non-display setting). In (), the winning number information is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 905.

  The example shown in FIGS. 59 (b) and (c) is a display mode of the screen in a state where the setting of not displaying the winning number information is performed, and the setting of not displaying the winning number information is performed. In this case, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed in the first area α, but the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening (so-called “navel”) and the second starting winning opening (so-called “Den Chu”). The number of winnings is not displayed.

  As described above, according to the setting operation on the game hall side and the setting of whether or not to display the winning number information according to the setting operation on the player side, it is possible to set according to the convenience of the game hall side. In addition, the winning number information can be displayed according to the judgment of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a), (b) and (c), when the setting is made not to display the winning number information, the error message display area 5E, The fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, and the start winning storage display area 905H are common. That is, the display position and display range (image size) of each image of the error message, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information displayed in the second area β are determined by the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number. It does not change with the setting that does not display information. This simplifies the display control associated with the setting change for setting whether or not to display the winning number information.

  On the other hand, when the setting is made not to display the winning number information, and when the setting is made to display the winning number information as shown in FIGS. 59 (a), (b), and (c) (display examples in FIGS. 57 and 58). Unlike the first embodiment, the background image can be visually recognized in the first area α and the second area β. In the examples of FIGS. 59 (a), (b), and (c), the first area of the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined by coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] An area corresponding to α [a rectangular area defined by coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices], and an area corresponding to the second area β [coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates ( X, Y) and the rectangular area defined as the vertex], that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

  Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 59 (a), (b), and (c), the player determines the character included in the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. D is visible, and the character E included in a rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0, 0) and (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is also visible.

  As described above, regarding the display position and the display range (the size of the image) of the specific image (the error message, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information), the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number information are displayed. The control load is reduced by not changing (unifying) the setting with no setting, while other images (background images) can be viewed with the setting to display the winning number information and the setting not to display the winning number information By changing the range, the interest in the case where the winning number information is not displayed is improved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are performed on the image display device 905, the winning in the general winning opening is achieved. 59, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed because the winning number information is set not to be displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (d). Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are performed on the image display device 905, even when a prize in the general winning opening occurs. As shown in FIG. 59 (d), by setting not to display the winning number information, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed.

  In the examples of FIGS. 59 (b), (c), and (d), an example is shown in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed even when a winning in the general winning opening occurs. When the display is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening is not displayed even when a winning in the first starting winning opening occurs, and when the winning in the second starting winning opening occurs. Also, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is not displayed. In this way, whether or not to display the number of winnings in each winning opening can be set according to the operation of the player.

(Each item of winning information)
FIG. 60 shows an example of items of winning number information that can be displayed in the first area α. In addition, FIG. 60 shows items related to the number of winnings in the general winning opening, and similarly, items related to the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the items related to the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening. Can be displayed in the first area α.

  It is possible to display "Today's general winning number (referred to as A1)" which is the total value of the winning numbers in each of the general winning openings since the power-on of the gaming machine. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and increments the value of the general winning number counter by one each time a general winning opening designation command is received. By doing so, A1 can be totaled.

  In addition, "Today's general winning ratio (hereinafter referred to as A2)" which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs from the power-on of the gaming machine can be displayed. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the out-number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and changes the value of the out-number counter every time a detection signal output from the out-sphere detector is received. By adding one by one, the total number of outs can be totaled. By calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs, A2 can be totaled.

  In addition, it is possible to display "Today's general prize ball number (referred to as A3)" which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in each general prize port from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In addition, “Today's general prize ball ratio (referred to as A4)” which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls since the game machine was turned on can be displayed.

  The ROM 90121 stores the number of prize balls determined for each of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, and the large winning opening. . The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and the general prize mouth designation command is designated each time the general prize mouth designation command is received. By adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening to the value of the general prize ball counter, A3 can be counted. At the time of turning on the power, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, and sets a starting winning opening designation command, a general winning opening designation command, and a special winning opening. The total number of prize balls can be totaled by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize port specified by each command to the value of the prize ball counter each time a special winning opening winning command that specifies winning is received By calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls, A4 can be totaled.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies whether the current game state is the low base state or the high base state by specifying the game state by the game state designation command, and wins in the low base state. The number information (B1 to B4) and the winning number information (C1 to C4) in the high base state can be separately counted.

  Specifically, it is possible to display "the number of general winnings in the low base state (referred to as B1)" which is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning opening in the low base state, and each general winning opening in the high base state. , "The general winning number in the high base state (referred to as C1)" which is the total value of the winning numbers for the game can be displayed.

  At the time of power-on, the effect control CPU 90120 sets both the value of the low base medium winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 and the value of the high base medium winning number counter to 0. . Then, during a period in which the game state specified by the received game state specification command is the normal state, the value of the low base medium general winning number counter is incremented by one each time the general winning opening specification command is received, thereby setting B1. During the period in which the gaming state specified by the received gaming state designation command is either the probable change state or the time saving state, the value of the high-basis general winning number counter is incremented every time the general winning opening designation command is received. By adding one by one, C1 can be totaled.

  In addition, it is possible to display the “general winning ratio in the low base state (referred to as B2)” which is the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base state, and the ratio of C1 to the number of outs in the high base state. "General winning ratio in the high base state (C2)" can be displayed.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium out number counter and the value of the high base medium out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. Then, in the normal state, the low base medium out number can be totaled by adding 1 to the value of the low base medium out number counter every time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received, By calculating the ratio of B1 to the low base medium outs, B2 can be totaled. On the other hand, in the probable change state or the time saving state, the value of the high base medium out counter is incremented by one each time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received, so that the high base medium out number can be totaled. By calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of high base medium outs, C2 can be totaled.

  In addition, it is possible to display “the number of general prize balls in the low base state (referred to as B3)” which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening in the low base state, It is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the high base state (C3)" which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in each general prize port in the state.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium general prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. And During the period in which the game state specified by the received game state specification command is the normal state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize hole specified by the received general prize port specification command is set to a low base medium general prize ball number counter. B3 (“the number of general prize balls in the low base state”) can be totaled, and the game state specified by the received game state designation command is either the probable state or the time saving state. During the period, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize hole specified by the received general prize port designation command is added to the value of the high-base medium general prize ball counter to obtain C3 (“the number of general prize balls in the high base state”). )).

  In addition, it is possible to display “the general prize ball ratio in the low base state (referred to as B4)” which is the ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state. It is possible to display the “general prize ball ratio in the high base state (C4)” which is the ratio of C3.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. . Then, in the normal state, every time the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the large winning port winning command are received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning port specified by each command is reduced to a low base medium prize. By adding to the value of the ball number counter, the number of low base medium prize balls can be totaled. By calculating the ratio of B3 to the number of low base medium prize balls, B4 ("low base state" General prize ball ratio ”) can be counted. On the other hand, in the probable change state or the time saving state, each time the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the large winning port winning command are received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning port specified by each command is increased. By adding to the value of the base medium prize ball number counter, the number of high base medium prize balls can be totaled. By calculating the ratio of C3 to the high base medium prize ball number, C4 (“high” The base prize ball ratio in the base state can be counted.

  As described above, since information related to the number of winnings at the general winning opening can be totaled for each gaming state, the player can grasp information according to the current gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is the low base state (normal state), the items B1 to B4 are focused on, and when the gaming state is the high base state (probable change state or time saving state), the items C1 to C4 are focused on. Become.

  Note that when the game state is the low base state, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the items B1 to B4 in the first area α, but does not display the items C1 to C4, and when the game state is the high base state. , C1 to C4 may be displayed in the first area α, while the items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. Although the items B1 to B4 and the items C1 to C4 are displayed in the first area α regardless of the game state, the items B1 to B4 are more visually recognized than the items C1 to C4 in the low base state. The display may be performed in a manner that is easy to perform (for example, large), and in the high base state, the items C1 to C4 may be displayed in a manner (for example, large) that is easier to visually recognize than the items B1 to B4.

(Aggregation of winning information for the set period)
In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 is capable of totalizing the number of winnings in the period set by the player, and is a total value of the number of winnings to each general winning opening in the setting period, “the general winnings in the setting period ( D1) can be displayed in the first area α.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter to 0 during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122 when the counting period according to the operation of the player shown in FIG. The value of the timer is set to a set period (total period according to the operation of the player), and the total timer is started. Then, every time the general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is incremented by one during the set period, and the general win is set during the set period when the counting timer times out (when the set counting period elapses). The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D1.

  During the period in which the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period after the last reception of the detection signal from the out ball detector), the counting timer is updated, while the period in which the number of outs is not increasing (for example, After a predetermined period has elapsed since the last reception of the detection signal from the out-sphere detector, the counting timer may not be updated and the stopped state may be set. In this way, the period in which the game ball is not fired in the game area 9010 may be excluded from the total period.

  When the counting timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is reset to the setting period (for the player). (The counting period according to the operation), and the counting timer is started again. Each time the general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is added during the set period, and when the counting timer times out again (when the set counting period elapses again), the general winning number counter is set during the setting period. Is displayed in the first area α as D1. In this way, D1 corresponding to the tally period is displayed for each tally period set by the player.

  In addition, it is possible to display “general winning ratio (D2) in the set period” which is the ratio of D1 to the number of game machines out during the set period. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general number-of-wins counter to 0 during the set period stored in the RAM 90122, and simultaneously sets the value of the out-number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0. By adding 1 to the value of the out-number counter during the set period each time a detection signal output from the out-sphere detector is received, the out-number during the set period can be totaled. By calculating the ratio of D1 to the number of outs in the period, D2 can be totaled.

  Further, it is possible to display “the number of general prize balls (D3) in the set period” which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening in the set period. In addition, a “general prize ball ratio (D4) in the set period” which is a ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period can be displayed.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter to 0 during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122 when the counting period according to the operation of the player shown in FIG. The value of the counting timer is set to a set period (counting period according to the operation of the player), and the counting timer is started. Then, each time the general winning opening designation command is received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening designated by the general winning opening designation command is added to the value of the general winning sphere counter during the setting period, and the counting timer is executed. The value of the general prize ball number counter is displayed in the first area α as D3 during the set period when a timeout occurs (when the set totaling period has elapsed).

  When the counting timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general prize ball number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is reset to the setting period (the player). Is set in the counting period according to the operation of the above), and the counting timer is started again. Each time the general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general prize ball number counter is added during the set period, and the general prize ball during the set period when the counting timer times out again (when the set counting period elapses again). The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D3. In this way, D3 corresponding to the tally period is displayed for each tally period set by the player.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter to 0 during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122, and simultaneously sets the value of the prize ball number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122. Is set to 0, and each time a start winning port specifying command, a general winning port specifying command, or a special winning port winning command specifying a winning to the special winning port is received, the winning port specified by each command is set. Is added to the value of the prize ball counter during the set period, so that the number of prize balls in the set period can be counted, and the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period Is calculated, D4 can be totaled.

  In addition, since the general winning opening designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120 specifies which general winning opening the gaming ball has won, the effect controlling CPU 90120 includes the first general winning opening 9050A to the first general winning opening 9050A. 4 The number of winnings in the general winning opening 9050D is individually counted, and items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, and D1 to D4 are counted for each general winning opening, and the total value is calculated. It can be displayed in the first area α.

  Each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number related to the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening. Which of the items is to be displayed in the first area α may be automatically determined according to a game state or the like. For example, items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described below, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Which of the related items is to be displayed in the first area α may be selectable by an operation on the game hall side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030), and the player side (For example, an operation using the operation button 9030).

  In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described below, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening For each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the ROM 90121 stores the reference value in association with each item. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 checks whether or not the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has reached the reference value of the item, and if the total value has not reached the reference value. As shown in FIG. 61 (4) described later, it is possible to display a message notifying that the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has not reached the reference value of the item. . Thereby, the player grasps whether or not the total value of the item displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value compared with the reference value of the item, and selects the gaming machine. (Whether the game in the gaming machine should be continued or not).

  Next, a method of setting the counting period will be described with reference to FIG. For example, the tallying period setting screen of FIG. 61 further sets the tallying period when a selection to display the number of winnings at the general winning opening is made on the above-described selection screen of FIG. 20 (2). Is a screen displayed when a selection screen for allowing the user to select whether or not to make a selection is displayed, and when the user selects to set the aggregation period on the selection screen (when the intention to set the aggregation period is confirmed). And

  In the setting screen of FIG. 61A, a message “Please set the aggregation period.” Is displayed, and an image imitating the operation button 9030 is displayed below. On the setting screen, an icon including a character of “10 minutes”, an icon including a character of “30 minutes”, and an icon including a character of “60 minutes” are displayed, and are also referred to as “enter after selecting with a jog dial”. A message is displayed, and further, an arrow is displayed to urge the user to press the operation button 9030 (jog dial) after rotating it.

  When the totaling period is set to 10 minutes, when the operation button 9030 is pressed by rotating the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the left and selecting an icon including the character “10 minutes”, Message is displayed, and the totaling period is set to 10 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. When the totaling period is set to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. 61 (1), when the operation button 9030 is pressed while an icon including the character of “30 minutes” is selected, FIG. 61 (2) As shown in the figure, a message "Setting period is 30 minutes" is displayed, and the totaling period is set to 30 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 30 minutes. In addition, when the totaling period is set to 60 minutes, the operation button 9030 is pressed by rotating the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the right to select an icon including the character “60 minutes”. The message “Setting period is 60 minutes” is displayed, and the totaling period is set to 60 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

  In this way, it is possible to set a desired tally period according to the operation of the player. In the example of FIG. 61, 30 minutes is set as the aggregation period. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), in the first area α, the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is displayed as “the general winning number (D1) for the set period”. In the example of FIG. 61 (3), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the total value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is Since it is 37, the total value exceeds the reference value. Therefore, there is no notification that the total value has not reached the reference value.

  On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 61 (4), while 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is totaled. Since the value is 29, the total value has not reached the reference value. Therefore, the notification that the total value has not reached the reference value is displayed (display of a message “It is below the reference value (30 times / 30 minutes)”).

(Items related to the number of winnings in the start winning opening)
Note that the effect control CPU 90120 receives the start winning opening designation command for specifying which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening has been won when a winning in the starting winning opening has occurred. By the same method as the tallying process when the general winning opening designation command for designating any of the first to fourth general winning openings is received, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening of the day (A1 Equivalent), "the winning ratio of the first starting winning opening of the day (corresponding to A2)", "the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning of the first starting winning opening of the day (corresponding to A3)", And "Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the prize in the first winning prize port of the day to the total number of prize balls of the present day (equivalent to A4)", and "The second starting prize port of the day" Winners (equivalent to A1) "," Winners in today's 2nd start winning opening " Rate (corresponding to A2) "," the number of prize balls awarded based on winning the second starting winning opening of the day (corresponding to A3) ", and 2 The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the winning opening (corresponding to A4) ", and can be displayed in the first area α.

  Further, “the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)”, “the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B2)”, “the low starting state in the low base state” (1) Number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the start winning opening (corresponding to B3) "and" Number of award balls awarded in the low base state to the first starting winning opening in the low base state "Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning (equivalent to B4)", "Number of winnings to the second starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B1)", "Second starting in the low base state" Winning ratio to winning opening (equivalent to B2) "," Number of award balls awarded based on winning in the second starting winning opening in low base state (equivalent to B3) ", and" award in low base state In the low base condition against the number of awarded balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to B4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  In addition, “the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)”, “the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C2)”, “the number of winning in the high base state” (1) Number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the winning opening (corresponding to C3) "and" Number of award balls awarded in the high base state to the first starting winning port in the high base state "Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning (equivalent to C4)", "Number of winnings to the second starting winning opening in high base state (equivalent to C1)", "Second starting in high base state" Winning ratio to winning opening (corresponding to C2) "," Number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state (equivalent to C3) ", and" award in the high base state In the high base condition against the number of awarded balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to C4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  Also, “the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening in the set period (corresponding to D1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D2)”, “the first starting winning in the setting period” Number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the mouth (corresponding to D3) "and" Award based on a prize in the first start winning port in the set period for the number of award balls awarded in the set period (Corresponding to D4), “the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening in the set period (corresponding to D1)”, “the winning ratio to the second starting winning opening in the setting period ( D2), "the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the second start winning opening in the set period (equivalent to D3)", and "the number of prize balls awarded in the set period" Awarded based on winning in the second starting winning port during the period Percentage of winning balls number (corresponding to D4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

(Indication of the role and the ratio)
In the gaming machine 901, the gaming control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 also has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter) , And also referred to as an “entering area”). Further, in the gaming machine 901, information such as winning combination and winning ratio can be displayed on a display monitor 9029 shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 provided on the main board 9011.

  As described above, on the gaming machine maker side, it is usual that the gaming board surface is designed so that the gaming medium enters the general prize area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. When the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the gaming machine is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been performed, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game medium has entered the general prize area with the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the embodiment described later, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made in the gaming machine having the general winning area. Hereinafter, the display of the accessory ratio and the like will be described. Hereinafter, the display of the total of the game balls and the ratio of the accessory on the main board 9011 will be described.

  A main board 9011 shown in FIG. 64 is a board for performing control related to a game. The main board 9011 is sealed in a board case 90201 as shown in FIG. 66, and a display monitor 9029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged at the center of the main board 9011 as shown in FIG. I have. The display monitor 9029 is arranged at the front when viewing the main board 9011. Since the main board 9011 cannot be viewed when the glass door frame 903a is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 9011 is viewed from the back side of the game board 902 with the glass door frame 903a opened. And is different from the front of the gaming machine 901. However, the front of the main board 9011 and the front of the gaming machine 901 may be common.

  In the main board 9011, information on winning of a game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning a first starting opening (navel), the number of winning balls by winning a second starting winning opening (electric chew), a large winning opening ( The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls by winning a prize to the attacker) are input and totaled. The winning ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (denchu) and the number of prize balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. ) Is displayed. The winning combination is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of winning balls (the number of consecutive winning balls described below) due to winning in the big winning opening (attacker) in the total number of winning balls. The winning combination is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) and the winning number of balls in the large winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls (the following number of acquired balls). Is the percentage that is accounted for. The total number of prize balls (the total number of balls obtained below) is calculated based on the number of prize balls by winning in the grand prize opening port (attacker), the number of prize balls by prize in the second starting prize port (electric chew), and the grand prize port. (Attacker) and the total number of prize balls by winning a prize port (first start prize port, general prize port) other than the second start prize port (electric chute). The special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable characters, and the passing ratio of the game ball varies, so that the expected winning ratio of the game ball varies. is there. The winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed auditoriums, and the passing width of the game ball is fixed. As a result, the expected winning percentage of the game balls is a fixed character.

  Aggregation and calculation methods of information related to the winning of the game include the number of prize balls (general prize ball number) and the number of prize balls in the first starting port (navel) and the general prize port (sode) in the number of 6000 prize balls. 2) The special electric prize, which is the number of prize balls by winning in the opening prize opening (Den Chu), the number of normal electric prize prize balls (the number of electric chu prize balls), and the number of prize balls by winning in the grand prize opening (attacker) Count the number of balls (Attacker Prize balls). The tally is taken as one set, and the winning combination (%) and the winning ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of award balls (general award balls), the number of ordinary electric winning award balls (the number of electric Chu award balls), and the number of special electric playing The number of prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set. Furthermore, the storage of 11 sets of 60000 pieces is stored in a considerable amount (for example, for several bytes), and the winning combination (%) and the winning combination (%) can be calculated.

  The display monitor 9029 switches and displays the winning combination (%), the winning combination (%), and the total winning combination (%) and the winning ratio (%) for 60000 pieces at predetermined time intervals (for example, 30 seconds). be able to. That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes two minutes to display all, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the first starting port (navel) and the winning in the second starting winning port (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to the prize ball, and the number of prize balls due to the prize in the large winning opening (attacker) change. Then, for example, if the number of winning prizes won after displaying the 60,000 winning combinations (%) is reflected on the 60,000 winning combinations (%) displayed thereafter, for example, There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the winning combination (%) and the winning ratio (%) for 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting port (navel), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting port (electric chew), the number of prize balls by winning the large winning port (attacker), and the total prize balls Such discrepancies can be prevented by inputting and counting the numbers at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the display timing of 60,000 combinations (%)).

In the following, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) is described. A method of calculating the ratio of the bonuses (ratio (%)) when the total number of the bonuses acquired balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of obtained balls refers to the total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. In addition, the number of the accessory acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of continuous bonus item acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker. Therefore, the winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (1). The winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2).
Role-run = [Number of continuous role-acquired balls / total number of gains] × 100 (1)
Role ratio = [(number of consecutive acquired ball + number of acquired ball) / total acquired number] × 100 (2)

When the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of obtained bonus balls is 42000, the bonus ratio is obtained by dividing 42000 by 60,000 and truncating 0.70 decimal places to three decimal places).
However, microcomputers used in gaming machines cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, and thus require calculations using the following method.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60000. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, a second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be divided by 1000.

  In this example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a three-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate a long-lived bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of the accessory acquisition balls.

  Here, a microcomputer used in a gaming machine can only perform an operation between values of up to two bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower one byte 60h is truncated to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, a decimal number, so that the calculation by the microcomputer used in the gaming machine becomes easier. 234 is calculated in the notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is rounded down to 00A410h of the number of the accessory acquisition balls, and the number of the accessory acquisition balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, calculation by a microcomputer used in a game machine is facilitated, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of prize balls and the number of obtained bonus balls are 10 times is + 1%. That is, as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

  The substrate case 90201 is formed of a material having a light-transmitting property, so that the main substrate 9011 and the display monitor 9029 can be viewed. The board case 90201 has a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 9011 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 9011. The display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat radiating hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 9011 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to view the main board 9011 and the main board 9011.

  In addition, a seal for displaying the type, model, specifications, and the like of the main substrate 9011 is provided on the substrate case 90201. These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 9029. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, when the display monitor 9029 is arranged on the first portion of the main substrate 9011 (for example, at the center of the main substrate 9011), the second portion different from the first portion on the main substrate 9011 is formed. Another electrical component or the like may be arranged in a portion (for example, a peripheral portion of the main substrate 9011), and a hole, a heat radiation hole, and a seal may be arranged in a portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 9011. Good. In particular, it is preferable that the heat radiating hole is provided near the display monitor 9029 in order to release the heat generated by the display monitor 9029. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat radiating holes are arranged at positions not in front of the display monitor 9029. According to this, since the visibility on the display monitor 9029 is not hindered, it is easy to confirm information on winning.

  Further, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap with the portion of the substrate case 90201 corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 9011. Specifically, a portion of the board case 90201 corresponding to the second portion of the main board 9011 does not overlap a hole to which one connector of the wiring is connected and a connection destination to which another connector of the wiring is connected. To According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 from being hindered by the wiring.

  The main board 9011 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine. It is preferable to arrange them between them. The other electronic components referred to here are desirably large control components such as a CPU, for example.

  In addition, a storage area in which information on game winning is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (sum of information on game winning stored in a ring buffer provided with 10 counters of maximum 2 bytes), award ball The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be stored continuously. The ring buffer will be further described later. It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the storage area for storing information on winning of a game when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive bonus balls obtained is larger than the value of the number of balls obtained. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, or an error display or a warning display may be performed, or the initialization process may be performed after the display. The error display and the warning display will be further described later.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired accessory balls is 19876, the calculation of the winning combination (%) is performed by dividing 34876 by 19321 and dividing the number by 34321 to calculate the ratio. 19876/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the winning combination (%) is about 57.9%. When an operation is performed in the game control microcomputer 90100, the calculation at the decimal point must be avoided. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is truncated to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated to be 57% of the duty ratio (%) and displayed on the display monitor 9029. In this example, the value calculated by the accurate calculation is different from the value calculated by the accurate calculation in the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799. When this is calculated by the above-described method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 90100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, resulting in an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, the accurate value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is changed from 69% to 70% by 1%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of the error of 1%, the winning combination (%) (or winning combination (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed if the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Further, when the value is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1% and may be even larger. That is, the error increases as the total number of acquired balls decreases. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display ratio (%) and the position of the winning combination (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the fact that the error may be large may be notified by emission of a dedicated lamp, output of a notification sound, or blinking of the displayed value.

  The display monitor 9029 displays a winning combination (%) and a winning combination (%) on seven segments, and switches and displays each value every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). In this case, for example, while the position ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a game medium newly wins on the electric chute or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly changes the position after 30 seconds. %), The value of the winning combination (%) may differ from the value of the consecutive winning combination (%). For this reason, it is preferable that the winning combination (%) and the winning combination (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

  Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in seven segments is two digits (for example, when two seven segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 65, a numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits. However, in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under a specific condition.

  In addition, in the above calculation method, an example was shown in which the total number of acquired balls, the number of acquired balls, and the number of consecutive acquired balls were counted in the counter, but as a counting method, each of the attacker and the electric chew was used. A sensor provided is used to detect that the game medium has won, and based on the detection result, the number of prize balls is individually counted, and then, a counter for the number of balls for winning the role, and a counter for the number of balls for the continuous role winning. The value to be calculated may be calculated. In addition, a sensor provided separately to the attacker, and a sensor provided after a discharge path from which the game medium winning the attacker and the game medium winning the electric chute are discharged are combined, and based on the detection result, Then, a value to be summed up to the counter of the number of the acquired bonus balls and the counter of the number of the continuous acquired bonus balls may be calculated. Hereinafter, the display of the winning combination ratio will be specifically described. In the following specific example, an example will be described in which sensors provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that a game medium has won, and the number of prize balls is individually counted based on the detection result.

  As shown in FIG. 64, a display monitor 9029 is connected to the main board 9011 of the gaming machine 901. As shown in FIG. 65, the main board 9011 is provided on the back side of the game board 902 (see FIG. 16) provided on the game machine frame 903, as shown in FIG. On the back side of the game board 902, in addition to the main board 9011, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 9012, a sound control board 9013, a sound lamp control board 9014, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are also provided. ing. The main substrate 9011 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with each peripheral substrate other than the main substrate 9011. Note that the main substrate 9011 may overlap with each of these peripheral substrates. In particular, the main board 9011 may overlap so as to be above each peripheral board.

  The RAM 90102 on the main board 9011 includes a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, A third general winning number counter, a fourth general winning number counter, and a large winning number counter are provided.

  The first gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first gate switch 9021A. The second gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 9021B. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 9022A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 9022B.

  The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 9024B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. The large winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023.

  A clear switch is connected to the main board 9011. The clear switch is arranged on the rear side surface of the game board 902 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch, data used for the winning combination and the winning ratio stored in the RAM 90102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when the calculation of the role combination or the role ratio has to be performed again, for example, when a failure occurs in the calculation of the role combination or the role ratio. For this reason, the switch does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal combination of positions and a combination of positions. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 9011 in addition to clearing the data.

  The main substrate 9011 is provided with an RTC 90106. The main board 9011 can detect the current time by the RTC 90106. The RTC 90106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing the initial setting. In this embodiment, the RTC 90106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 9011 is housed in a board case 90201 as shown in FIG. A caulking pin 9011B is attached to the board case 90201. With the provision of the caulking pins 9011B, the main board 9011 is completely sealed in the board case 90201, thereby preventing improper acts on the main board 9011. The board case 90201 is a swaged board case (hereinafter, also referred to as a “swaging board case”).

  The display monitor 9029 is provided over the main substrate 9011. Further, a sealing seal 9011S for proving that the main substrate 9011 is sealed is attached to the substrate case 90201. The sealing seal 9011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 90201. The sealing seal 9011S is arranged at a position distant from the main substrate 9011, and is arranged at a position different from a position where visibility of the display monitor 9029 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 9029. Thus, the display monitor 9029 is arranged at a position that is not hidden by the seal 9011S.

  The display monitor 9029 includes a first display portion 9029A, a second display portion 9029B, a third display portion 9029C, and a fourth display portion 9029D. Each of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D is composed of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display portion 9029A to fourth display portion 9029D can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. Further, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in a very short cycle.

  The display monitor 9029 displays items of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. The tally period is displayed on the first two display units 9029A and 9029B of the upper two digits, and the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D of the lower two digits. In display No. 1, short-term winning combinations are displayed, and in display No. 2, short-term winning combinations are displayed. In the display No. 3, the total number of winning combinations is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the total winning combination is displayed.

  Here, the short term means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 60,000. The period in which the total sum is obtained means the total period after starting the calculation of the winning combination and the winning ratio, or the total period after resetting the calculation of the winning combination and the winning ratio once.

  In the above example, the winning combination and the winning ratio are calculated without depending on the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the winning combination may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening during the jackpot game state. In addition, the winning combination is the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the total winning prize balls in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the winning prize openings in the jackpot game state. May be the ratio occupied by the number of award balls due to winning.

  In a case where the short-term combination of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B are displayed. “Y7.” Is displayed on the display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B. In addition, when the short-term combination of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term combination of the short-term combination is displayed on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B (% display), and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B display the short-term winning combination as a percentage (% display).

  When the total total winning combination of the display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and when the total total winning combination of the display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B. In addition, when the total cumulative combination of the display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative combination of the display No. 4 is displayed in percentage (%) on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D, and the total cumulative combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D.

  The main board 9011 calculates the number of game balls entered from the attacker, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening in calculating the winning combination and the winning ratio. Tallying. In the main process, the CPU 90103 executes the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general A state confirmation process for confirming the state of each switch of the winning opening switch 9024D (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is performed.

  In this switch state confirmation processing, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the values of the first gate passage number counter and the second gate passage number counter are added, and the first start port switch 9022A, When the detection signal is output from the second start opening switch 9022B, the values of the first start winning number counter and the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 9023, The value of the large winning number counter is added, and the detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. Are the first general prize counter, the second general prize counter, the third general prize counter, and the fourth general prize counter By adding the value, it counts the entry number of game balls (winning number of game balls to each winning hole) to each entry area. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 90102.

  As described above, the step of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processing for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (included in the switch state confirmation processing). This makes it possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without having to execute a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. .

  The CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 calculates the number of prize balls by winning in each winning opening based on the total number of game balls winning in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 90102 for each winning opening. Let it. The number of prize balls obtained by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize to the prize port by the number of prizes to the prize port. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is predetermined for each winning port.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the number of prize balls for each prize port classified here is a general prize port prize ball (prize ball by prize winning from the first general prize port to the fourth general prize port (sode)), First start winning opening prize ball (winning prize in the first start winning opening (navel)), normal electric prize winning ball (winning prize in electric chute), special electric winning prize ball (winning in attacker) Award balls). The RAM 90102 also stores the total number of prize balls. Although the CPU 90103 separately counts the number of game balls won to the general winning opening and the number of game balls won to the first starting opening, the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first starting opening. The number of game ball winnings may be summed up. The number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting opening prize ball are calculated separately. May be calculated collectively.

  The RAM 90102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of award balls. The ring buffer includes ten first to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (up to 2 bytes). The active buffer also has a 0-th storage area consisting of a 2-byte maximum counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening that increases as the game progresses is added. The eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  In addition, the RAM 90102 is provided with a storage area for a total sum of the number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and a total total for each winning opening. The storage area of the total sum and the total total of 10 sets is constituted by a counter of a maximum of 3 bytes. Therefore, data of 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 can be stored. I can remember.

  In addition, the RAM 90102 is provided with a winning combination ratio storage area for storing the winning combinations and the winning combinations of 10 sets and the total total. The CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 calculates the winning combinations and winning combinations of the 10 sets and the total total based on the winning balls based on the winning numbers of the game balls to the winning ports of the 10 sets and the total cumulative, and calculates the 10 sets and the winning combinations. And, the combination ratio combination storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination of the total cumulative combination. Each combination storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination of the 10 sets and the total accumulated combination is composed of a maximum of 1 byte counter. For example, in the case of storing as an integer, the combination ratio and the combination of 10 sets and the total total can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 will be described. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 90103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described built-in registers, the ROM 90101, the RAM 90102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 68, the address / data signal lines of the ROM 90101 are provided in a ROM area of a memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; the same applies hereinafter). 0000H to 2FBFH, 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to a program management area), and the CPU 90103 specifies this ROM area to read data from the ROM 90101. In this embodiment, the ROM area is managed by dividing it into eight areas, a first area to an eighth area, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal lines of the built-in register are allocated to a register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space. Is written.

  The address / data signal line of the RAM 90102 is allocated to an RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are not used.

  A RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 90102 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) includes a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas as shown in FIG. Have been. The storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the RAM control area stores instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 90103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction. The data for the configured control program (which may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the RAM data area includes reference data referred to by the control program. (For example, the various lottery data described above) are temporarily stored.

  In addition, data used for displaying the winning combination and the winning ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the other areas. For example, the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of winning balls for each winning opening, and a win-win combination ratio storage area for the total sum. The storage areas of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a 1st storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of prize balls (10 sets) for each winning opening. The storage area for the sum total of (i. In the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the other areas, data having different subroutine start addresses are stored.

  In this embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in a storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. are doing.

  Further, the main board 9011 controls the display monitor 9029 to display the winning combination and the winning ratio. Here, the main substrate 9011 performs control for sequentially displaying a plurality of items. FIG. 70A is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 70 (A), when the display on the display monitor 9029 is started, first, the short-term combination of display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term executive association of display No. 1 is displayed in green letters. In the display of the short-term association of display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 70 (B-1), the character “y” is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and the character “6.” is displayed on the second display portion 9029B. Is displayed. In addition, short-term winning combinations are displayed on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. For example, when the short-term role is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display of the display No. 1 is continued for 30 seconds, the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term association of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term duty ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 70 (B-2), the character “y” is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and the character “7.” is displayed on the second display portion 9029B. Is displayed. In addition, the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D display the short-term role ratio. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display of the display No. 2 is continued for 30 seconds, the total total winning combination of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total total combination of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 70 (B-3), the character “A” is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and the character “6.” is displayed on the second display portion 9029B. Is displayed. In addition, the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D display the total total winning combination. For example, when the total total of the cumulative total of winning combinations is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display of the display No. 3 is continued for 30 seconds, the total total winning combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 70 (B-4), the character “A” is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and the character “7.” is displayed on the second display portion 9029B. Is displayed. Further, the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D display the total total winning combination. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term combination of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 70 (B-5). Thereafter, the display of the short-term combination of display No. 1 to the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. As for the display color, only the short-term combination of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 to the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is red. In this way, the display monitor 9029 switches and displays the short-term combination, the short-term combination, the total accumulation combination, and the total accumulation ratio every 30 seconds.

  In addition, in the main board 9011, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reach the predetermined capacity of 6000, the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage of the sum and the total sum of the 10 sets and the combination of the combination of the roles combination storage area for storing the combination of the 10 sets and the total of the combinations of the combinations are updated.

  In updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the ninth storage area are “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, “87”, and “66”, respectively. "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reach 6000, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area are respectively set to “27” “81” “ 120, 36, 225, 87, 66, 117, 45, and 21. Also, the number of award balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of award balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

  The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 shown in FIG. 64 includes a door open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 903a. The opening of the glass door frame 903a does not correspond to an abnormality when performed by an employee, but often corresponds to an abnormality when performed by a person other than the employee. For this reason, in this embodiment, a door opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 903a is included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. The door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main board 9011 when detecting the opening of the glass door frame 903a.

  The door opening includes the normal opening of the glass door frame 903a by an employee and the abnormal opening of the abnormal glass door frame 903a by a person other than the employee. Here, door opening detection is performed on the assumption that the abnormal glass door frame 903a is opened. Further, even if the employee opens the normal glass door frame 903a in which the glass door frame 903a is opened, the door opening is detected, but the employee or the like recognizes that the glass door frame 903a is open. Since there are many, no particular problem can occur.

  Next, control on display of the winning combination ratio executed on the main board 9011 will be described. In the main board 9011, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 90102 are cleared. Therefore, when the power supply from the power supply substrate is started, the data used for displaying the winning combination and the winning ratio stored in the non-use area and other areas of the RAM 90102 is maintained without being cleared. The data used to display the winning combination and the winning ratio stored in the non-use area and other areas of the RAM 90102 are cleared by operating the clear switch. In addition, a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. After the initial setting, the CPU 90103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process. The winning combination and winning combination-related processing is executed by this timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination of positions and combinations of positions ratio. In the main board 9011, as shown in FIG. 72, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation is detected in the combination-of-coupling / combination-ratio process (step S90101). Whether an abnormal operation has been detected is determined by whether a clear switch operation signal has been transmitted from the clear switch.

  As a result, when the clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S90101; YES), a warning display preparation is performed (step S90102), and the process proceeds to step S90103. If the clear switch operation signal has not been transmitted and an abnormal operation has not been detected (step S90101; NO), winning information is acquired (step S90103). The winning information is that a game ball is detected by any one of the first starting port switch 9022A and the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first to the fourth general winning port switches 9024A to 9024D. Is obtained by

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current time is within business hours (step S90104). Whether or not the current time is within business hours is measured and determined by the RTC 90106. As a result, if the current time is within the business hours (step S90104; YES), it is determined whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105). Whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed is determined based on whether or not an opening signal has been transmitted from the door opening sensor.

  As a result, when the opening signal is not output from the door opening sensor and the glass door frame 903a is closed (Step S90105; YES), a predetermined number or more game balls are won by the attacker per unit time. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S90106). Here, the unit time and the predetermined number of balls are set to numerical values assuming a state in which a normal game cannot be won. Specifically, since the maximum number of game balls to be fired is 100 per minute, it can be appropriately determined, for example, with an upper limit of 100 per minute. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is 5 when the unit time is 1 second, or 30 when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is measured by the RTC 90106. The winning number of game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023.

  As a result, if the predetermined number of game balls have not been won by the attacker per unit time (step S90106; NO), the award ball number addition that adds the number of award balls according to the winning information acquired in step S90103 The processing is performed (step S90107). The prize ball number adding process is performed when the warning display preparation is not performed. Here, when the warning display preparation has been performed, the combination of the winning combination and the winning combination process is terminated. In the prize ball number adding process, the general winning opening (sword), the general winning opening (navel), the normal electric winning prize ball (denchu), and the special electric winning prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area shown in FIG. Add the number of each prize ball.

  In addition, in the prize ball number adding process, a general winning opening (sword), a general winning opening (navel), a normal electric winning prize ball (electric Chu), a special electric winning prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer Is calculated for each prize ball number. Here, when the total prize ball of the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches the predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the first storage area of the ring buffer. Move. Further, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. Further, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is deleted.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the time of the calculation timer has expired (calculation timer = 0) (step S90108). As a result, if the calculation timer has not timed out (step S90108; NO), the combination of positions and combinations ratio process ends. If the calculation timer has expired (step S90108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (step S90109).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (total prize balls) obtained by adding in step S90107 is the number of calculation executions (step S90110). The number of calculation executions can be an appropriate number. For example, the reference for moving the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The number may be slightly less than the total 6000 prize balls, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the number of calculated executions is a number slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum number of payout balls from 6000.

  As a result, if the number of awarded balls (total awarded balls) is not the calculated number of executions (step S90110; NO), the combination of winning combination and combination of winning positions process ends. If the number of winning balls is the number of times of calculation execution (step S90110: YES), the winning combination and the winning ratio are calculated (step S90111). Here, the short-term combination, the short-term combination, the total combination (total total combination), and the total combination (total total combination) are calculated. Therefore, the short-term combination, short-term combination, total combination, and total combination are all calculated within the same interrupt. After that, the combination of the role and the role ratio is performed (step S90112), and the process of the combination of the role and the combination of the roles is completed.

  If it is determined in step S90104 that it is not within business hours (step S90104; NO), if it is determined in step S90105 that the door frame is not closed (step S90105; NO), the attacker per unit time is determined in step S90106. When it is determined that the game balls have won a predetermined number of balls or more (step S90106; YES), an error display preparation is performed (step S90113). Thereafter, the processing of the combination of the role and the ratio of the role is ended.

  Next, the winning combination and winning ratio display control processing will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination of winning combination and combination display process. As shown in FIG. 73, in the combination-of-roles display combination control process, it is determined whether or not the preparations for displaying the combination of roles and combination of hands are completed (step S90201). If it is determined that the hand combination and hand ratio display preparation processing has not been completed (step S90201; NO), it is determined whether the error display preparation has been completed (step S90202).

  As a result, when it is determined that the error display preparation is completed (step S90202; YES), an error display is performed (step S90203). The error display can be appropriately performed. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and “0” and “1” can be displayed in the lower two digits. When an error is displayed, a predetermined error may be displayed on another display device, for example, the image display device 905, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, or the like. The effect lamp 909 may be lit or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined alarm sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be provided on a seven-segment display provided on the main substrate 9011 for displaying an error of the gaming machine. Further, these may be performed in combination.

  After performing the error display, it is determined whether the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204). Also, when it is determined in step S90202 that it is not determined whether or not the error display preparation is completed (step S90202; NO), it is determined whether the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204).

  As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204; YES), a warning display is performed (step S90205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from displays other than the warning display. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and “0” and “6” can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 9029 may be blinked to indicate that a warning is given, or may be displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 9029. Alternatively, the display may be performed by increasing the brightness of the display on the display monitor 9029. As described above, it is preferable that the warning display is performed so as to be more conspicuous than other displays.

  When performing the warning display, a predetermined warning display may be performed on another display device, for example, the image display device 905, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, or the like. The effect lamp 909 may be lit or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be provided on a seven-segment display provided on the main substrate 9011 for displaying an error of the gaming machine. Further, these may be performed in combination.

  When the warning display is performed, the combination of positions and combination ratio control process is terminated. Also, when it is determined in step S90204 that the warning display preparation has not been completed (step S90204; NO), the winning combination / combination ratio control process ends.

  If it is determined that the preparation for the display of the combination of positions and the combination of positions is completed (step S90201; YES), the short-range combination of positions is displayed (step S90206). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the short-term combination display (step S90207). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90207; NO), the process returns to step S90206, and the short-term combination display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90207; YES), the process proceeds to step S90208. Thus, the short-term combination display is continuously performed for 30 seconds (30000 ms).

  Subsequently, the short-term role ratio is displayed (step S90208), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the short-term role ratio display (step S90209). Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90209; NO), the process returns to step S90208, and the short-term role ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90209; YES), the process proceeds to step S90210. In this way, the short-term role ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, the display of the accumulated combination of characters is performed (step S90210), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the display of the accumulated combination of characters (step S90211). Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90211; NO), the process returns to step S90210, and the display of the cumulative combination of characters is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90211; YES), the process proceeds to step S90212. In this way, the display of the accumulated winning combination is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, a cumulative combination ratio display is performed (step S90212), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the cumulative combination ratio display (step S90213). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90213; NO), the process returns to step S90212, and the display of the accumulated combination ratio is continued. In this way, the short-term role ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90213; YES), the combination of winning combination and combination ratio control process ends.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 901 described above, the short-term winning combination, the short-term winning ratio, the cumulative winning combination, and the cumulative winning ratio are displayed on the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011. The display monitor 9029 is provided on a main board 9011 that controls a game so that visibility is not hindered. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstacle nails), windmills, and the like provided on the game board.

  Further, the display monitor 9029 is arranged on the front side when the main board 9011 is visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 from being hindered. The main substrate 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation holes provided in the substrate case 90201 are not directly in front of the substrate case 90201. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 can be prevented from being obstructed by the heat radiating holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 from being hindered.

  The main substrate 9011 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with each peripheral substrate other than the main substrate 9011. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 can be prevented from being difficult to see by the peripheral substrate such as the effect control substrate 9012. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 from being hindered.

  In addition, the display monitor 9029 can display a winning combination or a winning combination relating to a relationship between a prize ball paid out by passing an electric chute or an attacker and a prize ball paid out by passing through a general winning opening. . In addition, the display monitor 9029 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term winning combination and a total winning combination every predetermined period. Therefore, there is no need to provide a display for displaying information for a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of components.

  The display monitor 9029 displays the winning combination (short-term winning combination) and the winning combination (short-term winning ratio) each time the number of prize balls reaches 6000. The value of the period corresponding to a certain unit can be easily recognized. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than when the number of prize balls becomes 6000. For example, a period in which the number of prize balls becomes 1,000 or 10,000 may be used. Alternatively, time may be used as a unit instead of the number of award balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

  In addition, the display monitor 9029 switches and displays the winning combination (short-term winning combination) and the winning combination (short-term winning ratio) each time the number of prize balls reaches 6000, as well as the cumulative winning combination and the cumulative winning ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily compare the short-term winning combination and the short-term winning ratio for each predetermined unit with the total winning combination and the total winning combination. The display monitor 9029 is provided on a main board 9011 housed in a caulked board case. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of tampering such as falsification of the display on the display monitor 9029.

  Further, the gaming machine 901 is provided with a detecting means for detecting and detecting a fraud that makes it impossible to display appropriate predetermined information. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of prize balls outside the business hours of the game, counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is open, and winning a game ball exceeding the allowable winning number. The gaming machine 901 operates during the business hours of the game arcade, and the counting of prize balls at times other than the business hours is highly likely to be fraudulent. The gaming machine 901 performs a game with the door frame closed, and the counting of prize balls while the door frame is open is highly likely to be an illegal act.

  Also, during the game of the gaming machine 901, the game ball cannot be fired at a speed exceeding a certain speed. For example, the firing of a game ball is 100 at maximum for one minute. For this reason, the upper limit number of winning of the game ball in one minute is almost 100 pieces. Therefore, for example, when the winning of more than 100 game balls per minute or more than 20 game balls per 12 seconds is detected, the probability of the cheating becomes extremely high.

  In the gaming machine 901, in order to detect fraud, when it is not during business hours, when the glass door frame 903a is not closed, or when a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the attacker per unit time, a prize ball. Eliminates the addition of numbers. Therefore, it is possible to suppress tampering of the information of the combination of the officers and the officers due to these injustices. It should be noted that fraud may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time, instead of the number of prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the attacker per unit time.

  In the gaming machine 901, the number stored in the tenth storage area of the ring buffer is deleted when the number of the zeroth storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 90102 reaches the predetermined capacity of 6000. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the ring buffer from becoming insufficient.

  In the ring buffer, a first storage area to a tenth storage area are provided. When data of the 0th storage area of the active buffer moves to the first storage area of the ring buffer, data of the 10th storage area is stored. Will be erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased is set for each predetermined unit, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the ring buffer from becoming insufficient. Further, it is possible to increase data remaining without being erased.

  When data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, data in the ninth storage area in the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the ninth storage area may be moved by erasing the data in the tenth storage area, or the data in the ninth storage area may be overwritten on the data in the tenth storage area. Also in this case, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the ring buffer from becoming insufficient.

  When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a partial storage area, is deleted in the ring buffer. For this reason, the number of data to be erased can be reduced, so that the shortage of the capacity of the ring buffer can be prevented, and the winning combination and the winning ratio can be calculated with a large amount of data.

  When the data in the ring buffer is erased, not only the data in the tenth storage area but also all the data in the first to tenth storage areas may be erased. . In this case, the capacity shortage of the ring buffer can be more suitably prevented. Further, a part or all of the data in the ring buffer may be deleted according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the start of business hours, all data in the ring buffer may be erased, and thereafter, some data in the ring buffer may be erased.

  Further, in the above example, the movement of data in the ring buffer has been described, but a part or all of the data other than the ring buffer, for example, the storage area for storing the total sum is also deleted. You may.

  In the gaming machine 901, the data of the short-term winning combination, the short-term winning ratio, the total winning combination, and the total winning ratio are displayed every 30 seconds. Therefore, each data can be easily compared. The cycle for displaying each data is not limited to 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate cycle. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be every hour. Further, the data to be displayed may be data other than the data of the short-term combination, the short-term combination, the total combination, and the total combination, or may be a part of these data.

  In displaying the data of the short-term combination, the short-term combination, the total combination, and the total combination, every 30-second cycle, the short-term combination is displayed differently from other data. Specifically, short-term executive associations are displayed in red, and other data are displayed in green. For this reason, it is possible to make the short-term executive association recognize that new data is to be displayed.

  In the gaming machine 901, a warning is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, when the clear switch is operated, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation. The clear switch is a so-called emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the winning combination or the winning ratio. When this switch is operated, falsification of the winning combination or the winning ratio data can be performed, so that the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. In the gaming machine 901, this abnormal operation can be warned by a warning display, so that it is possible to suppress fraud such as data tampering.

  In the gaming machine 901, the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A, the second general winning port switch 9024B, and the third general winning port switch 9024C. The winning combination and the winning ratio are calculated based on the number of winning balls obtained based on the detection signal from the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. For example, using a sensor (count switch 9023) individually provided in the attacker, and a sensor provided after a discharge path from which the game medium winning the attacker and the game medium winning the electric chew are discharged merges, Based on the detection results, when counting the number of bonus balls and the number of continuous bonus balls, the total number of winning combinations and the winning ratio are calculated, making it difficult to identify which winning opening is the payout. There is a possibility that the calculation of the ratio and the winning combination may become complicated. In this regard, the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening. The switch 9024D detects that the game medium has won, and the winning combination and the winning ratio are calculated based on the winning number obtained from the detection result, thereby determining the number of winning balls based on winning in each winning opening. it can. Therefore, it is possible to easily calculate the winning combination and the winning ratio, and it is possible to accurately calculate the winning combination and the winning ratio.

(Modification of Display Control and Display Items of Winning Number Information)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example was described in which items related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. Not limited to this, for example, an item related to the number of times a game ball has passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B may be displayed in the first area α. When the game ball passes through the gates 9041A and 9041B, a pass gate designation command for designating which gate the game ball has passed from the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) to the effect control board 9012 (production By transmitting the information to the control CPU 90120), the effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of times the game balls have passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B and display the total in the first area α.

  For example, the number of times of passing through the gate today (corresponding to A1) and the current day are calculated by the same method as the counting process when a general winning opening designation command for designating which of the first to fourth general winning openings has been received is received. Gate passing ratio (corresponding to A2), number of gate passing in low base state (corresponding to B1), gate passing ratio in low base state (corresponding to B2), number of gate passing in high base state (corresponding to C1), high base The state gate pass ratio (corresponding to C2), the number of gate passes (corresponding to D1) in the set period, and the gate pass ratio (corresponding to D2) in the set period are totaled and can be displayed in the first area α. . Also, these items can be totaled for each gate (for each of the gates 9041A and 9041B) and displayed in the first area α.

  (2) In addition, since the effect control CPU 90120 receives the special winning opening winning command from the game control microcomputer 90100, the effect controlling CPU 90120 can count the number of winnings to the special winning opening, and can win the winning in the special winning opening. The number of awarded balls based on the total number can be displayed in the first area α.

  For example, by the same method as the tallying process when a general winning opening designation command for designating which of the first to fourth general winning openings has been received, the number of winnings to the grand winning opening of the day (A1 Equivalent), "Today's winning prize in the winning opening (corresponding to A2)", "Today's winning prize ball awarded based on winning in the winning prize (A3)", "Today's total Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the grand prize opening of the day to the number of prize balls (equivalent to A4) "," Number of prize balls to the grand prize opening during the set period (equivalent to D1) " "The winning ratio to the special winning opening in the set period (corresponding to D2)", "the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning in the special winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D3)", and " Awarded based on winning in the big winning opening in the set period for the number of awarded balls awarded The percentage of winning balls number (corresponding to D4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  Here, "the ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning of the grand prize opening of the day to the total number of prize balls of the day (corresponding to A4)" or "the prize ball awarded during the set period" If the ratio (equivalent to D4) of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning in the special winning opening during the set period for the number is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 60%), the fact is notified. You may make it. For example, a message that "the winning prize mouth ball ratio exceeds the reference value (60%)" may be displayed in the first area α.

  Further, the number of prize balls given based on winning in the second starting winning opening controlled by the normally variable winning prize ball device 906B with respect to the total prize ball number and opening / closing control by the special variable prize ball device 907 are performed. If the total ratio with the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning in the special winning opening is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 70%), it may be notified to that effect. For example, in the first area α, a message such as “The bonus prize ball ratio exceeds the reference value (70%)” may be displayed.

  (3) In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 together with the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side transmits each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when a game ball enters each entry area. Although the example of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area based on the above has been described, in the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side of the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side, Or the effect control CPU 90120 enters the game ball into each entry area based on each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters each entry area. It is also possible to count the numbers.

  The number of game balls entering each entry area (the value of the counter corresponding to each switch) counted by the game control microcomputer 90100 or the effect control CPU 90120 on the main board 9011 side is transmitted to the effect control CPU 90120. Then, the image can be displayed on the image display device 905. For example, by outputting from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012 a command specifying the total number of entries into each entry area, the effect control CPU 90120 allows the entry control area 9032 to enter each entry area based on the command. The number of approaches can be specified and displayed in the first area α.

  It should be noted that the number of entries into each entry area counted by the game control microcomputer 90100 is displayed on a display device provided on the main board 9011 such as the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. May be displayed. When the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening does not reach the predetermined reference ratio, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are displayed. A special display different from the display result of the variable display of the special symbol may be performed to notify that effect. Note that the display device provided on the main substrate 9011 on which the totaled result is displayed is not limited to the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the like. It may be a display device provided exclusively for. Further, the display device may be in any form such as a lamp, an LED, a 7-segment, a liquid crystal display device, an EL panel, and a light guide plate.

  The value of each counter (the number of entries into each entry area) stored in the RAM 90102 is, for example, a game state flag (probable change state, time saving state, and the like) stored in the RAM 90102 that can be specified by the game control microcomputer 90100. When a reset operation for resetting a flag corresponding to a game state for performing the game is performed by the game arcade side (for example, a clerk), the display is displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. Alternatively, the information may be output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012 and displayed on the image display device 905 for a certain period. The reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main board 9011. The reset button is provided on the back side (the game island side) of the gaming board 902, and rotates the gaming board 902 forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903 using the hinge mechanism of the gaming machine frame 903. By doing so, the reset button provided on the back side of the game board 902 can be operated.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the number-of-wins information (D1 to D4) in the counting period set by the player can be displayed in the first area α. However, regardless of the operation of the player, A tally period is set in the gaming machine (for example, a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) is stored, or set by an operation of the game arcade), and the number of winnings in the set tally period Information (corresponding to D1 to D4) may be displayed in the first area α. For example, the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 60 minutes is totaled, the total value is displayed in the first area α, and the total value is less than a predetermined reference value (for example, 60 times / 60 minutes). In such a case, this may be notified.

  (5) Further, when a prize to a specific winning opening does not occur for a predetermined period, the fact may be notified to the first area α. For example, if there is no winning in the general winning opening for 10 minutes, a message “No general winning for 10 minutes” may be displayed in the first area α. The predetermined period may be set by an operation on the game hall (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030), and may be set on an operation on the player side (for example, an operation using the operation button 9030). May be settable.

  (6) The above-described embodiment is also applied to a gaming machine having a distribution device in which the winning ratio between the starting winning opening and the general winning opening is a specific ratio (for example, 1: 1). Winning number information related to the winning number of each winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117434 has a configuration in which game balls received by the sorting device are alternately distributed to a first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening. By providing the distributing device, it is possible to alternately distribute the game balls received by the distributing device to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening. The above-described embodiment is also applied to the gaming machine having a configuration in which the distribution device alternately distributes the game balls to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening, and the winning number information relating to the winning number to each winning opening is firstly applied. It can be displayed in the area α. However, since the number of winnings in the general winning opening is determined automatically according to the number of winnings in the starting winning opening, the ratio of the number of winnings in the general winning opening to the number of winnings in the starting winning opening is displayed as described above. There is no need to make it.

  (7) In FIG. 61, the counting period can be set according to the operation of the player, but the winning number information is reset according to the operation of the player, and the counting of the winning number information is started from the reset timing. You may do so. For example, when the player performs an operation of starting counting, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is reset to 0, and thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 issues a general winning opening specifying command. Each time it is received, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α may be increased by one.

  Further, the once set tally period may be changed according to the operation of the player before the set period elapses. For example, although the totaling period is initially set to 30 minutes, the player may perform a resetting operation before the set period elapses to shorten the totaling period to 10 minutes in order to quickly know the totaling result. In addition, although the totaling period is initially set to 10 minutes, the player performs a resetting operation before the set period elapses in order to know the totaling result of a longer period, and extends the totaling period to 30 minutes. Is also good. Further, the once set tally period may be extendable in accordance with the operation of the player after the set period elapses. For example, after a set tally period of 10 minutes elapses, once the tally result of the ten minutes is displayed, the player performs an extension operation to grasp the tally result of a longer tally period, The counting period may be extended by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (as a result, both the counting result of 10 minutes and the counting result of 60 minutes including the 10 minutes are obtained).

  (8) In the demo screen displayed on the image display device 905, or in the first area α in a state where a game is being played (a state where the game end determination is not made and the demo screen is not displayed). An image may be displayed to explain which of the winning holes provided on the game board is the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, or the general winning opening. Alternatively, the number of prize balls of each winning opening may be notified.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the setting of the game place is prioritized over the setting of the player. Conversely, the setting of the player may be prioritized over the setting of the game place. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is at the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screen shown in FIGS. When the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the character “display” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. (The display control of FIGS. 57 and 58 is executed.) When the operation button 9030 is pressed while an icon including the character “not displayed” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. It may not be displayed on the device 905 (the display control of FIG. 59 is executed).

  Alternatively, whether to display the winning number information may be determined in accordance with the order of the received setting operation, with the game hall setting and the player setting having the same priority. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the winning number information with priority given to the last set operation (latest setting operation). For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), thereafter, the winning number information is displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 20 (1) to (3). When the setting is made, the winning number information is displayed (the display control of FIGS. 57 and 58 is executed). Further, even if the setting of not displaying the winning number information is made on the player setting screens of FIGS. 20 (1) to (3), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is thereafter moved to the second position (display position). In this case, the winning number information is displayed (the display control shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), a setting for not displaying the winning number information is thereafter displayed on the player setting screen of FIGS. 20 (1) to (3). In this case, the winning number information is not displayed (the display control of FIG. 59 is executed). Also, even if the setting of displaying the winning number information is made on the player setting screens of FIGS. 20 (1) to (3), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is thereafter moved to the first position (non-display position). ), The winning number information is not displayed (the display control of FIG. 59 is executed).

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not the winning number information is displayed on the image display device 905 by operating the display changeover switch 9032 by the clerk of the game arcade, and the player can operate the operation button 9030 By operating, it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. While it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905, it is not possible for the player to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 (for example, FIG. (A setting screen on the player side as shown in (3) may not be provided). As described above, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 only on the game hall side.

  Conversely, by operating the operation button 9030 by the player (and the clerk of the game hall), it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905. Only the side may be provided with no means for setting whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 (for example, the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided). In the case of such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player and the clerk of the game arcade to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030). . As described above, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation for the player and the game arcade.

  (10) The winning number information relating to the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. Is displayed on the image display device 905 only in the maintenance mode in which the display position is the display position (second position), and the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the non-display position (first position). In the mode, it may not be displayed on the image display device 905. That is, the information may be handled in the same manner as the information in the winning number management table shown in FIG.

  As described above, the prize number information relating to the number of prizes to the respective prize ports (a general prize port, a first start prize port, a second start prize port, etc.) described in FIG. Information that can be displayed on the image display device 905 only when the operation is performed may be information that a player cannot normally see. For example, a state in which a player can play a game (for example, a state in which a demo screen is displayed), a state in which a game end determination is not performed (a state in which a special figure game is executed, Is not displayed on the image display device 905, for example, in a state where the game is being executed, and a jackpot game state, and the like. May be displayed only before the game is performed), or may be displayed only for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) when an operation for stopping the power supply to the gaming machine is performed. Good.

  (11) Further, the winning number information relating to the winning number for each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described in FIG. In this mode, the image may be displayed on the image display device 905. In such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the winning number information can be displayed on the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the game mode, only the first area α is displayed. The winning number information may be displayed. That is, the display area of the number-of-wins information may be different between a period in which the game is not performed and a period in which the game may be performed.

  In the maintenance mode, information on the number of wins for all items that have been added up is displayed, whereas in the game mode, some items (items set by the operation of the game arcade or the player or items set by the player) are displayed. The winning number information of the predetermined main item) may be displayed. That is, the item of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between a period in which the game is not performed and a period in which the game may be performed.

  (12) In the game mode, while the demo screen is displayed due to the determination of the game end, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β. On the other hand, during the period in which the game end determination is not performed and it is determined that the game is being played, the winning number information may be displayed only in the first area α. That is, the display area of the number-of-wins information may be different between the period in which the game is determined not to be performed and the period in which the game is determined to be performed.

  Also, during the period in which the demo screen is displayed due to the game end determination being made, the winning number information of all the totaled items is displayed. During the period determined to be medium, the winning number information of some items (items set by the operation of the game arcade or the player or predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the items of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which the game is determined not to be performed and the period in which the game is determined to be performed.

  (13) In the above embodiment, the display position and the display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, fourth symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information) are set to display the winning number information ( 57 and 58) and the setting for not displaying the prize number information (FIG. 59) are not changed (shared), but for other images (background images), the setting for displaying the prize number information and the prize number are not changed. The visible range is made different from the setting for not displaying the information. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the setting for displaying the winning number information (FIG. 62 (a)) as shown in FIG. With the setting of not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 62 (b)), the display position and the display range (image size) of all images including the background image other than the winning number information may be shared. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the control burden due to the display / non-display setting of the winning number information.

  (14) In the above embodiment, the display position and the display range (image size) of the decorative pattern are set to display the winning number information (FIGS. 57 and 58) and not to display the winning number information (FIG. 59). ) Is not changed (shared), but the display position and the display range of the decorative symbol may be changed according to the display / non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 63, in the setting for displaying the winning number information (FIG. 63 (a)), the setting for not displaying the winning number information is longer than the interval between the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (FIG. In b)), the intervals between the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R may be widened. That is, when the winning number information is not displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be executed using the entire screen. In this example, the decorative symbol display area 905L when the winning number information is not displayed is included in the first area α. As described above, when the winning number information is not displayed, the variable display or the stop display of the decorative symbol in the first area α may be allowed. In this way, the effect may be enhanced by executing the effect using the entire screen.

  (15) In the above embodiment, the magnetic machine, the vibration abnormality, and the radio wave abnormality are exemplified as the gaming machine errors. However, the present invention is not limited to these, and the gaming machine errors include the front door opening abnormality and the payout mechanism abnormality. (Abnormal prize ball, etc.), improper winning prize of the special winning opening (abnormal prize opening is detected even if the special winning opening is not open), or malfunction of various members of the pachinko gaming machine 901 And so on.

[Other Modifications]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Note that the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-described effects may be arbitrarily combined. The control and configuration of the gaming machine may be arbitrarily combined.

  In the above-described embodiment, due to the arrangement of the game nails on the game board surface and the members that define the flowing direction of the game balls, the game balls that have not passed through the gate 9041B are placed in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It is assumed that one of them can be awarded. With such a configuration, even if the game ball does not pass through the gate 9041B in the probable change state or the time saving state, it is possible to expect a prize to a general prize port provided on the downstream side of the game sphere. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, a game ball that has not passed through the gate 9041B may win one of the third general prize port 9050C and the fourth general prize port 9050D at a higher rate than a game ball that has passed the gate 9041B. . With such a configuration, even when the frequency of the game balls passing through the gate 9041B is low in the probable change state or the time saving state, it is possible to expect a prize to be provided to the general prize port provided downstream thereof. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. Further, by executing the specific effect based on the winning in the general winning opening, it is possible to further enhance the gaming interest.

  In the above embodiment, executing the specific effect at a different rate according to the game state includes executing the specific effect only in a certain game state and not executing the specific effect in another game state. . Also, in the above embodiment, executing a specific effect at a different rate depending on the game period means that the specific effect can be executed only during a certain game period, and the specific effect may not be executed during another game period. included.

  In the above embodiment, in order to execute the effect at a higher rate in the first state than in the second state different from the first state, the effect can be executed only in the first state. In the second state, the effect is not executed. Here, the division between the first state and the second state includes, in addition to the division according to the above-mentioned gaming state, a division according to the number of stored memories, and a division according to the execution period of the special figure game (special figure game). (For example, whether or not the variable pattern of the variable display being executed is a variable pattern accompanied by a reach effect, or , The variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern involving a pseudo continuous production or not, and a category corresponding to a specific production timing (for example, before a reach state is established in a variation pattern involving a reach production) Or after the establishment, or before or after the execution of the pseudo continuous production in the fluctuation pattern with the pseudo continuous production). .

  In the first effect form to the twelfth effect form, the specific effect may be executable only in one of (1) the normal state and (2) the probable change state or the time saving state. For example, (1) the specific effect may be executed only in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect may not be executed in the probable change state or the time saving state. In the thirteenth production form to the twenty-fourth production form, one of (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, and (2) a period outside the period of the reach fluctuation or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. The specific effect may be executable only in one of the cases. For example, (1) the specific effect can be executed only in the period after the reach state is established in the reach change, and (2) in the period before the reach state is established in the reach change or outside the reach change period. The effect may not be executed.

  In the first effect form to the twelfth effect form, depending on whether the gaming state is (1) the normal state, or (2) the probable change state or the time saving state, the execution ratio of the specific effect and the executed state are determined. Although the type of the specific effect is different, when it is controlled to the big hit game state, based on the same effect execution condition as when the game state is the normal state, whether or not the specific effect is executed, The type may be determined, and the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the same effect execution condition as that in the probability change state or the time saving state. . The classification of the game state is not limited to (1) the normal state, (2) the probable change state or the time saving state, but, for example, (1) the high base state, (2) It may be a category of whether it is a high base state, or a category of (1) a jackpot game state or (2) a jackpot game state.

  In the thirteenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form, the game period is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach change, or (2) the outside of the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change. Whether or not a specific effect is to be executed and the type of the specific effect to be executed are determined according to the period. However, the present invention is not limited to such a division of the game period. Is a period of 1 or less, or (2) is a period of 2 or more reserved memories, and (1) is a period during which variable display of decorative symbols is performed, (2) It may be a classification as to whether or not it is a period during which the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed.

  Also, (1) is a period during which a variable display without a reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) is a period during which a variable display with a reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, May be the division. In addition, the classification may be based on whether (1) a period during which variable display without pseudo continuous production is performed or (2) a period during when variable display with pseudo continuous production is performed. . Furthermore, even if the classification is (1) before the execution of the pseudo continuous production in the variable display with the pseudo continuous production, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo continuous production in the variable display with the pseudo continuous production. Good.

  In the first to fourth effect forms and the thirteenth to sixteenth effect forms, only one of the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed as the specific effect, but both the specific effect A and the specific effect B May be executable. That is, when the winning condition is satisfied, one of the fluctuation result announcement effect and the look-ahead announcement effect that meets a predetermined condition is executed (for example, when the number of stored memories is 1 or less, the fluctuation result announcement effect is executed). If the number of reserved storages is two or more, a prefetch notice effect is executed), or both may be executed simultaneously. For example, if the look-ahead notice effect is an effect that changes the form of the display information (display part) corresponding to the hold memory, the above-described change result notice effect (only sound effect, or sound effect and character effect) The look-ahead notice effect can be executed at the same time, and the player can grasp that both the fluctuation result notice effect and the look-ahead notice effect have been executed. Further, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display or the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, if the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied is a big hit symbol, the variable result preview effect is executed with priority, and the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied is performed. If there is a hold memory that is a lost symbol but is determined to be a big hit in the start winning determination, it is preferable to give priority to the prefetch notice effect.

  In the above embodiment, whether or not the winning number is displayed by the operation button 9030 is set only during the period in which the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the game is in the non-game state (only when the demonstration screen is displayed). Although the example which has become possible has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and regardless of the game state (for example, the normal state, the probable change state, the time saving state, the big hit game state), and the execution state of the special figure game (special symbol) Whether the variable display is being executed, the number of stored special figure games), the execution status of the ordinary figure game (whether or not the variable display of the ordinary symbols is executed, the number of reserved memories of the ordinary figure game) ), It may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number with the operation button 9030. In other words, even during a period in which a game is being played, for example, a period in which a decorative symbol is variably displayed or a period in which a jackpot game state is controlled, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings is displayed by the operation button 9030. It may be settable. In such a configuration, when a setting is made to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, regardless of the gaming state (for example, a normal state, a probable change state, a time saving state, a big hit gaming state), The execution status of the game (whether the special symbol variable display is executed or not, the number of reserved special game games stored), the execution status of the ordinary game (whether the normal symbol variable display is executed or not) The total number of winnings in the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the number of times the regular game is held.

  In the above embodiment, since there is no restriction on the period during which the display changeover switch 9032 can be operated, if the glass door frame 903a can be opened on the game hall, the display changeover switch 9032 is operated. It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. The present invention is not limited to such a form, and the period in which the setting operation can be performed in the game hall may be limited. For example, as a configuration in which the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided, when setting whether or not to display the number of winnings at the general winning opening on the game arcade side, the setting screen shown in FIGS. It is assumed that selection and determination are performed using the operation button 9030. In such a configuration, depending on a game state (for example, a normal state, a probable change state, a time saving state, a big hit game state), or the execution state of a special figure game (variable display of a special symbol is performed or not) 20 (1) to 20 (1) to 20 according to the state of the reserved figure game (special game storage number) and the state of execution of the general figure game (whether or not the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed, and the number of reserved storage of the general figure game). The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, a period during which the game is controlled to the big hit game state, a period during which the state is controlled to the probability change state or the time saving state, a period during which the special figure game is executed, and a period when the number of reserved memories of the special figure game is not 0 are illustrated in FIG. The setting screens shown in 20 (1) to 20 (3) may not be displayed, and the setting operation on the game arcade side may be prohibited.

  In the above-described embodiment, only when the setting of displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the gaming side by setting the display changeover switch 9032 that cannot be operated by the player (the operation unit is set to the second position) is performed. A setting screen (FIGS. 20 (1) to (3)) for enabling the player to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed. Not limited to the form, as a configuration in which the display changeover switch 9032 that can be operated only by the game hall side is not provided, whether or not to display the number of winnings at the general winning opening can be set on both the player side and the game hall side. 20 (1) to (3), and is used to select and determine whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by operating the operation button 9030. Screen) may be displayed. In such a configuration in which the common setting screen is displayed, even if the clerk at the game arcade does not display the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the player thereafter sets the number of winnings to the general winning opening. In the case of setting to display, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 905 by applying the setting received later.

  In addition, a setting is made to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by setting a display changeover switch 9032 that can be operated only by the game arcade side (the operation unit is set to the second position), and a general operation is performed by operating the operation button 9030. Common information (for example, the number of prizes to each general prize port and the total number of prizes stored in the display control table) is displayed on the image display device 905 in a case where the number of prizes to the prize port is set to be displayed. You may make it do. In such a configuration, even if the setting is made such that the common information is not displayed by switching the display changeover switch 9032, if the setting is made so that the common information is displayed by operating the operation button 9030, The common information may be displayed on the image display device 905 by applying the setting received later.

  In the above embodiment, a limit may be provided on a period (game state) in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed. For example, during the period in which the decorative design is variably displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed during the period from when the reach state is established to when the finalized decorative design is derived and displayed. . Further, in a predetermined game state such as a probable change state or a time saving state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may not be displayed. In such a mode, the setting unit (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game hall determines which period (game state) allows or does not display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. The setting may be made, or the setting may be made by setting means (for example, the operation button 9030) on the player side.

  In the above embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the player inputs a player ID (for example, an ID of a recording medium owned by the player, an ID for personal identification registered on a website) or the like by using the operation button 9030. By doing so, the game data including the number of winnings to the general winning opening after the player ID is input can be totaled, and the operation button 9030 can be operated when ending the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The game data collected after the player ID is input may be output to the image display device 905 as a two-dimensional code. The player captures a two-dimensional code (information that can specify a player ID and game data) with an information terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function, and the information terminal and an information management server connected to the Internet And the game data specified from the two-dimensional code is added to the game data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID specified from the two-dimensional code. The game data managed by is updated. The player can access the information management server with the information terminal and check his / her own game data (game data associated with the player ID), and as a result, wins the general winning opening. The number can be grasped. In such a form, whether or not the two-dimensional code can be displayed on the image display device 905 may be set by a setting unit (for example, a display changeover switch 9032) on the game arcade side, or may be set by the player. (For example, the operation button 9030).

  In such a case, a privilege may be given to the player according to the number of winnings at the general winning opening stored for each player ID in the information management server. For example, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening exceeds a predetermined number, a background image or application software that can be used on the information terminal is given as a privilege to the player of the player ID. Is also good. Further, points corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening may be given to the player, and the information management server may manage the number of points owned by the player in association with the player ID. Then, the player may be able to exchange some or all of the possessed points for the privilege.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening. However, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. It may be a notification that the user has performed the action. For example, a prize information message may be displayed on the image display device 905 at the timing when the game ball has won the general prize port, and the effect sounds and sounds of the prize information are output from the speakers 908L and 908R. It may be. In the case of such a configuration, similarly to the above-described embodiment, whether or not to notify that the game ball has won the general winning opening is set by the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game arcade side. The setting may be made, or the setting may be made by a setting means (for example, the operation button 9030) on the player side.

(1) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the status of winning in the general winning opening may be notified. Specifically, the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings in each general winning opening and the winning frequency (the ratio of the number of winnings in the general winning opening to the number of shot balls into the game area, or the general winnings per time). (The number of winnings in the mouth) may be displayed, or the light emission mode of the gaming effect lamp 909 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening or the winning frequency. Further, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the winning in the general winning opening may be notified by sound from the speakers 908L and 908R. By using such voice notification, it is easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency to the general winning opening. Further, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the hitting operation handle, the operation button 9030 and the like may be vibrated. By using such bodily sensation notification, it is easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency to the general winning opening.

  The number of winnings in each general winning opening and the winning frequency can be displayed on the image display device 905 and output to a management device such as a hall computer communicably connected to the pachinko gaming machine 901. The number of winnings in each general winning opening can be managed for each machine. This information can be used, for example, for maintenance of the gaming machine.

(2) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a sound effect may be output when a game ball wins in a general winning opening, and may be different from a sound effect obtained when another winning opening such as a starting winning opening is won. Should be output. In such a configuration, the sound effect at the time of winning may be different for each of the general winning openings. In such a configuration, the sound effect may not be output when a specific general winning opening is won.

(3) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the execution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode may be changed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative symbol variable display that is executed after the game ball has won the general winning opening, the execution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode change, and a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined variable Until the number of times of display is executed, the changed execution ratio and effect form may be continued.

(4) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball has won the general winning opening, and a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined variable display number is executed. Until the time, the music after the change may be continued. In addition, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening reaches a predetermined value, a specific music (for example, music during a big hit) may be output. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening or the number of game balls winning the general winning opening has reached a predetermined number, the player reproduces from a plurality of music pieces (BGM). The music (BGM) may be selectable.

  Further, the music being reproduced may be continuously output based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. For example, when the big hit game state is controlled, the music during the big hit may be continuously output even after the big hit game state ends, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening. In addition, a stage change for changing the background image of the decorative symbol and the music (BGM) may be executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. Note that the stage (background image and music) of the transition destination may be made different depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings has been won.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the specific effect executed based on the winning in the general winning opening is a change result notice effect and a look-ahead notice effect related to the display result of the special figure game. Not limited to such a form, the specific effect may be an effect that is not related to the display result of the special figure game. For example, an effect may be such that a general winning opening in which a game ball does not win out of a plurality of general winning openings is displayed, and a character appears when a game ball wins in the general winning opening.

(6) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when a game ball does not win in the general winning opening for a predetermined period, even if the game ball is fired in the gaming area, or when the frequency of winning in the general winning opening is less than the threshold value. In some cases, a specific notification may be executed, such as displaying on the image display device 905 that no winning has occurred in the general winning opening. In addition, even if the game ball is fired in the game area, the game ball does not win only in a specific general winning opening among a plurality of general winning openings for a predetermined period, or a winning in a specific general winning opening. When the frequency is less than the threshold value, a specific notification such as displaying that no prize in the specific general winning opening has occurred on the image display device 905 may be executed.

(7) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the simultaneous production is performed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening until the simultaneous production is performed, or simultaneously. A specific effect may be executed according to a winning in the general winning opening during the effect period. Further, the decorative symbol may be changed, the stop symbol may be changed, or a sliding effect may be executed in accordance with the winning of the general winning opening during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

(8) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, every time a game ball wins the general winning opening, the number of objects displayed on the image display device 905 is increased by one to recognize the number of winnings and winnings in the general winning opening. It may be easier. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, only the number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening is added up, and the number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening is set. May reach a predetermined number, a special effect such as displaying “100 breakthrough!” On the image display device 905 may be executed. If the timing at which the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning in the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number is a period during which a notification of a gaming machine error based on fraud detection or failure detection is made, It is assumed that the notification of the gaming machine error is displayed with priority over the specific effect, and the specific effect held after the notification of the gaming machine error is executed.

(9) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a prize sound is output each time a gaming ball wins in the general winning opening, and during the notification of the gaming machine error, the notification sound of the gaming machine error is output rather than the prize sound. You may make it output preferentially. Also, every time a game ball wins in the general winning opening, a winning display is displayed on the image display device 905, and during the notification of the gaming machine error, the display of the gaming machine error is given priority over the winning display. You may make it do.

(10) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening, and the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. May be added to the prize ball number paid out based on the prize ball number and displayed on the image display device 905 as [the prize ball number paid out in the big hit game state]. In the case of such a configuration, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the special winning opening is added to the displayed [number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state]. At the same time, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening may be added. That is, the number of prize balls per one display update may be increased apparently. In addition, the [number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state] is updated according to the timing of the game ball entering the big winning opening, and [the big hit game state] The display update may be performed according to the individual winning timing, such as updating the number of paid-out prize balls].

(11) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of prize balls may be varied according to the general winning opening. For example, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B of the left gaming region 9010A, ten winning balls are paid out, but the third general winning opening of the right gaming region 9010B. When a game ball wins in the 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, five award balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, an effect of inciting a general prize port with a game ball may be executed. For example, in a form in which a specific effect is executed by causing each of a plurality of general winning openings to play a game ball, as in the sixth effect mode, the seventh effect mode, and the fourteenth effect mode, the plurality of times The image display device 905 informs the general winning opening where the game ball has not won of the general winning opening, and performs an effect indicating to the player to aim at the general winning opening where the game ball does not win. It is good to Further, in a form such as the eighth effect form and the sixteenth effect form, in which a specific effect is executed based on a plurality of winning openings having game balls winning in a specific order, a winning opening to be won and The order in which the prize should be won may be notified by the image display device 905 so that the player can grasp the order. For example, in order to execute the specific effect A in the eighth effect mode, first, “Aim for the first general winning opening!” Is displayed, and after the winning in the first general winning opening 9050A is confirmed, the following is performed. "Aim for the first starting winning opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning in the first starting winning opening is confirmed, finally, "Aim for the second general winning opening!" After the winning in the general winning opening 9050B is confirmed, the specific effect A is executed.

(13) In the case where the game area 9010 is provided with a guide path for a game ball heading for a general winning opening, and a configuration is such that the entry sensor can detect that the game ball has entered the guide path. On the basis of the detection of the game ball by the entry sensor, an effect of notifying in advance that the game ball wins the general winning opening may be executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will miss the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. Also, a period from the prize of the game ball to the general winning opening to the payout of the prize ball is secured for a certain period of time, and an effect based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is executed within the period. You may do so.

(14) In the case where a stage on which a game ball can roll is provided below the image display device 905, an entrance to a general winning opening or a guide path connected to the general winning opening is provided on the stage. It may be configured so that the player is interested in whether or not the game ball enters the general winning opening or the entrance to the guidance route.

(15) An effect may be executed in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display device 905 is updated each time a prize is won in the general prize port. For example, the character grows for each winning in the general winning opening, and when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number (when the character has grown to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (such as giving a privilege) is executed. You may do so. In addition, every time a prize is entered into the general winning opening, an effect of increasing the gauge is executed, and when a predetermined number of prizes is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion effect (grant of a privilege) Etc.) may be executed. In such an effect, different objects are displayed according to the general winning opening, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning opening is updated. May be performed.

(16) In the above embodiment, the type of the specific effect to be executed (variation result notice effect, look-ahead notice effect) differs depending on the game state when the winning condition is established, and is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Although the example in which the sound is different has been described, the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be different depending on the game state, without being limited to such a form. In addition, in the probable change state and the time reduction state, the effect by the game effect lamp 909 and the reproduced music are often flashy in order to improve the interest compared to the normal state, so that the specific effect mode is also increased. You may make it an easy-to-understand and fancy mode for a player.

(17) When a certain number of game balls are fired in the game area 9010, but the number of winnings in the general winning opening or the winning frequency is less than the reference value, the player is generally grasped. Information on a gaming machine for which it is difficult to perform, such as a latent probability change state or a limiter, may be notified.

(18) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the specific effect is executed immediately after the winning condition is satisfied has been described. If the prize-winning condition is satisfied in a state where the total number of the number and the second reserved storage number is also 0, neither the fluctuation result preview effect nor the look-ahead preview effect can be executed. In this case, an effect that is not related to the display result of the special figure game (for example, the appearance of a specific character or the reproduction of a specific song) may be executed as the specific effect.

(19) Also, when the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the number of reserved storages (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 0 and the winning condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the execution of the specific effect may be suspended, and thereafter, the specific effect may be executed at a timing at which the variable display of the special figure is executed or at a timing at which the number of reserved storages becomes two or more. In other words, the specific effect is not immediately executed based on the establishment of the winning condition, and the specific effect that has been suspended based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game has been satisfied or the fact that the start condition of the special figure game has been satisfied has been performed. It may be executed.

(20) In the above-described embodiment, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number, the game ball is not won in the general winning opening (for example, “the number of winnings in the general winning opening is small. May be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, only during the maintenance mode in which the information for the clerk (the winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the setting of the mode switch 9031, the general mode is set. It may be displayed on the image display device 905 that the game ball does not win in the winning opening. The clerk at the amusement arcade can check whether there is any abnormality in the winning situation of the game ball to the general winning opening by firing the game ball to the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode. Regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number, the fact that the game ball does not win in the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905. It may be. Similarly to the display control of the number of winnings to the general winning opening, if the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number based on the setting by the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030, the general You may make it display on the image display device 905 that a game ball does not win in a winning opening.

(21) In the above-described embodiment, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is larger than the predetermined number, the game ball is excessively winning in the general winning opening (for example, “general winning opening to the general winning opening”). (The message that the number of winnings is too large) "may be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, only during the maintenance mode in which the information for the clerk (the winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, the general mode is set. It may be displayed on the image display device 905 that the game ball is excessively winning at the winning opening. The clerk at the amusement arcade can check whether there is any abnormality in the winning situation of the game ball to the general winning opening by firing the game ball to the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode.

(22) In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 transmits the winning number information stored in the winning number management table of the effect control board 9012 to the game information management device that manages the game information, and The management device manages the winning number information of each gaming machine. Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs a general winning signal when detecting a winning of a game ball to a general winning opening (for example, a signal of one pulse is output for each winning). By doing so, the gaming information management device may manage the number of winnings to the general winning opening for each gaming machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. In addition, the game information management device stores, as the game information, the number of winnings in the general winning opening per predetermined period (for example, one hour) and the number of winnings in the general winning opening per predetermined number of balls (for example, 6,000 shots). Alternatively, the winning rate of the general winning opening (the number of winnings in the general winning opening / the number of balls driven) may be calculated and managed for each gaming machine.

(23) In the above-described embodiment, the example has been described in which the effect control CPU 90120 increases the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 905 each time a winning in the general winning opening is achieved. The mode of the object displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed every time a prize is won. For example, the expression of the character displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening.

(24) In the above embodiment, when the maintenance mode is set, the information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 as information for the clerk (for example, the number of winning or paying out to each winning opening). However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the notification may be made by sound using the speakers 908L and 908R, or by turning on / off the game effect lamp 909, decoration LED, and 7 segments. You may. Further, the present invention is not limited to a mode in which all information in the winning number management table is reported, and only information about winning ports in which the number of payouts, the winning ratio, and the like do not fall within a predetermined reference range (or fall within the reference range). You may do so.

(25) In the above embodiment, when the maintenance mode is set, the information of the winning number management table is used as the information for the clerk (for example, the number of winning or paying out to each winning opening) as shown in FIG. In the above, an example in which the notification (display) is performed in a mode unrelated to the performance performed is described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the notification may be performed in a mode corresponding to the mode of the performance performed in the game. Good. By being notified in a mode according to the mode of production, it is only necessary to check the mode of notification as to which type of model information is compared with the case of being notified only with table data as shown in FIG. Can be easily grasped. The effect performed in the game may be any effect such as a demonstration screen effect, a notice effect, a reach effect, a large hit effect, and the like. The effect is not limited to the effect displayed on the image display device 905, but may be a sound effect. Or a production by a lamp. In addition, to notify in a mode according to the mode of the production, for example, a character appearing during the notice production or the reach production performs a display or sound output such that the information of the winning number management table is read aloud, Regardless, a resident character that is displayed on the image display device 905 and gives a notice or explanation of a game or the like may perform display or sound output such that the information in the winning number management table is read aloud. Further, the information of the winning number management table may be displayed together with the background image displayed in the game without being limited to the character image.

(26) In the above embodiment, the operating means such as the mode changeover switch 9031 operated to display the information of the winning number management table as information for the clerk (for example, the number of winning or paying out to each winning opening). However, the example in which the player is inoperable and is provided at a position where only the store clerk can operate is described, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the player and the store clerk at the game hall cannot operate. Thus, the game machine may be provided at a position that can be operated only by persons involved such as an inspector, an inspector, and a manufacturer. Further, a person other than the above-mentioned player may be provided at a position where the player can operate the player.

(27) In the above embodiment, a ring buffer provided with 10 counters of up to 2 bytes is used as a storage area for storing information on winning of a game, but a counter of up to 3 bytes or a counter of up to 4 bytes is used. Can also be provided. At this time, a calculation for displaying the above-described two types of the winning combination (%) and the winning combination (%) on the display monitor 9029 based on the total number of game media (prize balls) obtained from the gaming machine. The method is not limited to the method described above, and may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 74, when the total number of acquired balls, the number of acquired accessory balls, and the number of consecutive accessory acquired balls are totaled by a counter consisting of a maximum of 4 bytes, calculation is performed using the upper 16 bits. May go. By the way, assuming that the number of obtained balls is 30,000 / day by using a 4-byte counter, 4294832225 (4 bytes) / 30000 (number of obtained balls per day) = 143161.2075, 143161.2075 / 365 days = 392, which is a calculation that can cover the total of 392 years.

(28) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66A, an example in which the display monitor 9029 is provided at the center of the main substrate 9011 accommodated in the substrate case 90201 has been described. May be provided at other positions.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 75A, a main substrate 9011C provided with no display monitor and a display substrate 11D provided separately from the main substrate 9011C are provided, and the main substrate 9011C and the display substrate 9011D are connected by a harness 9011E. Thus, a display monitor 9029 may be provided on the display substrate 9011D. In this case, the main board 9011C performs the calculation of the winning combination and the winning ratio to be displayed on the display monitor 9029 and the reception of the data used for the calculation. The main board 9011C transmits the calculated hand combination and the hand ratio, as well as information on control for displaying these, to the display board 9011D via the harness 9011E. In the display board 9011D, the combination of the winning combination and the winning combination may be displayed on the display monitor 9029 based on the data transmitted from the main board 9011C.

  The main substrate 9011C and the display substrate 9011D are housed in a substrate case 90201A which is a caulked substrate case. A swaging pin 9011B is attached to the substrate case 90201A, similarly to the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. With the provision of the caulking pins 9011B, the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are completely sealed in the board case 90201A, thereby preventing improper acts on the main board 9011C. Also, in the substrate case 90201A, similarly to the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 66A, holes and heat radiation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 9029.

  As shown in FIG. 75B, the display substrate 9011D may be provided outside the substrate case 90201B which is a caulked substrate case, and the main substrate 9011C may be sealed in the substrate case 90201B. In this example, the display substrate 9011D is connected to the main substrate 9011C by a harness 9011E.

  As shown in FIG. 75C, the display substrate 9011D may be sealed in a substrate case 90201C, and the main substrate 9011C may be sealed in a substrate case 90201B. In this example, the display substrate 9011D is connected to the main substrate 9011C by a harness 9011E. Also, in the substrate case 90201C, similarly to the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 66A, holes and heat radiation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 9029. Note that the substrate case 90201C enclosing the display substrate 9011D may not be a caulked substrate case, and may be a caulked substrate case.

  As shown in FIG. 75D, a label is attached to the surface of the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 65A, and a caulking usage record is written on the label 9011R. Is also good. Here, the label 9011R may be arranged at a position where a part of the display monitor 9029 is hidden. In this way, since a part of the display monitor 9029 is hidden by the label 9011R, for example, when the glass door frame 903a is opened, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing the role combination and the role ratio. Further, even when the label 9011R is attached, the label 9011R may be attached at a position where the display monitor 9029 is not hidden.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as the movable accessory, a motorized accessory such as a large winning opening (attacker) or a second starting winning opening (electric chew) opened and closed by a solenoid is used. Alternatively, a so-called mechanical accessory that opens and closes under its own weight of the game ball may be used as the movable accessory. Further, although a 7-segment LED is used as the display monitor 9029, a dot display or a display screen may be used instead of the 7-segment. Further, instead of the LED, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, a fluorescent display tube, or the like may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the glass door frame 903a may be opened regardless of the contents displayed on the display monitor 9029, for example, the display of the winning combination or the winning ratio, to take measures such as error cancellation. For example, in order to pay out game balls, a supply mechanism for supplying game balls (supply balls) may be provided on the back side of the game board 903. In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball is clogged or the like, the glass door frame 903a may be opened to eliminate the ball clogging and an error may be cleared. When the error is cleared by opening the glass door frame 903a irrespective of the content displayed on the display monitor 9029, the display on the display monitor 9029, such as the position of the winning combination or the winning ratio, may not be performed. Good.

  At this time, in order to prevent the display of the winning combination or the winning combination on the display monitor 9029, the condition may be that no error occurs in the display of the winning combination or the winning ratio. Here, the error with respect to the display of the winning combination or the winning ratio is, for example, detection of an abnormal operation determined in step S90101 shown in FIG. 72, acquisition of winning information during business hours determined in step 104, and step S90106. The detection of a predetermined number or more of winnings for the attacker per unit time determined by the above may be performed. By providing such a condition that no error has occurred with respect to the display of the winning combination, the winning ratio, and the like, it is possible to suppress a situation in which information such as the winning combination and the winning ratio is seen by the player.

  Further, regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 9029, the glass door frame 903a is opened to release the error, and after the error release is completed, the display monitor 9029 is displayed for a predetermined period until a combination of roles and a winning ratio is displayed. For example, the display may be performed after waiting for one minute and after a predetermined time has elapsed. After the occurrence of the error is canceled, the cause of the occurrence of the error cannot be completely removed, and the same error often occurs in many cases. By displaying the combination of the role and the combination of the positions on the display monitor 9029 after the elapse of a predetermined time, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player can see the information of the combination of the combination of the positions and the combination of the roles even when such an error occurs. . The predetermined period here can be set arbitrarily, and may be longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Further, the predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of a clogged ball in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of a failure of the image display device 905, the predetermined period of the clogged ball in the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

  The main board 9011 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 9029, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter, referred to as “error display”) for displaying an error. This error indicator is preferably arranged at a position distant from the display monitor 9029. Specifically, the display monitor 9029 may be arranged at a position on the right side of the main board 9011, and the error indicator may be arranged at a position on the left side of the main board 9011. Further, in order to make the display monitor 9029 easy to understand, the position of the display monitor 9029 on the main substrate 9011 may be printed in characters on the substrate case 90201, or a seal may be attached to the substrate case 90201. You may keep it.

(29) In the above embodiment,
It has been described that the payroll ratio (%) and the payroll (%) are calculated and displayed on the display monitor using a pachinko gaming machine as an example. May be calculated and displayed.

  Hereinafter, a method of calculating the winning combination (%) in the slot machine will be described. In the slot machine, the symbol change can be started by setting the bet number, and a prize is generated according to the result of the symbol change. The prize in the slot machine is shifted to a special prize state in which the award winning accompanied with the provision of a gaming value, a re-game prize in which the symbol can be changed without setting the bet number, and a special gaming state in which the probability of the prize winning increases. There is a bonus prize. Here, the winning combination (%) in the slot machine is a cumulative value of the gaming value obtained as a result of the symbol change during the period in which the symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (the aforementioned pachinko game). (Equivalent to the total number of obtained balls in the game machine), the cumulative value of the gaming value obtained by the award winning due to the change of the symbol during the period of shifting to the special game state (in the aforementioned pachinko machine) (Corresponding to the number of consecutive character acquisition balls). For example, in a period in which symbols are changed 6,000 times, when the number of medals, which is an example of a gaming value obtained in the period, is 16,000, a prize is awarded in a period in which the game is in a special game state. When the number of medals obtained by is 9,000, 0.56 obtained by dividing 9000 by 16000 is a winning combination (%).

  In addition, although the example of displaying the calculated winning ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) on the display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided in the center of the main board has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout control board and the like are not limited to this. A display monitor may be provided on another substrate, a game board surface, a game machine frame (underframe), or the like. Further, the present invention is not limited to the one provided with a dedicated display monitor for displaying the winning combination (%) and the winning combination (%), but also includes an existing display device (for example, an image display device 905, a seven-segment display for displaying an error). The winning combination (%) and the winning combination (%) may be displayed by using a credit indicator or a payout number indicator in a slot machine or a slot machine.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub side) of a change pattern indicating a change mode such as a change time, a type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of a pseudo-run, one change is started when the change is started. Although the example in which the pattern designation command is transmitted has been described, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-run, whether or not there is a slide effect, etc. A command (for example, a previous fluctuation pattern designation command) indicating a fluctuation time and a fluctuation mode (for example, a previous fluctuation pattern) before (the second stop) is transmitted, and in the second command, the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. A command (for example, a post-fluctuation pattern designation command) indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode (for example, a post-fluctuation pattern) after reaching the reach (after the so-called second stop when the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. .

  In this case, the effect control board may perform the effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the fluctuating time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board may select a specific fluctuating mode executed at each timing. When two commands are sent, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is sent, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. By notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands in this manner, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  What is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is only one type of a missing symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “-”), and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. . Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In addition, the image display operation of the image display device, the sound output operation of the speaker, and the lighting operation of the game effect lamp and the decoration LED for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, and the like. Various effect operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the above-described gaming machines are not limited to payout-type gaming machines that pay out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a prize, but enclose game media and score based on the occurrence of a prize. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine to be provided.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 by a removable recording medium. Alternatively, the distribution may be performed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 50 Glass door frame 162a Board holding bracket 174 Rail holding piece 410 Rail decoration frame 421 First holding section 422 Projecting section 423 Second holding section 600 Elastic member 601 Collision surface 602 Through hole 901 Pachinko gaming machine 902 Game board 903 gaming machine frames 904A, 904B special symbol display device 905 image display device 906A ordinary winning ball device 906B ordinary variable winning ball device 907 special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R speaker 909 gaming effect lamp 9011 main board 9012 effect control board 9013 sound Control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Ordinary symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A, 9022B Starter switch 9023 Count switch 9029 Display monitor 9030 Operation button 90100 Game control microphone Computer 90101,90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 Random number circuits 90105, 90125 I / O
90120 Effect control CPU
90123 Display controller 901000 Movable character

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can play games,
A main board for controlling the game,
A predetermined payout area in which a prize ball is paid out when a game medium passes;
Prize ball information display means capable of displaying predetermined prize ball information relating to a prize ball paid out by passing a game medium to the predetermined payout area;
A collision object with which the game medium collides,
A first holder attached to the game board, for holding the collision object at a predetermined position on the game board;
A second holder for holding the first holder attached to the game board;
With
The prize ball information display means is provided on the main substrate so that visibility to the predetermined prize ball information is not hindered, and switches and displays a plurality of the predetermined prize ball information at predetermined intervals. Is possible,
A gap is provided between the hit body and the game board ,
The first holding body has a protruding portion that can be inserted from the front side of the gaming machine toward the hit body,
The impacted object is
A through hole into which the protruding portion of the first holding body is inserted, a collision surface against which a game medium collides,
A non-collision surface that is located on the opposite side to the collision surface with respect to the through hole and does not collide with the game medium,
A gaming machine , wherein a distance from the center of the through hole to the collision surface is longer than a distance from the center of the through hole to the non-collision surface .